UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

LIBRARY

^75

/1l53 e

or before the
Return this book on
below.
Latest Date stamped

lUmoisLib^

University of

DUE:

iSoo

JUL

JUN

W
0

IS31
fi

or?no

1967

OCT 2
NOV
i

3 1S73
5 jt973

9 W87

Li61_H41

LATIN

GRAMMAR

ALLEN

Hontion

HENRY FROWDE

MACMILLAN AND

CO.

AN ,ELEMENTARY

LATIN

GRAMMAR

JOHN BARROW AlLEN,

M.A.

LATE SCHOLAR OF NEW COLLEGE, OXFORD

AUTHOR OF

'

RUDIMENTA LATINA,' 'A FIRST LATIN EXERCISE BOOK'

AND 'a second latin EXERCISE BOOK*

Ninety-seventh Thousand

AT THE CLARENDON PRESS

M DCCC XCI
[A//

rigJiis

reserved^

4"? 5

HORACE HART, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

OJ

This Grammar

is

intended to give such information as

is

The troublesome
many School Grammars is as far

necessary for starting a learner in Latin.

nomenclature

common

as possible avoided

to

and a Short Catechism of Syntax takes

the place of the usual Latin Rules.

In the treatment of Latin Accidence the beaten tracks

pointed out by immemorial usage have been generally ad-

hered

The

to.

principal change

is

the subdivision of the

Perfect into two separate Tenses, conformably to

twofold

its

This

usage, (a) as a Present Past, (5) as a Simple Past.

compel every boy who meets with a Perfect

alteration will

to stop,

if

only as part of his parsing lesson, and reflect

which Tense

Tenses

is

in the

meant.

It

also enables us

Historic, a distinction important for boys to

The

principle of teaching

{^Mo throughout.
part a practical

..

<.

classified

nearly

once
-

group the

remember.

repetition

adhered

is

aim of the work has been to imacquaintance with Latin Syntax by means of
special

the possible

at least with the

Conjugation notes

^difficulties;

by frequent

examples rather than a multitude of

all

to

paradigm under the heads of Primary and

All or

rules.

meanings of each Tense are given

paradigm of every Verb.

are

among them

To

appended explanatory of

each

certain

are included short rules for the

translation of the Accusative

and

Infinitive,

and Ablative

Absolute.

The

Author's best thanks are due to his friends, Henry

John Reade, Head Master of the Godolphin School,

Hammersmith, and Michael Seymour Forster, Head Master
St.

203267

PREFACE,

vi

of Oswestry
sheets

Grammar

School,

who have

revised the proof

and offered many valuable suggestions.

He

has also

to express his obligations to

many

now

indebted for hints on several

in

use, to

which he

points of detail.

and acknowledged

is

of the School Manuals

few rules have been quoted veriatim^

in their

proper place.

Corrections and suggestions of improvements in the work

will

be thankfully received.

Birmingham,

Jwwd",

1874.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

The demand

for a Second Edition has furnished an oppormaking some alterations and additions which were
much needed in the Syntax and Appendix. The book is
now fitted for use in all Forms below the highest in Classical
Schools, and the constant references made to higher autho-

tunity of

rities will, if

attended

to,

prepare for the transition to Madvig,

Roby, the Public Schools Latin Grammar, &c.

whilst for

Middle Class Schools, where the standard of reading does

not go beyond that of the University Local Examinations, no
higher work

will

The Author

is

be needed.
indebted for

many

Joncs, Esq., Grove Park School,

useful hints to

Wrexham, and

J.

Pryce-

the

Rev.

C. G. Gcpp, late Junior Student of Christ Church, Oxford;

also, for

a masterly and

sheets, to the Rev.

the

W.

critical

examination of the proof

F. Moulton, D.D.,

Wesleyan School, Cambridge.

Cambridge, December^

1877.

Head Master of

CONTENTS.
PAGE

Alphabet and Parts of Speech.

The Noun

Substantives

The First Declension

The Second Declension
The Third Declension
The Fourth Declension
The Fifth Declension

.........6
3

4
8

Adjectives

9
13

Comparison of Adjectives
Pronouns

16

The Verb
The Verb 'Sum'

18

20

First Conjugation, Active Voice

Second Conjugation, Active Voice

Third Conjugation, Active Voice

......

26

30

34
38

Fourth Conjugation, Active Voice

First Conjugation, Passive Voice

42

Second Conjugation, Passive Voice

Third Conjugation, Passive Voice

46
50

Fourth Conjugation, Passive Voice

Comparative Table of the Four Conjugations

Conjugation of a Deponent Verb

Comparative Table of Tenses

in

Forms of the Verb

Notes on the Conjugations

Greek, Latin, French, &c.

Conjugation of the Anomalous Verbs

Interrogative

54

.58
.62
.67
68
74
75

Defective and other Verbs

78

Particles

81

Catechism of Syntax

84

Appendix

Table of Verbs

105

Rules of Gender

118

CONTENTS.

viii

PAGE

Notes on the Declensions

122

Numeral Adjectives and Adverbs

Table of Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite Pronouns

Terminations of Derived Nouns
.

The Roman Calendar

Roman weights and money

Abbreviations

-133
137
.138
.141
.143
.144
145

.........

Explanation of Grammatical Terms

Laws of Quantity
Parsing Forms

149
151

Supplementary Rules and Examples

153

Conditional or Hypothetical Sentences

191

Pronunciation of Latin

192

By

the same Author.

RUDIMENTA LATINA,
mentary Exercises,
8vo. cloth^

in

containing Accidence and EleSecond Edition. Extra fcap.

one volume.

2s.

A FIRST LATIN EXERCISE BOOK.

Extra fcap. 8vo.

A SECOND LATIN EXERCISE BOOK.

Extra fcap. 8vo.

Seventh Edition.

cloth, 25. (yd.

Second Edition,

clothy ^s. dd.

Oxford

Clarendon

Press.

LATIN GRAMMAR.
ALPHABET AND PARTS OP SPEECH.
I.

The

Alphabet.

English, without

Latin Alphabet is the same as the

For the pronunciation, see 394.

W.

The

Divisions of Letters.

2.

(1)
(2)

Vowels a,
Consonants
:

e,

the remaining letters.

3.

Diphthongs.

4.

Quantity of Syllables.

These

have a certain quantity^

or doubtful.

The

sign

are, ae (se),

that
-

letters are divided into

o, u, y.

i,

oe

(oe),

and au^

Syllables in Latin always

is,

they are either long, short,

indicates a long,

a short, and

a doubtful syllable.

There are eight Parts of Speech,

Parts of Speech.

5.

namely, the Noun-Substantive, Noun-Adjective, Pro-noun,

Verb, Ad-verb, Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection.

Note.

These eight Parts of Speech are sometimes put under three

The Noun, including Noun -Substantive, Noun-

heads, namely
Adjective,

(i)

and Pronoun

(2)

The Verb

(3)

The

Particle, including

Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection.

The Noun-Substantive
things

as,

m agister,

The Noun-Adjective

is

the

name of any

a master, mensa, a

person or

table.

expresses the quality of a person or

thing, as, bonus, good^ albus, white.

^

and

ei,

in

eu, and ui are found as diphthongs in Interjections, as hei, heu

a few other words as neuter, huic, cui, etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

The Pro-noun
jective, as,

The Verb

he; meus, my.

The Ad-verb

amor,

is

/ am

added

to

love;

Verb or Adjective, and shews

when^ or where as valde bonus, very good ;

^

Preposition

put

is

hue

before

ad urbem,

he comes

to

scripsit

veni, come hither.

Nouns,

shew

to

are to be joined to Verbs, or sometimes to

venit

or a

loved.

heri, he wrote yesterday ;

The

expresses an action^ as, amo,

condition^ as,

hoiv^

used instead of a Substantive or Ad-

is

ille,

the city; lupus

that they

Nouns,

as,

inter oves,

a wolf among sheep.

The Conjunction

joins together words or sentences, as,

Romulus et Remus, Romulus and Remus.

The
6.

Latin.

Interjection

The

an exclamation,

is

Article.

Tfiere

is

no

as,

heu, alas!

Article, a^ an^ or the^ in

Thus bellum may mean war^ a war^

or the war.

THE NOUN.
7.

Number.

There are two Numbers, the Singular,

which speaks of one,

as,

magister, a master ;

which speaks of more than one,

as,

the Plural,

magistri, masters.

Gender. There are three Genders, (i) the Masculine,

a man ; (2) the Feminine, as, mulier, a woman ; and
the Neuter, as, cubile, a bed.
Nouns which are both

8.

as, vir,

(3)

Masculine and Feminine are called

But

dog.

in

in English)

many

Common,

Latin names of tlmigs are not

many being

Feminine,

as,

Masculine,

mensa, a

table.

as,,

all

as, canis,

Neuter

(as

murus, a wall, and

(For the General and

Special Rules of Gender, see pp. 11 8-1 21.)

9.
tive,

Cases.

There are

six Cases, the

Nominative, Voca-

Accusative, Genitive, Dative, and Ablative.

these Cases arc distinguished by

means of

In English

prepositions, as,

SUBSTANTIVES.

-15.]

man, Dative,

Genitive, of a

from

a man.

But

a man. Ablative,

to

by, with,

or

in Latin they are distinguished by altering

be explained

the last syllable, as will

directly

under Stem and

Flexion.
10.

The

Oblique Cases.

Accusative, Genitive, Dative,

and Ablative are called Oblique Cases.

II.

The Stem

Stem.

mains unaltered in

mur

vall-is,

12.

a valley ;

Flexion.

of a Noun which
both Numbers;

that part

is

and

the Cases

mur-us, a wall ; mur-o,

in

vail in

all

in

as,

a wall ; mur-i, walls

to

a valley

vall-i, to

re-

; vall-es, valleys,

Flexions (also called Inflexions or Ter-

minations) are the Syllables added

to the

Stem for the purpose

of distinguishing the different Cases and Numbers.

Note.
other

This

Noun

13.

will be best understood

at

mens-a or any

Declensions are the different ways in

Declension.

which Nouns are

their

by looking

in the declensions that immediately follow.

declined, that

is,

the different

ways

in

which

Cases and Numbers are formed by means of adding

different Flexions to the Stem.

SUBSTANTIVES.
14.

five

The

Of Substantives there are

known by the endings of their
The ist Declension has Gen. Sing,

five Declensions.

Declensions, which are

Genitive Case Singular.

in -ae

the 2nd in

-i

the 3rd in -is

the 4th in -us

the

5th in -ei.

THE FIRST

15.

Nominative,
Gender.
licola,

DECIiElSrSION'.

The Nominative Case ends

Feminine

in -a.

except a few names of men,

Publicola, or designations of

which are masculine.

B 2

men,

as,

as,

Pub-

poeta, a poet^

LATIN GRAMMAR.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

Nom. Mensa, a

]Mens-ae,

table,

Voc.

Mens-a,

Acc.

Mens-am, a

table,

table.

Gen.

Mens-ae, of a

Dat.

Mens-ae,

Abl.

Mens-a,

by^ ivith,

Mens-as,

tables,

table.

or from a

Mens -is,

ox for tables,

to

Mens-is,

with,

by,

from

table.

or

tables.

THE SECOND DECLENSION.

16.

The Nominative ends

Nominative.
Gender,

in -us, -fer,

-us and -er generally Masculine,

Voc.

Mur-e,

Acc.

Mur-um, a

and -um.
Neuter.

Mur-i, walls,

ivall.

Mur-i,

wall.

Mur-os,

zvall.

Gen. Mur-i, of a wall.

]\Iur-o, to or for a zvall.
Abl.
Mur-o, by, with, or fro?n a

Dat.

walls,

zvalls,

Mur-orum, of zvalls.
Mur-is,

Mur-is,

from

wall.

SINGULAR.

to

ox for zvalls,

by,

zvith,

or

zvalls.

PLURAL.

Magister, a master.

-um

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

Nom. Murus,

Nom.

tables.

]\Iens-arum, of tables.

table.

or for a

to

tables,

Mens-ae,

Magistr-i, masters.

Voc.

Magister,

Acc.

Magistr-um, a master.

Magistr-os,

Gen.

Magistr-i, a master's, ox of a

Magistr-orum, of mas-

master,

Magistr-i,

master.

masters

7?iasters.

ters,

[ters,

Dat.

Magistr-o,

or for a master,

Magistr-is,/^ orfor mas-

Abl.

Magistr-o, by, with, or froju a

Magistr-is, by, with, or

to

from

master.

Note.

The

Ablative of

magister, puer, judex,

(ab), by,frof?i,

cum,

etc.,

Nouns denoting

masters.

a living thing, as,

usually requires a Preposition, as,

zm'th, etc.

SUBSTANTIVES.

-i6.]

Some Nouns

in -er preserve the

the cases, instead of dropping

it,

as,

e before -r through

SINGULAR.

Nom.

Puer, a boy,

Voc.

Puer,

Acc.

Puer-um, a

PLURAL.
Puer-i, boys,

Puer-i,

boy,

Gen. Puer-i, a boys, ox of a

Abl.

Puer-o^, by, with, or

Puer-is,

from a

Puer-is\

with,

or

socer, vesper. Liber,

and

from

boy.
'

puer

'

compounds of

are declined,
gero,

gener,

I carry, and

fero,

Bell-i,

war.

of war,

Bell-o, to or for war,

Abl.

Bell-o, by, with, or

^^-2^, wars, OX

from

Bell-is, by, with, orfrom

wars.

Note on Neuter Nouns.

Vocative Cases of

-ius,

-ium

The Nominative,

in the Plural they always

of

often contract
filii

Accusative, and

Neuter Nouns are the same in each

all

the Genitive

a son. Gen.

Owars.

Bell-orum, of wars.
Bell-is, to or for wars.

war.

Note on

armiger^.

as,

PLURAL.

Dat.

number, and

by,

boys.

I bear,

SINGULAR.

N.V.A. Bellum, war, or

Gen.

boys,

Puer-orum, of boys.
to or for boys.

boy.

or /or a boy,

Puer-o,

Like

Puer-os, boys.

boy.

Dat.

to

all

puer, a boy.

the
-ii

end

in -a.

Nouns

Second Declension.

into -i in the Genitive, as,

in

filius,

or fiU; ingenium, ability, Gen. ingenii, or

ingeni.

Note on the Vocative of the Second Declension. Filius, a son,

and names of men ending in -ius, make -i in the Vocative
as, filius,

Virgil.

Voc.

fili,

son ; Virgilius, Virgil, Voc. Virgili,

Deus, God, has Voc. Deus (not Dee),

Son-iii'law, father-in-law^ evening, Bacchus, armour-bearer.

Preposition must be used with the Latin word.

God.

See

i6,

Note.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

THE THIRD DECLENSION.

17.

The Nominative ends

Nominative and Gender,

The Gender
native,

and

is

also various.

rules of

variously.

(For terminations of the Nomi-

Gender, see pp. 119-121.)

Nouns of this Declension have two divisions,

namely, (i) Nouns which have -um in the Genitive Plural
(2) Nouns which have -ium in the Genitive Plural.
Nouns increasing (i. e. having more Syllables in the Genitive than in the Nominative) make -um in the Gen. PI.
Nouns not increasing make -ium. For the exceptions see
Divisions,

p. 126.

Nouns
I.

in -um.

Masculine or Feminine.
PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

0 judge.

N.V. Judex, a judge, or

Acc. Jud!c-em, a judge.

Abl.

to

Judic-um, 0/judges.

or for a judge.

Judic-e^

Z^////,

Judic-ibus,

to

or_/;w// Judic-ibus \

of forjudges.
by,

ivith,

or

from judges.

a judge.

Law.

0 judges.

or

]\i^\c-qs, judges.

Gen. Judic-is, 0/ a judge.

Dat. Judic-i,

]vi^\Q,-Q^ Judges,

SINGULAR.
Lion.
Flower,

Soldier.

Flos.

Miles.

Flor-em.

Milit-em.

N.V.

Lex.

Leo.

Acc.

Leg-em.

Leon-em.

Gen.

-is.

-is.

-is.

-is.

Dat.

-i.

-i.

-i.

-i.

Abl.

-e.

-e.

-e.

-e.

PLURAL.

N.V. A. Lcg-es.
Gen.

-um.

Dat. Abl. -ibus.

^

Lcdn-es.

-um.

-ibus.

Flor-es.

INIilit-es.

-um.

ibiis.

Preposition must be used with the Latin word.

Sec

,,

-um.

-ibus.

16, Note.

SUBSTANTIVES.

17-]

2.

Neuter,

SINGULAR.

N.A.V. Opus, a work, or

Gen.
Dat.
Abl.

PLURAL.

0 work.

Oper-a, works, or

works.

Oper-um, of works.
Oper-i, lo ox for a work. Oper-ibus, io or for works.
Oper-e, by, with, orfrom Oper-ibus, by, with, orfrom
Oper-is, of a work.

a work.

works.

SINGULAR.

Song,

Head.

Carmen.

Caput.

iter.

Carmin-is.

Caplt-is.

Itiner-is.

Shore.

N.V.A. Litus
Gen.

Litor-is.

fourney.

Dat.

-i.

-1.

-1.

Abl.

-e.

-e.

-e.

N.V.A. Litor-a.

Carmin-a.

PLURAL.

-um.

Gen.

Dat. Abl.

-ibiis.

-ibus.

-ibus.

Vallis,

Gen.

Vall-is,

Dat. Vall-i,
Abl.

of a

to

0 valley.

valley.
valley.

ox for a valley.

Vall-e, by, with, or from a

valley.

-ibus.

Masculine or Feminine,

valley, or

Acc. Vall-em, a

-um.

in -ium.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

N.V.

Itiner-a.

-um.

Nouns
I.

Capit-a.

-um.

Vall-es, valleys, or
Vall-es, or

0 valleys.

-is, valleys.

Vall-ium, of valleys.
Vall-ibus,

to

ox for valleys.

Vall-ibus, by, with, or from

valleys.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

N.V. Nubes, a
x\cc.

cloud, or

Nub-em, a
Nub-i,

Abl.

Nub-e,

0 cloud.

Nub-es,

cloud.

Nub-ibus,

by, with, or from

Nub-ibus,

a cloud.
2.

the sea, or

Gen.

Isl^iX-ls,

Dat.

Mar-i,

to

Abl.

Mar-i,

from

Neuter,

PLURAL.

by, with,

of

sea.

Mar-ia, seas, or

Mar-ium,

the sea.

or for the sea.

ox from

the sea.

seas.

j-^m.

IMar-ibiis, to or for seas.

Mar-ibus,

or frof?i

by, with,

seas.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

N.A.V. Cubile, a
Gen.

cloudr.

by, with, ox

clouds.

SINGULAR.

N.A.V. Mare,

clouds,

-is, clouds.

Nub-ium, of clouds.
to or for

or for a cloud.

to

clouds, or

Nub-es, or

cloud.

Gen. Nub-is, of a
Dat.

or

bed,

bed

Cubil-ia, beds, or

beds.

Cubil-ium, of beds.

Cubil-is, of a bed.

Dat.

Cubil-i, to or for a bed.

Cubil-ibiis,

Abl.

Cubil-i, by, ivith, or from

Cubil-ibus,<^', with, or from

bed.

Nominative.
Gender,

beds.

The Nominative ends

in

-us and -u.

-us generally Masculine, -u Neuter.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

N.V. Gradiis, a

step,

Ago. Grad-um, a

or

step.

Gen. Grad-us, of a
Abl.

or for beds.

THE FOURTH DECLENSION.

18.

Dat.

to

step.

step,

Grad-Hs,

steps,

Grad-us,

steps.

or

steps.

(irad-uum, of steps.

G rad-ui or -u, to oxfor a step. G rad-ibiis, to ox for steps.

Grad-u, by with, ox from a G rad-ibiis, ^>',z;////,ory/-(W/
,

step,

steps.

ADJECTIVES.

-31.]

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

N.A. Genu, a
Voc. Genu,

knee,

Gen-ua,

knees,

knee.

Gen-ua,

Gen. Gen-US, of a

D.A. Gen-u, fo^/or,

from a
Note,

by, with,

or

Gen-ibus,

Dat. and Abl. PI. of the Fourth Declension are

sometimes written -iibus instead of -ibus,

THE FIFTH

19.

Feminine, except

in the Singular,

as,

genubus.

DECLElSrSTOW.

The Nominative ends

Nominative,
Gender,

by, with,

to, for,

or from knees.

knee,

The

knees,

Gen-uum, of knees.

knee.

dies,

in -es.

a day, which

is

Common

Masculine in the Plural.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

N.V. Dies, a day, or

day,

Di-es, days, or

days,

Acc. Di-em, a day.

Di-es, days,

Gen. Di-ei, of a day,

Di-erum, of days,
Di-ebus, to or for

Dat. Di-ei,

to

or for a day.

Abl. Di-e, by, with, oxfrom a day,

Di-ebus,

days.

by, ^r., days.

ADJECTIVES.

20.

Adjectives are divided into two classes, the First Class

having flexions
sions,

and the

Declension, of
21.

like those of the First

Second Class

Nouns

like

and Second Declenof the Third

those

Substantive.

Adjectives of the First Class.

Adjectives of

the First Class have three terminations to each Case, de-

noting the Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter Gender,

as,

bonum, good ; niger, nigra, nigrum, black.

The Masculine and Neuter flexions are like those of the
Second Declension of Substantives, the Feminine like those

bonus, bona,

of the First.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

lO

SINGULAR.
M.

PLURAL.
N.

F.

Nom. Bonus,

M.

-iim.

-g,,

XT

^
Voc.

13

Bon-e,

-a,

Acc.

Bon-um,

-am,

-um.
-um.

Gen. Bon-i,

-ae,

-i.

Dat.

Bon-o,

-ae,

Abl.

Bon-o,

-a,

Noie.

some

to

r
J

-o.

-o.

Adjectives

belong

When

Bon-i,

F.

N.

-ae,'

-a.

Bon-os,

-as,

-S..

Bon-orum,

-arum, -orum.

'

/
^
\
f n o
all Genders).
Bon-is (of
^

cannot stand alone but must always

Substantive,

the Substantive

is

bonus

as,

rex, a

word

omitted, the

good king.

must be

7?ia7i

understood with Masculine Adjectives,

woman with Feminine^,

and thing with Neuters

good vmi

as,

boni,

bona, good

things^ goods.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.
M.

F.

N.V. Niger,

nigr-a, nigr-iim.

Nigr-um,
Gen. Nigr-i,

Acc.

-S*.

-um.

Nigr-os,

-as,

-a.

-ae,

-i.

Nigr-orum,

-arvim,

-orum.

Dat.

Nigr-o,

-ae,

Nigr-o,

-a,

-o.

-o.

Some

N.

-ae,

-am,

Abl.

Note,

F.

Nigr-i,

M.

N.

...

Acc.

F.

PLURAL.
M.

F.

N.

Tcncr-i,

-ae,

-a.

Tcncr-os,

-as,

N.

-um.
cncr-um, -am, -um.

Gen. Tcncr-i,
Dat. Tcner-o,

-a,

-ae,

-i.

-ae,

-o.

-a,

-o.

Tcncr-orum, -arum, -orum.

^I

Abl.

Tcncr-o,

tenerum, tender.

SINGULAR.

N.V. Tener,

\
iw.
Genders).

all

Adjectives in -er preserve the e throughout,

like puer, as tener, tenera,

M.

Nigr-is (of
^

T.ike 'tencr' arc declined

cncr-is (of

all

lacrr, liber, asi)cr,

l)Ounds of gcro and fcro, as corniger,

friigifcr

(jondcrs).

miser; com-

and sometimes

dexter ^
Torn, free, rough, miserable; horn-bearing, fruH-bcaritig
hand.
^

on the right

ADJECTIVES.

-22.]

Adjectives of the Second Class.

2 2.

the

II

Second Class are

and have flexions

as, tristis,

called Adjectives of

like those of the 3rd Decl. of Substantives

gloomy; melior,

better;

felix,

happy; ingens,

M. F.

N,

Tristis,

triste.

triste.

Trist-es,

Acc. Trist-em,

trist-ia.

Gen.

Trist-is.

Trist-ium.

Dat.

Trist-i.

Trist-ibus.

Abl.

Trist-i.

N.V. Melior,

melii-s.!

ACc. Melior-em,

mehus.-l

Gen.

Melior-is,

Dat.

Melior-i.

Abl.

Melior-e.

N.V.

Felix.

melior-^.

Melior-es,

Melior-um.
Melior-ibus.

}
Felic-es,

Acc. Felic-em,

Gen.

felix.

Felic-ium.

Dat.

Felic-i.

Abl.

Fe\ic-i (rarely

N.V.

Ingens.

Felic-ibus.

Ingent-ium.

Ingent-is.

Dat.

Ingent-i.

Abl.

Ingent-e (or

-\).

Ingent-ibus.

Adjectives in -er belong to this class, but have

Feminine form
M.

in the

F.

N.V. Acer,

acr-is,

Acc. Acr-em,

Gen.
D.A.

ingent-i^.

Ingent-es,

ingens }

Gen.

Some

felic-ia.

Felic-is.

Acc. Ingent-em,,

vast.

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.
M. F.

N.V.

Adjectives of

Two Terminations,

Nominative Singular,

as, acer, l:een.

N.

M. F.

N.

acr-e.

Acr-es,

acr-ia.

acr-e.

Acr-es,

acr-ia.

Acr-is.

Acr-ium.

Acr-i.

Acr-ibus.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

11

Like 'acer' are declined,

[ 22-

alacer, celeber, equester,

and a few others ^.

Sing. N.V. Celer, celeris,

the e throughout, as,

23.

for the
as,

celere.

Numeral and Quasi- Numeral Adjectives. These

most part make Gen. Sing,

unus, one;

alius,

-um.

-a,

Un-um
-am,
-um.
Gen. Un-ius (of all Genders).

Acc.

Abl.

Un-i (of
Un-o,

Nom.
Acc.

all

the Dat. in -i;

PLURAL.
M.

F.

N.

Un-i,

-ae,

-a.

Un-os,

-as,

-a.

Un-orum,

-arum.

-orum.

N.

F.

Nom. Unus,

and

in -ius,

another ; uter, which of two.

SINGULAR.
M.

Dat.

pede-

Celer keeps

ster, volucer, saluber, celer,

Genders).

Un-is

(of

Genders).

all

-a,

-o.

Alius,

-a,

-ud.

Ali-i,

-ae,

Ali-um,

-am,

-ud.

Ali-os,

-as,

Ali-orum,

-arum,

Gen. All-US (of

Genders).

all

Dat.

AIM

Abl.

Ali-o,

-a,

Nom.

Uter,

utr-a,

Acc.

Utr-um,

(of

j-Ali-is (of

Gen. Utr-ius
Abl.

Utr-o,

The

utr-uni.

-um.

(of all Genders).

Utr-i (of

all

Genders).

Utr-i,

-ao,

Utr-os,

-as,

Utr-orum,

-arum,

-a.

-orum.

Genders).
j.Utr-is (of

-a,

all

Genders).

-o.

Adjectives which

Dat. are

all

-o.

-am,

Dat.

-orum.

Genders).

all

make

-ius in Gen. Sing, and

-i

in

Unus,

solus, totus, ullus,

Uter, alter, neuter, nullus

and compounds of uter, as utcrque, each

-que being added to each of the cases, as.
Those in -us are
Sing. Nom. ulcniuc, utrruiuc, utrumquc.

with

of

alius, another^

tivo,

the sufiix

winged, healthful, swift.

One, alone or the only, the whole, any at all ; which of two, the other or
one of two, neither, none.
'

llrisk, celebrated, equestrian, pedestrian,

ADJECTIVES,

-25-]

I3
But

declined like unus, those in -er like uter.

alter

keeps

the e throughout, as Sing. N. alter, altera, alterum.

Unus

when

only used in the Plural

is

Noun which

it

agrees with a

has no Singular, or which has a different mean-

ing in the Plural from the Singular, as, una castra, one camp,

unae

litterae, one epistle.

The Numerals

duo, two, and

tres, three,

are thus declined

PLURAL.

PLURAL.

F.

N.

M.F.

N.

Nom. Duo,

duae,

duo.

Tres,

tria.

Acc.

Du-os or duo,
Du-orum,
D.Ab. Du-obus,

du-as,

duo.

Tres,

tria.

Gen.

du-arum,

du-orum.

Tr-ium.

du-abus,

du-obus.

Tri-bus.

M.

Ambo, both, is decHned like duo.

The other Cardinal Numbers, (see

p.

133) from quattuor,

four, to centum, a hundred, are indeclinable.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

24.

Adjectives have three degrees of Comparison, the Positive,

Comparative, and Superlative.

Rule

25.

parative

is

for

Comparison of Adjectives.

formed from the Positive by changing

The Com-i

or -is of

the Genitive into -ior.

The
-i

Superlative

formed from the Positive by changing

is

or -is of the Genitive into -issimus \ as,

Comparative.

Positive.

durior, harder,

Durus, hard, G. duri,

Superlative.

durissimus,

hardest,

or ^ery hard,
Brevis, short, G. brevis,

Audax,

hold,

G. audacis,

brevior, shorter,

audacior, holder,

brevissimus, shortest,
or 'very short,
audacissimus, boldest,

or
1

Often written -issumus.

'very bold.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

14

[ 26-

Exceptions.

26.

Adjectives in -er form their

{a) Adjectives in -er.

Com-

paratives according to the rule, but form their Superlatives

from the Nonwialive Masculine Singular of the

Positive

by adding -rimus,

pulchri,

Comparative pulchrior, more

pulcherrimus,

lative

into -limus, as,

-us preceded by a
in the

-is

of the Genitive

easy, facillimus.

Other Ad-

have commonly no Superlative.

jectives in -ilis
(c)

facilis,

namely

humilis, loivly,

by changing

their Superlative

-ilis,

gracilis, slender,

dissimilis, imlike,

difiicilis, difficult,

Super-

beautiful,

heautiful or very beautiful,

similis, like,

easy,

foim

pulcher, hcauHftil, Gen.

Six Adjectives in

{b) Adjectives in -ilis.

facilis,

yjiosi

as,

Vozvel.

If a

vowel comes before -us

Nominative, the comparison

is

generally

made

by the Adverbs magis, ?nore, and maxime, most, as,

idoneus, useful, magis idoneus, more useful, maxime
idoncus, most useful or very useful.

qu

precedes, as

antiquus,

Except when
antiquior,

ancient,

anti-

quissimus.
(^/)

-dicus, -ficus, -volus.

Adjectives in -dicus, -ficus,

and -volus, make -entior, -entissimus

parative

and

Superlative,

as,

in the

malevol-us,

Com-

spiiful,

malcvol-entior, male vol -entissimus.

27.

pared

Irregular Comparison.

INIany Adjectives are

irregularly, as
Positive.

Bonus, good.

Comparative.

melior,

Superlative.

optimus.

Malus, bad,

pejor,

pessimus.

Magnus,

major,

maximus.

Parvus, small.

minor.

mininuis.

Multus,

plus.

j)lurinHis.

ncquior,

nequissimus.

f^reat,

7?iuc/i,

Nc(|uam, worthless.

com-

ADJECTIVES.

-28.]

T5

Other irregular comparisons worthy of notice are

Comparative.

Positive.

Senex,

Superlative,

[natu maximus].

senior,

old^

]viwtms, young,

junior,

[natu minimus],

Dexter, on the right,

dexterior,

dextimus.

Sinister,

sinisterior.

07t

the

left,

sinistimus.

Sacer, sacred,

S Urdus,

sacerrimus.
surdior

deaf.

Four Adjectives derived from Prepositions have a double

Superlative
Positive Adjective.

Comparative.

Superlative.

exterus, outward,

exterior,

extremus mid

Infra, beneath,

inferus,

inferior,

extimus.
infimus and
Tmus.

Supra, aho've,

superus, high,

superior,

Post, after,

posterus, next after,

posterior,

Preposition.

Extra,

outside,

loqju,

supremus and
summus.
postremus and
postumus.

Six Adjectives derived from Prepositions have no Positive

Comparative Adj.

Preposition.

Superlative.

Citra, on this side,

citerior,

citimus.

De, down from,

di^imoxiless good),

deterrimus.

Intra, withifi,

interior,

intimus.

Prae, before,

prior {former),

primus

Prope, near,

propior,

proximus.

Ultra, beyond,

ulterior,

ultimus

28.

{first),

{last),

Comparison of Adverbs. Adverbs derived from

make -ius in the Comparative, and -issime

Adjectives usually

in the Superlative, as

Digne, worthily,

dignius,

dignissime.

Gravlter, heavily,

gravius,

gravissime.

Andacter,

audacius,

audacissime.

boldly,

LATIN GRAMMAR.

i6

PRONOUNS.

29.

Pronouns are

(i) Personal, (2) Reflexive, (3) Possessive,

(4) Demonstrative, (5) Definitive, (6) Relative, (7) Interrog-

and

ative,

and tu,

/,

these the Personal and Re-

Pronouns, the others Adjectival.

The Personal Pronouns

Personal Pronouns.

30.

eg6,

Of

(8) Indefinite.

flexive are Substantival

PLURAL.

SINGULAR.

Nom. Ego,

/.

Acc.

Me, me,

Gen.

JNIei,

Dat.

Mlhl,

Abl.

]\Ie^ by, ivith, or from me.

0/ me.
io

are

ox you, which are thus declined

//lou

or for

7?ie.

N. V. Tu, thou or you.

Nos,

w'e,

Nos,

us.

Nostrum

or Nostri, 0/ us.

Nobis,

or for us.

to

Nobis \

by, with,

oxfrorn

us.

Yos>,ye ox you.

Acc.

Te,

thee ox you.

Yos, you.

Gen.

Tui, of thee ox you.

Vestrum

or Vestri, ofyou.

Dat.

Tibi, to or for thee ox you.

Vobis,

or for you.

Abl.

Te\

Y ohW, by, with, oxfro?nyou.

by, with,

or froin thee

to

ox you.
Note.

Ille, ilia, illud,

and

ea, id, are often used as

is,

Personal Pronouns, and translated

The

Reflexive Pronoun.

31.

88, himself herself,

itself,

Nom.

(wanting).

Acc.

Se or sese, himself

Gen.

Sui,

of himself

he, she,

it.

Reflexive

Pronoun

herself, itself or themselves.

herself, itself themselves,

Dat.

Sibi, to or for himself, herself, itself, themselves,

Abl.

Se^ or sese,

32.

are

by,

with, or from hi??iself etc.

Possessive Pronouns.

meus, my, tuus,

///;',

The

Possessive Pronouns

suus, his own, her

07v?t, its

or their ow?i, and eujus, ivhose, which are declined

*

is

or themselves.

Preposition must be used.

Sec

16,

Note\

and

222.

oivn,
like

PRONOUNS.

-34.]

bonus; noster,

17

and vester, your which are declined

our,

like pulcher.

Meus

JVofe.

Tuus and suus

mi

in the

Vocative Singular Masculine.

have no Vocative.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

33.

has

Pronouns are hie,

The Demonstrative

/h's, is, //la/j ille, //la/, iste, //laf.

SINGULAR.
M.

PLURAL.
M.

N.

F.

F.

N.

hae,

haec.

Nom.

Hie,

Acc.

Hunc, hanc,
Hos,*
has,
haec.
Hujus (of all Genders). Horum,
harum,
horum.
Huic (of all Genders).
His (of all Genders).
Hoc,
hac,
hoc. I

Gen.
Dat.
Abl.

Hi,

hoc.
hoc.

haec,

Nom.

Is,

ea,

id.

li (ei),

eae,

ea.

Acc.

Eum,

earn,

id.

Eos,

eas,

ea.

Eorum,

earum.

eorum.

Gen. Ejus (of all Genders).

Dat. Ei (of all Genders).
Abl.
Eo,
ea,
eo.

is

or eis (of

all

Genders).

Nom.

Ille,

ilia,

illud.

Illi,

illae,

Acc.

Ilium,

illam,

illud.

Illos,

illas,

ilia,

Gen.

Illius (of all

Illorum,

illarum,

illorum.

Dat.
Abl.

Illi

(of

all

Genders).
Genders).

Illis

Illo,

ilia,

Iste

is

/h's

near you, or that ofyour

34.

are

Definitive

idem,

the same,

I
declined like

F.

and

The

or that other,

Definitive

Pronouns

self

PLURAL.
M.

N.

eadem, idem.
A. Eiindem, eandem, idem.
G. Ejusdem (of all Genders).
D. Eldem (of all Genders).
eadem,

ille.

ille, that yonder

Pronouns.
and ipse,

N. Idem,

A. Eodem,

Genders).

near me^ or this of nmie, iste, that

SINGULAR.
M.

all

illo.

Hie means

IVo/e,

(of

ilia,

eodem

F.

N.

eadem.
easdem,
Eosdem,
eadem.
Eorundem, earundem, eorundem.
iTdem,

eaedem,

fiisdem or Ilsdcm (of all Genders),

LATIN GRAMMAR.

i8

Ipse

is

declined like ille, except that

the Neuter

M.
Qui,

Nom.

The

Gen.
Dat.
r

quae,

is

qui,

Quos,

quas,

Quorum,

quarum,

Nom.

is

F.

-u

q"^^-

form

is

The

Interrogative Pro-

quis, (quis), quid, zv/wP or ivhai ? declined

in the

Neuter.

If

it

makes quid

instead

agrees with a Substantive the

it

qui, quae, quod, declined exactly like qui.

Indefinite Pronoun.

37.

Nom.

quorum.

'-tew
all

in the other cases like qui, except that

quod

N.

quae.
quae.

Genders)^
^

qui.

quae,

QjLubus or queis or quis (of

^

qui,

M.
Qui,

Interrogative Pronoun.

36.

noun

Abl.(Q^"^'
iQui,

The

Indefinite

Pronoun

is

quis, (qua), quid, any, declined in the other cases

like qui,

except that

it

Neuter Singular, and

it

Pronoun

Relative

PLURAL.
N.

F.

quod.
Quern, quam, quod.
Cujus (of all Genders).
Cui (of all Genders).

Acc.

If

in

or which.

SINGULAR.

of

makes ipsum

it

Acc.

Relative Pronoun.

35.

who

Nom. and

34-

makes quid

qua

or

quae

in

Neuter Plural

qua

or quae.

quae

qui,

is

(or

except

like the Relative qui,

See also

in the

the Neuter Plural.

agrees with a Substantive the form

qua), quod, declined exactly

quod

instead of

166.

THE VERB.

38.

amo, /
39.

Verbs have two Voices, the Active,

Voice.
love ;

the Passive, as, amor,

in

which the action passes on

person or thing, which

is

Transitive

directly to

called the Object, as,

Intransitive or Neuter

Verbs are those

amo
in

te,

Verbs have no Passive Voice, except

some

/ love

which the

action does not pass on directly to an Object, as, sto,

Intransitive

as,

loved.

Transitive and Intransitive Verbs.

Verbs are those

thee.

/ mn

in

/ sfaniL
what

is

THE VERB,

-45-]

Impersonal Passive Construction,

called the
stood, or

40.

19

a stand

is

as, statur, // is

made.

Deponents. Deponent Verbs

are Passive in form but

/ exhort,

lay aside (depono) the Passive meaning, as, hortor,

41.

Moods.

There

four

are

Moods, the

Indicative,

The

three con-

Subjunctive, Imperative, and Infinitive.

stitute the

42.

Verb

Finite, the last

Tenses.

one the Verb

first

Infinite.

There are Seven Tenses, four Primary,

namely, the Present, Future Simple, Perfect, Future Perfect

and three Historic, namely, the Imperfect,

perfect.

Aorist,

and Plu-

meanings, and com-

(For a Synopsis of Tense

parison of the forms in Greek, French, &c., see

p. 67.)

Number and

Person. There are in each Tense

two Numbers, Singular and Plural, and in each Number
43.

three Persons, First, Second^

and Third.

Verbs have four different kinds of

44. Conjugation.
Flexion, which are called the Four Conjugations.

The First takes -are in the

The Second takes -ere in

Infin.

Mood, as, amare, to love.

Mood, as, monere, to

the Infin.

advise.

The Third takes -ere in

The Fourth takes -ire in

the Infin.

the Infin.

Mood,
Mood,

as, regere, to rule.

as, audire, to hear.

The parts of the

45. Principal Parts of the Verb.
Verb from which all the other Tenses may be formed are the
Present, Perfect, and Supine in -um.
These, together with
the Infinitive Mood, are to be named when the principal
parts of a Verb are required, e.g.
Pres. Indie.

Infinitive.

Perfect Indie,

Supine,

amavi,

amatum.
monitum.

Amo,

amare,

2nd Conj.

Moneo,

monere,

monui,

3rd Conj.

Rego,

regere,

rexi,

rectum,

4th Conj.

Audio,

audire,

audivi.

auditum.

I St

Conj.

c 2

m 46-

LATIN GRAMMAR,

20

VerD

OUIII, J!jSo6,

Verbs are conjugated

Verb sum, esse,

47.

J?

Vll,

/C'

6/c.

DclOic

fui, to be.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.

T ttiu.

S, sum,
es,

Present
Tense.

Thou

est,

estis.

Ye

sunt.

They

eris,

Simple
Tense.

ai't.

[See also

is.

P. sum us, We

S. ero,

Future-

He

erit.

are.
are.

be.

Thoti ivilt

will

be.

be,

P. erimus, We shall
eritis,

Ye

will

I have

fuisti,

Pp:rfect

Tense.

fuit,

been,

has been.

P. fuimus, We have

Ye have

fuistis.

be.

been.

Thou hast

He

be.

be.

erunt, They will

S. fui

6i.]

are.

Z shall

He

been,

been.

fuerunt or fuere, They have been.

S. fuero,

/ shall

FuturePerfkct
Tense.

fucrit,

have been.
have been.
will have been,

Thou

fucris.

OLflcr

necessary to learn the Auxiliary

is

it

He

ivilt

P. fuerimus, We shall have

fucritis.

Ye

fucrint.

They will have

been.

will have been.

been.

AUXILIARY VERB

-47']

'SUM,'

INDICATIVE MOOD

21

(continued).

Historic Tenses.

eram I was.
eras, Thou wast.

kS*.

Imperfect
Tense.

erat,

S.

He

eratis,

Ve

erant,

They were.

fui,

fuit,

P.

were.

I was.

fuisti,

AORIST
Tense.

was.

eramus We were.

Thou wast.

He

iJuas.

PF^ were.

fiiimus

Ve

were.
fuerunt or fuere, They were.
fuisti s,

I had been.
Thou hadst been.
He had been.

S. fueram,
fueras,

Pluperfect
Tense.

fuerat,

P. fueramus, We had
fueratis,

fuerant,

been.

Ye had been.
They had been.

The Pronoun jv^?^ may be used to translate both

Second Person Singular, and the Second Person

Note.
the

Plural.


LATIN GRAMMAR.

%2

SUBJUNCTIVE

or

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Primary Tenses.
S. sim,

Present
Tense.

/ may

may I be.

or

be,

sis,

Thou maysi be, or viayst thoube.

sit,

He may

or

be,

may

he

be.

be, or may we
Ve may be, or may ye be,
Thty may be, or may they

P. sTmus, We may
sitis,

sint,

be.

But often
translated
as a
Present
Indicative.

be.

in this mood is formed by

combining the Future Participle with sim
(The
or esse?n, as fiiiunis sim or essem \
form fuiurus essern belongs to the Historic
The Tense is thus declined
Tenses.)

The Future Simple

FutureSimple
Tense.

futurus sim or essem.^

-S'.

P.

futurus

sis

or esses,

futurus

sit

or esset.

futuri

simus or essemus.

futuri sitis or essetis.

futuri sint or essent.

-.9.

Tense.

fuerit,

have

been.

Thou mayst have

fueris,

Perfect

/ may

fuerim,

He may

have

been.

P. fuerimus, We may have

fucr!tis,

fuerint,

Or,

more

No

lOn^^lisli Iraiislalion

been.

been..

Ve may have been.

They may have been.

But often
translated
as a
Perfect or
Aorist
Indicative.

sim or esscm. See 6t.

any use to tlie learner can be
^\\Q.x\. f(jr this Tense.
Where it occurs in Latin it is translated cither by
a Simple I''uture Iiulicative, as, incertum est an in urbe futurus sit, // is
uncertain whether he will he in the city, or by would, as, incertum crat an in
urbe futuius esset, // was uncertain whether he would he in the city.
jiropcrly, futiir-iis, -a, -iini

which

will be of

THE AUXILIARY VERB 'SUM.'

47-]

SUBJUWCTIVE MOOD

23

(continued).

Historic Tenses.
S.

essem/ / should or might he,

Thou ivouldst or mightst
esset, He would or might be,
esses,

Imperfect

But often
translated
as an

be,

Tense.

Imperfect
or Aorist

P, essemus, We should or might be,

essetis, Ye would or might be,
essent, They would or might be.

Rendered variously by fuerim^

Indicative.

essem,

and fuissem.

AORIST

Tense.

See

iS*.

205, 206.

fuissem,

I should ox

fuisses.

Thou wouldst or mightst

He would or might

fuisset,
Pluperfect

might

Tense.

P, fuissemus. We should or might

Ye would or might
fuissetis,
They would or might
fuissent,

>

Another form of

forent.

the Imperfect

is

But often
translated
as a
Pluperfect
Indicative.

forem, fores, foret, foremus, foretis,

LATIN GRAMMAR,

24

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Sing. 2 Pers. es, he ihou, esto,

Present
Tense.

Plur.

2 Pers. este, he ye^ estote, j'^

I.

The forms

must

he.

sunto, they must

3 Pers.

Note

must he.
must he.

ihoti

esto, he

3 Pers.

esto, esto, estote, sunto, are

he.

some-

times reckoned as Future Imperatives.

Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a

Present Imperative sense, as, sim, let me he^ sis, he thou^
sit, let him he, &c.

VERB INFINITE.
Present and
T

Imperfect,

\
>

Infinitive

Perfect and

Mood.

Pluperfect,

Future,

esse,
'

to he.

r^-

fuisse, to

fore or futiirus
esse,

Participle.

Future,

have

heeih

1 to
J

futurus, ahout to

he ahout
to he.

he.

THE AUXTLIARY VERB

Compounds of Sum.

Like

sum

are

SUM.^

25

declined

its

com-

Dounds,

/ am absent.
I am present,
desum, / am wanting.
insum, / am in.

I am in the way.
/ am set over.
prosum, I am of use.
subsum, / am under.
supersum, / am surviving.

absum,

obsum,

adsum,

inter sum,

I am present.

5ubsum wants the

inserts

praesum,

before

and tenses derived from

Perfect,
e,

as

prosumus, pro^estis, prosunt.

he abte, will

be

fully

Prosum

it.

Ind. Pres. prosum, pro^/es, pro^fest,

Possum

[for potis

conjugated hereafter (see

and praesum alone have Present

sum],

p. 68).

Participles,

absens and

praesens.

EXAMPLES.
Indicative Mood.
Present.

Perfect.

Imperfect.

ab-sum.

de-fui.

in-eram.

ab-es.

de-fuisti.

in-eras.

de-fuit.

in-erat.

ab-est.

ab-sumus.

de-fuimus.

in-eramus.

ab-estis.

de-fuistis.

in-eratis.

ab-sunt.

de-fuer-unt, or -ere.

in-erant.

Subjunctive Mood.
?.

to

Absum

proc^-essem.

ob-sim.

prae-fuerim.

ob-sis.

prae-fueris.

pro^Z-esses.

ob-sit.

prae-fuerit.

pro^Z-esset.

ob-simus.

prae-fuerimus.

pro^Z-essemus.

ob-sitis.

prae-fueritis.

pro^Z-essetis.

ob-sint.

prae-fuerint.

prOiZ-essent.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

2,6

48.

[48.

Active Voice.

First Conjugation.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.

-S.

am-at,

Present
Tense.

am

am-o, / /ove,
am-as, T/iou

He

loving, or do love.

art loving, or dost

lovest,

loves, is lovifig,

P. am-amus, We

or does

are loving, or do

love,

love.

love.
love.

am-atis, Ye love, are lovi?ig, or do love,

am-ant, They

S.

FutureSimple
Tf:nse.

am-abo,

are loving, or do

love,

/ shall love.

am-abis, Thou wilt love.

am-abit, lie will love.

P. am-abtous, We shall
am-abltis,

Ve

am-abunt, They will

S. amav-i,

/ have

amav-isti,

Perfect
Tense.

cllllu,V-lL,

loved.

p. amav-imus, We have

S. amav-ero,
aniav-cris,

Tense.

loved.

KWtU,

Ve have

amav-erunt or

FuturePerfect

love.

Thou hast

IJC

amav-istis,

aniav-crit,

love.

will love.

-ere,

loved.

loved.

They have

loved.

/ shall

have loved.
have loved.
ivill have loved.

Thou

He

P. ainav-erimus.
amav-eritis,

luilt

We

Ve

shall have loved.

will have loved.

amav-crint, 7hey

ivill

have

loved.

love.

FIRST CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE.

4^.]

INDICATIVE MOOD

27

{continued).

Historic Tenses.

S,

Imperfect
Tense.

am-abam,

/ loved,

amav-isti,

amav-it,

Thou

He

or did

loved}

amav-eram,

love.

CIC,

etc.

lLc_y

LVUcu,

/ had loved,

amav-eras, Thou hadst loved,

amav-erat, He had loved,

P, amav-eramus, We had loved.

amav-eratis, Ye had loved,
amav-erant, They had loved.
^

See also

etc.

or didst
or did love,

P, amav-imus, We loved,
amav-istis, Ye loved.

S,

Tense.

lovedst,

loved,

dllldV-Cl UliL Uf

Pluperfect

loving, or

P, am-abamus, We were loving,

am-abatis, Ye were loving,
am-abant, They were loving.
S, amav-i,

AORIST
Tense.

I was

am-abas, Thou wast loving, or thou lovedst.

am-abat, He was loving, or he loved,

64.

love,

LATIN GRAMMAR.

28

SUBJUNCTIVE

or

COWJUWCTIVE MOOD.

Primary Tenses.
-S.

Present
Tense.

I may love, or may Hove.

am-es, Thou maysi love, etc.
am-et, He may love.
am-em,

P. am-emus, We may

love,

Present

Ye may love.
am-ent, They may love.
am-etis,

S. amav-erim,

Perfect
Tense.

Indicative.

I may

amav-eris,

Thou mayst

amav-erit,

He may

P. amav-enmus, We may
amav-eritis,

amav-erint,

But often
translated
as a

'

Ye may
They may

But often
translated
have
as a
loved. Perfect or
Aorist
Indicative.

Historic Tenses.

am-arem, / should or mi'ghl love. But often

am-ares, Thou wouldst love, etc.
translated
am-aret, He would love.
as an
P, am-aremus, We should love,
Imperfect
am-aretis, Ye would love.
or Aorist
am-arent, They would love.
Indicative.
S.

Imperfect
Tense.

S, amav-issem,

amav-isses,
amav-isset,

Pluperfect
Tense.

But

Thou

should

He

or might

P. amav-issemus, We
amav-issetis,

Ye

amav-issent,

They

have
loved.

often
translated
as a

Pluperfect
Indicative.

Future Simple Tense. The Future Simple in this Mood is

formed by combining the Future Participle with sim or essem,
as amaiurus sim or essem.
The form with sim belongs to the
Primary Tenses, the form with esseyn to the Historic.
Aorist Tense.

The

Aorist Subjunctive

by amaverim, amarem, and amavisse?n.

is

See

rendered variously
205, 206.

48.]

FIRST CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE,

29

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S, 2 Pers. am-a, love thou, am-ato, thou must love,
am-ato, he must love.
3 Pers.

Present
Tense.

P,

2 Pers.

3 Pers.

am-ate, love ye, am-atote,

must love
am-anto, they must love.

Note I. The forms amato, amato, amatote, amanto are

sometimes reckoned as Future Imperatives.
Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a Present
imperative sense, as, amem, let me love, ames, love thou,
amet, let him love, &c.

VERB

USTFINITE.

Present and
Imperfect,

^^"^[^^
|

the sense of *the act of

loving.')

Infinitive

Mood.

Perfect and
Pluperfect
Future,

^^^^"^^^^j

^^^^

loved.

amaturus

esse, to be about to

love.

Gerunds.

\
L

Participles.

am-andi, of loving.

Dat. Abl.,

am-ando, for or by

in

Supines.

<i
I

am-andum,

Accusative,
Genitive,

-um

am-atum,

loving.

i7i

order

loving.

to love,

in -u

am-atu, in loving.

Present,

am-ans, loving (declined

^
Perfect,
Future,

ingens).

(wanting, see 302.)

am-aturus, about to love.

like

LATIN GRAMMAR.

549.

Active Voice.

Second Conjugation.

IISTDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.
S.

Present
Tense.

mon-eo, / advise, am advising, or do advise.

mon-es, Thou advisest, art advising, or dost
\advise.
mon-et, He advises, etc.

P. mon-emus, We
mon-etis,

Ye

advise,

advise,

mon-ent, They advise.

S,

FutureSimple
Tense.

I shall

mon-ebo,

advise.

mon-ebis, Thou wilt advise.

TTp

TTinn-pViif

P. mon-ebimus,

"79)1

We

Ye

mon-ebitis,

JJ n^I'7)i\p

shall advise,

will advise.

mon-ebunt, They will

S. monu-i,

/ have

monu-isti,

He

monu-it,

Tense.

P. monu-imus,
monu-istis,

FuturePerfect
Tense.

advised,

has advised,

We

have advised.

Ye have

monu-erunt or

S.

advised,

Thou hast

Perfect

advise.

-ere,

advised.

They have advised.

monu-ero, / shall have advised.

monu-eris, Thou tvilt have advised,
monu-erit, He will have advised,

P. monu-erimus, We shall have

monu-eritis,

Ye will have

advised,

advised.

monu-erint, They will have advised.

SECOND CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE.

49.]

MOOD

UsTDICATIVE

(continued).

Historic Tenses.
S.

mon-ebam, / was advising or / advised,

mon-ebas, Thou wast advisifig, etc.
mon-ebat, He was advising.

Imperfect
Tense.
P, mon-ebamus, We were advising,
mon-ebatis, Ve were advising.
mon-ebant, They were advising.
S, monu-i,

/ advised or

monu-isti,

monu-it,

AORIST
Tense.

Thou

He

advised,

P. monu-imus, We
monu-istis,

Ve

monu-erunt or
S.

Pluperfect
Tense.

monu-eram,

did advise.

advisedst, etc.

advised.

advised.
-ere,

They advised.

/ had advised.

monu-eras, Thou hadsi advised,

monu-erat, He had advised.

P. monu-eramus, We had

advised,

Ve had advised,
monu-erant, They had advised.

monu-eratis,

31

LATIN GRAMMAR.

SUBJUNCTIVE

or

49

CON^JUNCTIVE MOOD.

Primary Tenses.
-S*.

mon-eat,

Present
Tense.

mon-eam, / may advise or viay I advise,

mon-eas, Thou mayst advise^ etc.

He may

advise.

P. mon-eamus, We may

advise,

Ye may advise,
mon-eant, They may advise.

mon-eatis,

S.

Perfect
Tense.

/ 7nay have advised.

monu-eris, Thou inayst have advised,
monu-erit, He may have advised,

monu-erim,

P. monu-enmus, We may have advised,

monu-eritis,

Ye may have advised,

may have advised.

monu-erint, They

Historic Tenses.

I should or might advise.

mon-eres, Thou wouldst advise^ etc.
mon-eret, He would advise.

S. mon-ereai,

Imperfect
Tense.

P. mon-eremus, We should advise,

mon-eretis, Ye would advise.
mon-erent, They would advise.
S.

Pluperfect
Tense.

/ should or anight have advised.

monu-isses, lliou wouldst have advised, etc.
monu-isset, He would have advised.
monu-issem,

P. monu-issemus, We should have advised,

monu-issetis, Ye would have advised.
monu-issent, They would have advised.

Future Simple Tense. The Future Simple in this Mood is

formed by combining the Future Participle with sim or esse in,
as moniturus sim or essem.
The form with sim belongs to the
Primary Tenses, the form with esseiii to the Historic.
Aorist Tense.
The Aorist Subjunctive is rendered variously
by monuerim, monerem, and monuissem.
See
205, 206.

SECOND CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE.

49-]

33

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
mon-e, advise

3 Pers.

mon-eto, ihou musl advise,

mon-eto, he must advise,

2 Pers.

mon-ete, advise ye, mon-etote,_>'^ viust advise.

S. 2 Pers.
c/3

thou,

Z;

P.

mon-ento, ihey

3 Pers.

viust advise.

Note I. The forms moneto, moneto, monetote, monento

sometimes reckoned as Futm*e Imperatives.

are

Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a Present

Imperative sense, as, moneam, let me advise^ moneas, advise
thou,

moneat,

let

him

advise, etc.

VERB INFINITE.
Present and
T

Imperfect,

^^^"^^^^

^'^^

the sense of *f the

act of advising').

j-

Infinitive

Perfect and

Mood.

Pluperfect,
Future,

^^ve advised.

mon-iturus esse,

to

be about to

advise.

Gerunds.

Supines.

Accusative,
Genitive,

mon-endum,

Dat. Abl.,

mon-endo, for or by

in
| in

-um

mon-itum,

-u

mon-itu, in advising.

Present,

mon-ens,

Perfect,
I

advising.

in order to advise.

advising

(declined

Hke ingens).

Participles.

advising.

mon-endi, of advising.

Future,

(wanting, see 302).

mon-itiirus, about to advise.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

34

50.

Third Conjugation.

Active Voice,

indicative mood.
Primary Tenses.

/ rule, am

S. reg-o,

Present
Tense.

reg-is,

Thou

reg-it,

He

Ye

or does rule.

rule, are ruling, or do rule.

rule, are ruling, or do rule.

They

reg-unt,

art ruling, or dost rule.

rules, is ruling,

P. reg-imus, We
reg-itis,

ruling, or do rule,

rulest,

rule,

are ruling, or do rule.

I shall rule.

S. reg-am,

reg-es,

FutureSimple

Thou

reg-et,

He

Tense.

P. reg-emus,
reg-etis,

wilt rule,
will rule,

We

Ye

shall rule,
will rule.

reg-ent, They will rule.

S. rex-i,

/ have

rex-isti,

Perfect
Tense.

rex-it,

ruled,

Thou hast

He

P. rex-imus, We have

Ye have

rex-istis,

ruled,

has ruled,
ruled.

ruled,

rex-erunt or -ere, They have ruled.

S, rex-ero,

/ shall have

Tense.

rex-erit,

ruled,

Thou wilt have

rex-eris.

FuturePerfect

He

ruled,

will have ruled.

P, rex-erimus, We shall have

rex-eritis,

rex-erint.

ruled.

Ye will have ruled.

They will have ruled.

50.]

THIRD CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD

35

{continued).

Historic Tenses.

/ was ruling, or / ruled.

Thou wast ruling, etc.
He was ruling.

S, reg-ebam,

reg-ebas.

Imperfect
Tense.

reg-ebat.

P. reg-ebamus, We were ruling.

reg-ebatis, Ye were ruling.
reg-ebant. They were ruling.
S. rex-i,

/ ruled or

rex-isti,

AORIST
Tense.

Thou

He

rex-it,

ruled.

P. rex-imus, We
rex-istis,

did rule,

ruledst, etc.

Ye

ruled.

ruled.

rex-erunt or -ere, They ruled.

/ had ruled.
Thou hadst ruled.
He had ruled.

S. rex-eram,

rex-eras,

Pluperfect
Tense.

rex-erat.

P. rex-eramus, We had
rex-eratis,

rex-erant.

ruled.

Ye had ruled.
They had ruled.

Note on verbs in -io. Certain Verbs of the Third Conjugation end in -io in the First Person Present Indicative,
as capio, / take, facio,, / make, fugio, / fly, etc.
These
retain the i except before i, final e, and short er, as Pres.
Indie, fugz'-o, fug-is, fug-it, fug-imus, fug-!tis, fugz-unt
Future Indie, fug^-am Pres. Imperative, fug-e ; Imperf.
;

Subj. fugerem

Present Infinitive, fug-ere.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

SUBJUNCTIVE

or

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Primary Tenses.

I may

S. reg-am,

Present

He may

may I rule.

or

rule,

Thou mayst

reg-as,

rule,

or mayst thou rule,

may he rule.
P. reg-amus, We may rule, or may we rule
reg-atis, Ye may rule, or may ye rule.
reg-ant, They may rule, or may they rule.
reg-at,

Tense.

/ may

S. rex-erim,

rex-erit,

Tense.

or

have ruled.

Thou mayst have

rex-eris,

Perfect

rule,

He may

ruled.

have ruled.

P. rex-erimus, We may have

ruled.

Ye may have ruled.

They may have ruled.

rex-eritis,

rex-erint,

Historic Tenses.

/ should or

S. reg-erem,

reg-eres,

Imperfect
Tense.

reg-eret,

etc.

P. reg-eremus, We should rule.

reg-eretis, Ye would rule.
reg-erent, They would rule.
S. rex-issem,
rex-isses,

Pluperfect
Tense.

uiighi rule.

Thou wouldst rule,

He would rule.

rex-isset,

I should or

viight have ruled.

Thou wouldst have ruled,

He would have ruled.

etc.

P. rex-issemus, We should have ruled.

rex-issetis, Ye would have ruled.
rex-issent, They would have ruled.

Future Simple Tense. The Future Simple in this Mood is

formed by combining the Future Participle with sim or esse?n,
z.'^
redurus sim or essevi.
The form with sim belongs to the
Primary Tenses, the form with esseni to the Historic.
Aorist

Te?ise.

The

Aorist Subjunctive

by rexerim, regerem, and rexissem.

See

is

rendered variously

205, 206.

50.]

THIRD CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE.

37

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
must rule,
must rule.

S, 2 Pers. reg-e, rule thou, reg-ito, thou

Present

reg-ito, he

3 Pers.

Tense.

2 Pers. reg-ite, rule ye, xQg-iioiQ, ye

P,

must rule,

reg-unto, they must rule.

3 Pers.

Note I. The forms regito, regito, regitote, regunto are

sometimes reckoned as Future Imperatives.
Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a Present
Imperative sense, as regam, let me rule, regas, rule thou,
regat, let

him

rule, etc.

VERB

IWFIlSriTE.

-n

Present and
T

Imperfect,
Infinitive

Perfect and

Mood.

-r,

Pluperfect,

Future,
Accusative,
Genitive,
lDat. Abl.
r

Gerunds.

Supines.

Participles.
^

reor-ere, to rule (or ruling,' in

'

the act

rex-isse,

.7have

to

77

ruled.

rect-urus esse,

to be

about to rule.

reg-endum, ruling,
reg-endi, of ruling,
reg-endo,y^r or by ruling,
to rule,

rect-u, in ruling,

Present,

reg-ens, ruling (declined like

^
Perfect,

ingens).
(wanting, see 302.)
rect-urus, about to rule.

\
\

.
'

rect-um, in order

I!"-"'"
i m -u

of ruling').

J
i

^i

the sense of

Future,

LATIN GRAMMAR.

38

^51.

Fourth Conjugation.

[ 5l-

Active Voice.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.

I hear am

S, aud-10,

Thou

aud-is,
aud-it,

Present
Tense.

He

hearing, or do hear.

hearest^ art hearings or dost

hears, etc.

\hear,

P, aud-Imus, We hear,

Ve

aud-itis,

hear,

aud-iunt, They hear.

/ shall hear,

S. aud-iam,

FutureSimple
Tense.

aud-ies,

Thou

aud-iet,

He

We

P. aud-iemus,

Ye

aud-ietis,

ivilt

hear,

will hear.
shall hear,

will hear.

aud-ient, They will hear.

S. audiv-i,

/ have

audiv-isti,

Perfect
Tense.

audiv-it,

He

/ shall
Thou

audiv-eris,

Tense.

has heard.

audiv-imus, W^e have heard,

audiv-istis, Ye have heard.
audiv-erunt or -ere, They have heard.

S. audiv-ero,

FuturePerfect

heard.

Thou hast heard,

audiv-erit,

He

P. audiv-erimus,

have heard,

wilt have heard,

will have heard.

We

shall have heard.

audiv-eritis,

Ye will have

audiv-erint,

They will have heard.

heard.

 51.]

FOURTH CONJUGATION, ACTIVE

MOOD

INDICATIVi]

VOICE.

{continued).

Historic Tenses.

/ was hearings or / heard.

Thou wast hearings etc.
He was hearing,

S, aud-iebam,

aud-iebas,

Imperfect
Tense.

aud-iebat,

P, aud-iebamus, We were hearing.

aud-iebatis, Ye were hearing,
aud-iebant, They were hearing.
S. audiv-i,

/ heard or

did hear.

audiv-isti, T'hou heardest, etc.

AORIST
Tense.

audiv-it,

He

heard,

P, audiv-imus, We heard,

Ye heard.
audiv-erunt or -ere, They heard.
audiv-istis,

/ had heard,
Thou hadst heard,
He had heard,

S, audiv-eram,

audiv-eras,

Pluperfect
Tense.

audiv-erat,

P, audiv-eramus, We had heard,

audiv-eratis,

Ye had heard.
had heard.

audiv-erant, They

'

LATIN GRAMMAR.

SUBJUNCTIVE

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

or

Primary Tenses.

/ 7nay

S, aud-iam,

Present
Tense.

aud-iat,

He may

may I hear,

hear, or mayst thou hear,

hear, or

may

he hear.

P, aud-iamus^ We may hear, or may we hear,

aud-iatis, Ye may hear, or may ye hear.
aud-iant, They may hear, or may they hear.

/ may

S. audiv-erim,

Perfect

audiv-erit,

have heard.

Thou mayst have heard,

audiv-eris,

Tense.

hear, or

Thou mayst

aud-ias,

He may

have heard,

P. audiv-erimus, We may have heard.

Fe may have heard,

They may have heard.

audiv-eritis,

audiv-erint,

Historic Tenses.
S. aud-irem,
aud-ires,

Imperfect
Tense.

aud-iret,

/ should or

etc.

P. aud-iremus, We should hear,

aud-iretis, Ye would hear,
aud-irent, They would hear.
S. audiv-issem,
audiv-isses,

Pluperfect
Tense.

might hear,

Thou shouldst hear,

He would hear,

audiv-isset,

/ should or

might have heard.

Thou wouldst have heard,

He would have heard,

etc.

P. audiv-issemus, We should have heard.

audiv-issetis, Ye would have heard.
audiv-issent, They would have heard.

Future Simple Tense. The Future Simple in this Mood is

formed by combining the Future Participle with sim or essem,
as auditurus sim or essem.
The form with sim belongs to the
Primary Tenses, the form with essem to the Historic.
Aorist Tense.

The

Aorist Subjunctive

by audiverim, audirem, and

audivisse?n.

is

See

rendered variously
205, 206.

FOURTH CONJUGATION, ACTIVE

51.]

VOICE.

4I

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S.

aud-ito, he

3 Pers.

P.

must hear,
must hear,

2 Pers. aud-i, hear fhou, aud-ito, Zhou

2 Pers.

aud-ite, hear ye, aud-itote,jF^

must hear.

aud-iunto, they must hear.

3 Pers.

Note I. The forms audito, audito, auditote, audiunto are

sometimes reckoned as Future Imperatives.

Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a Present

Imperative sense, as, audiam, let vie hear, audias, hear thou,
audiat, let

him

hear, etc.

VERB INFINITE.
aud-ire, to hear (or hearing in

Present and

of

*the

act of hearing').

Perfect and

Pluperfect,

Future,

sense

the

Imperfect,

^^dj^-isse, to have heard.

auditurus esse,

to

he about to

hear.

Accusative,
Genitive,
Dat. Abl.,

Gerunds.

e,

Supines.

Participles.

m -um,

'

aud-iendum, hearing.
aud-iendi, of hearing.
aud-iendo,yd?r or by hearing.

aud-itum, in

order

to

hear.

in -u,

aud-itu, in hearing.

Present,

aud-iens, ^^<2rz>/^ (declined hke

ingens).

p^^^^^^^
Future,

(wanting, see 302.)

aud-iturus, about to hear.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

42

52.

[ 52-

Passive Voice.

First Conjugation.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.

/ am loved or am being loved.

am-aris or -are, Thou art loved, etc.
am-atur, He is loved.

S. am-or,

Present
Tense.

P. am-amur, We are

loved,

am-amini, Ye are loved,

am-antur, They are loved.
S.

Future-

am-abor, / shall he loved.

am-aberis or -abere, Thou will
am-abitur,

Simple
Tense.

He

be loved.

will be loved.

P. am-abimur, We shall

be loved.

am-abimini, Ve will be loved,

am-abuntur, They will be loved.
S. am-atus sum^,

am-atus
am-atus

Perfect
Tense

es,

I have

been loved,

Thou hast

He

est,

been loved,

has been

P, am-ati siimus, We have

loved,

been loved,

am-ati estis. Ye have been loved,

am-ati sunt, They have been loved.
S. am-atus ero

am-atus
am-atus

FuturePerfect

^,

eris,
erit,

/ shall have

beeji loved.

Thou wilt have

He

ivill

been loved.

have been

loved,

P. am-ati erimus, We shall have been loved.

am-ati eritis, Ye will have bce7i loved.
am-ati erunt, 2hey will have beefi loved.

Tense.

or

fui, etc.

{yx^xo^ etc.

FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE VOICE.

53.]

INDICATIVE MOOD

43

{continued).

Historic Tenses.

Imperfect
Tense.

/ was

loved.

loved,

being loved^ or

P. am-abamur, We were being loved.

am-abamini, Ye were being loved.
am-abantur, They were being loved.
S.

AoRIST
Tense.

I was

am-abaris or -abare, Thou wast being

am-abatur, He was being loved.

S. am-abar,

am-atus sum ^, / was loved.

am-atus es, Thou wast loved,
am-atus est, He was loved.

P. am-ati siimus, We were

loved,

am-ati estis, Ye were loved,

am-ati sunt, They were loved.
S. am-atus

Pluperfect
Tense.

eram ^, / had

been loved.

am-atus eras, Thou hadst been loved.

am-atus erat. He had been loved.

P. am-ati eram us, We had been loved.

am-ati eratis. Ye had been loved,
am-ati erant. They had been loved.
or

fui, etc.

or fueram, etc.

[etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

44

SUBJUNCTIVE

or

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Primary Tenses.

/ may be loved, or may I be loved.

am-eris or -ere, Thou mayst be loved, etc.
am-etur, He may be loved.

S. am-er,

Present

P. am-emur, We may be loved.

am-emini, Ve may be loved.
am-entur, They may be loved.

Tense.

S.

Perfect

amatus sim ^, / may have been loved,

amatus sis, Thou mayst have been loved.
amatus sit, He may have been loved.

P. amati simus. We may have

Tense.

amati
amati

sitis,

sint.

been loved.

Ye may have been loved.

They may have been loved.
Tenses.

Historic

/ should or Jiiight be loved.

am-areris or -arere, Thou wouldsi be loved,
am-aretur, He would be loved.
[etc.

S. am-arer,

Imperfect
Tense.

P. am-aremur, We should be loved.

am-aremini. Ye would be loved.
am-arentur. They would be loved.
S.

amatus essem

^,

should or might have

been loved.

Pluperfect
Tense.

amatus
amatus

esses,
esset.

Thou wouldst have been loved.

would have been loved.

He

P. amati essemus. We should have been loved.

amati essetis. Ye would have been loved.
amati essent, They would have been loved.

Future- Simple Tense. Wanting see 296.

Aorist Tense.
Rendered variously by amatus sim, amarer,
and amatus essem. See 205, 206.
:

'

or fuerim, etc.

or fuissem, etc.

5^.]

FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE VOICE.

45

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S. 2 Pers. am-are, be thoii loved, am-ator, thoii must
he loved.

am-ator, he must be

3 Pers.

loved.

P.

2 Pers.

am-amini,

be ye loved.

am-antor, they must

3 Pers.

be loved.

Note I. The forms amator, amator, amantor are sometimes reckoned as Future Imperatives.
Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a
Present Imperative sense, as amer, let me be loved, ameris,
be thou loved, ametur, let him be loved, etc.

VERB

IWFIITITE.

Present and
T

Imperfect,
Infinitive

Mood.

am-ari,

Perfect and) amatus esse

Pluperfect,

Future,

to be loved.

oVX^to

fuisse,

amatum

iri,

to be

have been
loved.

about

to be

loved.

Present,

The meaning
(wanting)..
^whilst being loved'

may be rendered
by dum with Present Indicative, as,

Participles.

dum

amatur.

loved, being loved, or

Perfect,

amatus,

Future,
Gerundive,

(wanting.)

having been

loved.

am-andus, that must be

loved.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

46

^53. Second Conjugation.

[53-

Passive Voice.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.
S. mon-eor,

/ a77i

advised, or

am

being ad-

mon-eris or -ere, Thou art advised,

mon-etur, He is advised.

Present
Tense.

[vised.

P. mon-emur, We are advised.

mon-emini, Ve are advised.
mon-entur, They are advised.
S. mon-ebor,

/ shall

be advised.

[vised.

mon-eberis or -ebere, Thou will

tUTURE-

He

mon-ebitur,

Simple
Tense.

be ad-

will be advised.

P. mon-ebimur, We shall be advised.

mon-ebimini, Ye will be advised.
mon-ebuntur, They will be advised.
S.

Perfect
Tense.

monitus sum ^, I have been advised.

monitus es, Thou hast been advised.
monitus est, He has been advised.

P. moniti sumus, We have been advised.

moniti estis. Ye have been advised.
moniti sunt. They have been advised.
S. monitus ero

monitus
monitus

FuturePerfect

^,

/ shall have

been advised.

eris,

Thou wilt have

erit.

He

been advised.

will have been advised.

P. moniti erimus, We shall have been advised.

Tense.

moniti eritis, Ye will have been advised.

moniti erunt, They will have been advised.
1

or

fiii,

etc.

f^^gj.^^

 53-]

SECOND CONJUGATION^ PASSIVE VOICE,

INDICATIVE MOOD

(continuei).

Historic Tenses.
S, mon-ebar,

/ was

being advised^ or

advised,

/ was

\_advised.

mon-ebaris or -ebare, Thou wast being

mon-ebatur, He was being advised,

Imperfect
Tense.

P. mon-ebamur, We were being advised,

mon-ebamini, Ye were being advised.
mon-ebantur, They were being advised.
S.

AORIST
Tense.

monitus sum ^, / was advised,

monitus es, Thou wast advised,
monitus est, He was advised.

P. moniti sumus, We were advised,

moniti estis, Ve were advised,
moniti sunt, They were advised.
S,

Pluperfect
Tense.

monitus eram ^, / had been advised,

monitus eras. Thou hadst been advised,
monitus erat. He had been advised,

P, moniti eramus, We had been

advised,

moniti eratis, Ye had been advised.

moniti erant, They had been advised.
^

or

fui, etc.

or fueram, etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

SUBJUNCTIVE

[ 53-

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

or

Primary Tenses.
/ may

S. mon-ear,

be advised, or

may I

be

advised.

mon-earis or -eare, Thou mayst

mon-eatur, He may be advised.

Present
Tense.

be advised,
[etc.

P. mon-eamur, We may be advised.

mon-eamini, Ye may be advised.
mon-eantur, They viay be advised.
S. monitus sim

monitus
monitus

Perfect

sis,
sit,

^,

/ may

have been advised.

Thou mayst have

He may

P. moniti sTmus, We may have

Tense.

moniti
moniti

sitis,

sint,

been advised.

have been advised.

been advised.

Ve may have been advised,

They may have been advised.

Historic Tenses.

/ should or might be advised.

mon-ereris or -erere, Thou wouldst be

S. mon-erer,

advised, etc.

Imperfect
Tense.

mon-eretur,

He

S. monitus essem^,

monitus

be advised.

esses,

I should have been advised.

Thou wouldst have

been

advised.

Pluperfect
Tense.

would

P. mon-eremur, We should be advised.

mon-eremini, Ye would be advised.
mon-erentur, They would be advised.

monitus

esset.

He would have been

advised.

P. moniti essemus, We should have been advised,

moniti essetis, Ye would have been advised.
moniti essent, They would have been advised.

Wanting: see 296.

Rendered variously by monitus

Future-Simple Tense.

A oris t

Tense.

and monitus
*

essem.

See

or fuerim, etc.

sim, monerer,

205, 206.
^

or fuissem, etc.

SECOND CONJUGATION, PASSIVE VOICE,

53-J

49

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Sing, 2 Pers. mon-ere, be thou advised, mon-etor,
thou must be advised.

Present

3 Pers.

Tense.

Nofe

mon-etor, he must be advised,

Plur. 2 Pers. mon-emini, be ye advised.

mon-entor, they must be advised.
3 Pers.

The forms monetor, monetor, monentor

are some-

times reckoned as Future Imperatives.

The Present Subjunctive is often used in a Present

Imperative sense, as monear, k/ me be advised, monearis,
he thou advised, moneatur, let him be advised, etc.

iVo/e 2.

VERB INFINITE.
'Present AND
Imperfect,
Infinitive

advised

to be
3

Perfect AND monitus esse or\to have been

advised.
fuisse,
Pluperfect,
)

Mood.

Future,

momtum

iri, to

be about to be

advised.

Present,

(wanting).^

The meaning
being

ad-

may be
dered by dum

ren-

whilst

vised^

with

Present Indicative,
as, dum monetur.

Participles.

Perfect,

monitus, advised, being advised,

or having been ad-

Future,
Gerundive,

(wanting).

vised.

mon-endus, that must be advised.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

^ 54.

Third Conjugation.

Passive Voice.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.
S. reg-or,

/ am

ruled, or

reg-eris or -ere,

Present

reg-itur,

Tense.

He

being ruled,
ruled, etc.

is ruled.

Ye

reg-imini,

am

Thou art

P. reg-imur, We are

ruled.

are ruled.

reg-untur, They are ruled.

S. reg-ar,

/ shall

he ruled.

Thou wilt be ruled.

will be ruled.

reg-eris or -ere,

r UTURE-

reg-etur,

SlMPLE

He

P. reg-emur, We shall

Tense

be ruled.

reg-emini, Ye will be ruled.

reg-entur, They will be ruled.
S. rectus

sum

I have

beeft ruled.

rectus es, 77iou hast beeu ruled.

He

rectus est,

Perfect
Tense.

P.

recti

recti
recti

FuturePerfect
P.

Tense.

eris,

rectus

erit,

fui, etc.

have been ruled.

Thou wilt have

He

recti erimus,

recti erunt,

or

/ shall

^,

rectus

recti eritis,

has been ruled.

sumus, We have been ruled.

estis, Ye have been ruled.
sunt, 'They have been ruled.

S. rectus ero

been ruled.

will have been ruled.

We

Ye

shall have been ruled.

will have been ruled.

They will have been

^

54

or fuero, etc.

ruled.

 54-]

THIRD CONJUGATION, PASSIVE VOICE,

51
1

INDICATIVE MOOD

(continued).

Historic Tenses.

I was being ruled or I was ruled.

reg-ebaris or -ebare, Thou wast being ruled,

reg-ebar,

5*.

He was

reg-ebatur,

Imperfect
Tense.

being ruled.

P. reg-ebamur, We were being ruled,

reg-ebammi, Ye were being ruled.
reg-ebantur, They were being ruled.
S. rectus

sum ^, / was

ruled,

Thou wast ruled,

est, He was ruled,

rectus es,

AORIST
Tense.

rectus

P,

recti

We were

sumus,

recti estis,

Ye were

recti sunt,

They were

S. rectus

ruled,

ruled,
ruled.

eram ^, / had been ruled.

Thou hadst been ruled.
erat, He had been ruled.

rectus eras,

Pluperfect
Tense.

rectus

P.

recti

recti erant.

or

We had been ruled.

Ye had been ruled.
They had been ruled.

eramus,

recti eratis,

fui, etc.

E 2

or fueram, etc.

[etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

52

[ 54.

SUBJUNCTIVE

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

or

Primary Tenses.
or may I be 7'uled.
Thou maysi be ruled, etc.
reg-atur, He may be ruled,
P. reg-amur, We may be ruled,

iS.

reg-ar,

?jiay be ruled,

reg-aris or -are,

Present
Tense.

Vp

rpo*-ii mini

S. rectus sim

Perfect
Tense.

P.

rectus

sis,

rectus

sit,

^,

vulpn

fjinv hp

reg-antur, They

may

/ ?nay

be ruled.

have been ruled,

Thou maysi have beeii ruled,

He may have been ruled.

We may have been ruled,

Ye may have been ruled,
They may have been ruled.

recti simus,
recti sitis,

recti sint,

Historic Tenses.
S, reg-erer,

/ should or

might be

ruled,

Thou wouldsi be
He would be ruled,

reg-ereris or -erere,

Imperfect
Tense.

reg-eretur,

[etc.

P, reg-eremur, We should be ruled,

reg-eremini, Ye would be ruled,
reg-erentur, They would be ruled.
S, rectus

essem

rectus esses,
rectus esset,

Pluperfect
Tense.

ruled,

P.

recti

'\

I should have

been ruled.

Thou ivouldst have been ruled.

He would have been ruled.

essemus,

We

should have been ruled.

recti essetis,

Ye would have

recti essent.

They would have been ruled.

been ruled.

Future-Simple Tense, Wanting see 296.

Aorist Tense,
Rendered variously by rectus sim, regerer^
-and rectus essem.
See 205, 206.
:

'

or fuerim, etc.

or fuissem, etc.

THIRD CONJUGATION, PASSIVE VOICE.

54-]

53

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S. 2 Pers. reg-ere, be thou ruled, reg-itor, thou

must

be ruled.
-P^i'S-

reg-itor, he

must be
ruled.

P.

2 Pers. reg-imini, be ye ruled.

3 Pers.

reg-miiov, they must

be ruled.

Note

I.

The forms

regitor, regitor,

reguntor are some-

times reckoned as Future Imperatives.

Note 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a

Present Imperative sense, as, regar, let me be ruled, regaris,
be thou ruled, regatur, let him be ruled, etc.

VERB

II^"FINITE.

Present and
Imperfect,
Infinitive

Perfect and

Mood.

y^-'^^
")

to be ruled.

rectus esse or

Pluperfect, /
fuisse,
Future,
rectum iri,

to

have been
ruled.

to be

about

to be

ruled.
r

Present,

(wanting).
'

The meaning
whilst being ruled'

may

be rendered

by dum with Present Indicative, as,

Participles.

dum

regitur.

Perfect,

rectus, ruled, being ruled, or

Future,
Gerundive,

(wanting).

having been ruled.

regendus, that must be ruled.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

54

^55.

[ 55.

Fourth Conjugation. Passive Voice.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.

/ am

S. aud-ior,

heard or

aud-Itur,

Present
Tense.

He

is

am

Thou art

aud-Iris or -Ire,

being heard.

heard, etc.

heard,

P. aud-Imur, We are heard.

Ve

aud-imini,

are heard.

aud-mntur, They are heard.

S. aud-iar,

/ shall

be heard.

Thou wilt

aud-ieris or -iere^

Future-

aud-ietur,

Simple
Tense.

He

P. aud-iemur, We shall

Ve

aud-iemini,

be heard.

will be heard.
be heard.

will be heard.

aud-ientur, They will be heard.

S. audltus

sum ^, / have

been heard.

Thou hast

been heard.

auditus es,

He has been heard.

sumus, We have been heard.

auditus

Perfect
Tense.

P.

auditi

est,

auditi estis,

Ve have

auditi sunt,

They have

S. auditus ero

FuturePerfect

^,

auditus

eris,

auditus

erit,

been heard.
beeji

/ shall have

heard.

been heard.

Thou

He

wilt have been heard.

will have been heard.

P. auditi erimus, We shall have been heard.

Tense.

auditi eritis,

auditi erunt.

or

fui, etc.

Ve

will have been heard.

They will have been heard.

^

or fuSro, etc.

 55']

FOURTH CONJUGATION, PASSIVE

INDICATIVE MOOD

VOICE,

(continued).

Historic Tenses.

I was being Jieavdy or I was heard

aud-iebaris or -iebare, Thou wast being heard.

S. aud-iebar,

Imperfect
Tense.

aud-iebatur,

He was

being heard.

P. aud-iebamur, We were being heard.

aud-iebamini, Ye were being heard.
aud-iebantur, They were being heard.

I was heard.
Thou wast heard,
auditus est, He was heard,

S. auditiis

sum

auditus es,

AORTST
Tense.

P.

sumus, We were heard,

Ye were heard.
auditi sunt, They were heard.
auditi

auditi estis,

dLXLllLLlo CI ctlll

auditus eras.

Pluperfect
Tense.

auditus erat,

P.

auditi

iLLLU/ UCCfl' iLCLLi CI.

J.

Thou hadst been heard.

He had been heard.

eramus JVe had been heard,

Ye had been heard.
erant, They had been heard.

auditi eratis,

auditi
1

or

fui, etc.

or fueram, etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

SUBJUNCTIVE

[ 55-

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

or

Primary Tenses.

/ may

S. aud-iar,

be hea7'd, or 7?iay

Thou mayst

aud-iaris or -iare,
aud-iatur,

Present

He may

aud-iantur,

Perfect

be heard,

Ve may be heard.
They may be heard.

aud-iamini,

S. auditus

heard,

be heard,

P. aud-iamur, We may

Tense.

I be

be heard,

/ may have been heard.

Thou mayst have been heard.

sim \

auditus

sis,

auditus

sit,

He may

have been heard.

P, auditi simus, We may have been heard.

Tense.

auditi

sitis.

auditi sint,

Ye may have

been heard.

They may have been heard.

Historic Tenses.
S. aud-irer,

I should or

inight be heard.

Thou moulds/
He would be heard.

aud-ireris or -irere.

Imperfect
Tense.

aud-iretur,

P. aud-iremur, We should
aud-iremini,

Fe

auditus esses,
auditus esset,

Pluperfect
Tense.

P,

[etc.

be heard.

ivould be heard.

aud-irentur, They
S. auditus essem^,

be heard,

would

be heard.

I should have

been heard.

Thou wouldst have been heard.

He would have been heard.

auditi essetis,

We should have been heard.

Ye would have been heard.

auditi essent,

They ivould have been heard.

auditi essemus,

Wanting: see 296.

Aorist Tense.
Rendered variously by auditus sim^ audirerr
and auditus essem. See 205, 206.
Future-Simple Tense,

or fugrim, etc.

or fuissem, etc.

550

FOURTH CONJUGATION, PASSIVE

VOICE.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S, 2 Pers. aud-ire, be thou heard, aud-Itor, ihou must
be heard,

3 Pers.
Present

aud-itor, he viust be

heard.

Tense.

P.

2 Pers.

aud-immi, be ye heard.
aud-iuntor, they must

3 Pers.

be heard.

Nok I. The forms auditor, auditor, audiuntor, are sometimes reckoned as Future Imperatives.
Nole 2. The Present Subjunctive is often used in a
Present Imperative sense, as, audiar, lei me be heard,
audiaris, be ihou heard, audiatur, let

VERB
T-

Imperfect,

Mood.

be heard, etc.

IWFIK-ITE.

Present and
Infinitive

him

j -

z.

aud-iri, to be heard.

Perfect and i aud-Itus esse or

Pluperfect,

Future,

fuisse,

auditum

iri,

to be

to

have been
heard.

about

to be

heard.

Present,

(wanting).
^

The meaning
whilst being heard''

may

be rendered

by dum with Present Indicative, as,

dum auditur.

Participles.

Perfect,

aud-itus, heard, being heard, ox

having been heard.

Future,
Gerundive,

(wanting).
aud-iendus, thatmust be heard.

58

in

O
H
<
O
O

LATIN GRAMMAR,

56.J

TABLE OF CONJUG A TION ENDINGS.

cj

c3

/-

-Q rQ
lOj ><U ICU

^-^

S S 6

!ci

irt

irt

loJ

io3

los

i<v lo;

irt

IC^

loJ

^^^

,1

IC^

laJ i(U icu

ci

cS

Irt l<U l<U

C/5

^t/)

'P

'-Ti

'-P

lai

loJ

irt

^^^

c/T

ci

n
rqj

loi i(U lOJ 'H

3
?3 P
^

I
o
loJ ic3 loJ
t/2

(/)

:=!

^ ^ ^ "H

113

ici ia> i<u

i
C3

i f
eg

C3

ri

S o O

H-

^
1

?i

LATIN GRAMMAR.

6o

[ 56.

P 3
C C!
CJ W

cj

l<U l(U IQJ

1^

C3
(U

loj i(U

EH

5 ^ C

;3 ^
2
s a s I
?3

.a;,a;,a;,a.
irt lOJ jqj

1!^

B S 5

icu

a; i(u
>-.
)-H
jT
inj i<u >iu {P,

oj
t/)

O
O

Id

PI

S O 5

o
o

!>

>
M

EH

<u

<u

t/5

C/5

<u

*n *M

'r1

i(U ICU lo;

1(1)

i-i

^-1

1C3 l(U ><U

>-i

l-i

2^

^ ^

103 i<u

i_i

IrH

r2

q3

>i)

ii:3

loj ICU idj

i"fl3

>-l
>icj \<v

J-H

lL

5<jj

,1:^

s a s a
l<U

^ G ^

iS

!<L)

PQ

&

02

tAl

t/5

ICU

O)

<U

>-i

-i

>_
5(U

ici i(U

a
e

(u

a*^

oj

c/3

^
ji;

a a
(u

a;

cj
|C3

lOJ >cu

\ri

TABLE OF CONJUGATION ENDINGS.

or

o o o ^
G s

cj
;^ .1^
(L>

fuisse.

esse

Jr ()

monendus.

ntus

Itus

1C3

1(1;

)r-l

If-H

us

audiendus.

amaiidus.

regendus.

1<

itus

'

a ^ g

{ 1

dive

<

Gerun

tor,

:or,

or,

:or,

a7id

IPS lOJ )r-l

InH

Per/.

Pluperf.

monitum

auditum

amatum

rectum

)1

'

<

fcT"

Jif
o
o o O

ICS ia>

it^
mon-eri.

monitus.

am-ari.

Future

aud-iri.

amatus.

auditus.
rectus,

^'^

2^
ICS

t t

l(U >(U

i^H

\1 |

<

<
Perfect

Pres.

and

Imperf.

u.
ito.

to.

nto.

u.

u.

ito.

C G C

u.

;i

monu-isse.

moniturus.

amav-isse.

itum,

audiv-isse.
amaturus.

auditurus.

monit-um,

recturus.

rex-isse.

amat-um,

rect-um,

at5te,

etote,

itote,

) 11

itote,

11

aud
^

a
and

esse.

Pluperf

esse.

ate, ete, Ite, Ite,

esse..

esse.

o o

g g g s
o"

moniturus

amaturus

auditurus

recturus

Active

o o o

'

)1
<

.in

.in

mon-en

reg-ens aud-ien

irt
am-are

ICS

iqj ><U

mon-er

am-ans

reg-ere aud-ire

{ |
and

1 I[

Pres.

future

<

Prese?it

Imperf.

S ? ^

sisi
G

<U

y
G
d K

<U

<ij

3
a

i-i

Gerunds
Infinitive

p-t

Mood.

Participles.

cu

AND

Supines.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

57

Conjugation of a Deponent Verb,

THAT IS, A Verb which is Passive in
Form but Active in Meaning.

^57.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Primary Tenses.
S. ut-or,

/ use, am

ut-eris or -ere,

Present
Tense.

ut-itur,

He

usesl, etc.

uses,

P. ut-imur. We

use,

Ve

use.

ut-imini,

using, or do use.

Thou

ut-untur. They use.

S. ut-ar,

FutureSimple
Tense.

ut-etur,

use.

He

Thou wilt

Perfect
P.

use,

ut-emini.

Ye will

ut-entur,

They will

usus
usus

use.
use.

sum ^, / have

used.

Thou hast

used,

es.
est,

use,

will use.

P. ut-emur, We shall

S. usus

Tense.

I shall

ut-eris or -ere,

He

has used,

sumus, We have used,

Ye have used.
usi sunt, They have used.
usi

usi estis.

S. usus ero

FuturePerfect
Tense.

usus
usus

eris.
erit.

usi erunt.
or

used,

He

fui,

etc.

Ye

used,

will have used,

P. usi erimus. We shall have

usi eritis,

I shall have

Thou wilt have

used,

will have used,

They will have

*

used.

or fuSro, etc.

 57-]

CONJUGATION OF A DEPONENT VERB,

INDICATIVE MOOD

63

{continued).

Historic Tenses.

/ was

S. ut-ebar,

using, or

usus
usus

AORIST
Tense.

P.

usi

Pluperfect

sum ^ / used.
es,

Thou

est,

He

sumus, We

Ye

usi sunt,

They

eram

usedst.

used.

usi estis,

S. usus

used.

used.
used.

I had used.

usus eras, Thou hadst used.

usus erat, He had used.

P. usi eramus, We had

usi eratis,

usi erant,

or

using, elc.

usiftg.

P. ut-ebamur, We were using.

ut-ebamini, Ve were using.
ut-cbantur, They were using.
S. usus

Tense.

He was

ut-ebatur,

Imperfect
Tense.

/ used.

Thou wast

ut-ebaris or -ebare,

fui, etc.

used.

Ve had used.
They had used.
^

or fuSram, etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

64

SUBJUNCTIVE

[ 57.

CONJUNCTIVE MOOD.

or

Primary Tenses.
S. ut-ar,

/ m(ry use^

Present

ut-atur,

or

He may

ut-antur,

S. usus sim

Perfect

^,

/ 7?iay

He

?Jiay

P. usi simus, We

Tense.

usi

sitis,

usi sint,

have used,

Thou mayst have

sis,
sit,

use,

Ve may use,
They may use.

ut-amini,

usus
usus

use.

use, etc.

use,

P. ut-amur, We may

Tense.

may I use, or lei me

Thou mayst

ut-aris or -are,

used,

have used,
have used,

77iay

Ve may have used.

They may have used.

Historic Tenses.
S. ut-erer,

/ should or

7Jiighl use.

Thou
would use.

ut-ereris or -erere,

Imperfect
Tense.

ut-eretur,

He

P. ut-eremur, We should
ut-eremini,

Ve would

ut-erentur, They

ivouldsi use, etc.

use,

use,

would

use.

essem ^ / should or might have used.

usus esses, Thou ivouldst have used, etc.
usus esset. He would have used.

S. usus

Pluperfect
Tense.

P.

usi

essemus.

usi essetis,

usi essent.

We

should have used.

Ve would have used,

They would have used.

Future-Simple TeTise,
Usurus sim or essem.
Aorist TeTise.
Rendered variously by usus si77i, uterer, and
usus essem.
See 205, 206.
*

or fuerim, etc.

or fuissem, etc.

57-]

CONJUGATION OF A DEPONENT VERB.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
S.

P.

thou must use.

2 Pers. ut-ere, use thou, ut-itor,

ut-itor, he

3 Pers.
2 Pers.

must

use.

ut-immi, use ye.

ut-untor, they must use.

3 Pers.

Note I. The forms utitor, utitor, utuntor are sometimes

reckoned as Future Imperatives.

Note 2. The Present Subjunctive

Present Imperative sense.

is

used in a

often

VERB INFINITE.
T>

Present AND.
Imperfect,

use (or usin^, in the

ut-i, to

sense of the act

of using').
'

Infinitive

Mood.

Perfect and usus

.

Pluperfect,

G-erunds.

Supines.

esse, or.

luisse,

^^^^

about

Future,

usurus esse,

Accusative,
Genitive,

ut-endi,

Dat. Abl.,

ut-endo, for or by using.

in

-um,

| in -u,

to be

ut-endum, using.
of using.

usum,
usu,

in order to use,

to use.

;^^-P

f^!

in using.

using (declined like

Present,

ut-ens,

Perfect,

usus,

Future,
Gerundive,

usurus,

ingens).

Participles.

having used.

being about to use.

ut-endus, that must he used.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

66

[ 57-

No/e on Deponent Verbs, There are Four Conjugations of

Deponent Verbs, as, venor, Inf. venari, / hunt^ vereor,
Inf.

/ fear, utor, Inf. uti, / use, and partior, Inf.

/ divide, which are conjugated Hke amor, moneor,

vereri

partiri,

regor, and audior respectively.

Deponent Participles used Passively. Many Deponent Perfect
Participles are used Passively as well as Actively, as comitatus, having accompanied and accompanied, from comitor;
oblitus, having forgotten and forgotten, from obliviscor.
Deponents in -ior of the Third Conjugation.
The Verbs
gradior, I walk, morior, / die, and patior, I suffer, belong
to the Third Conjugation, and drop the / before / and

short er, as
pati-or.

pat-eris for pati-eris.

pat-itur for pati-itur.

Indic. Pres.

pat-lmury2?r pati-imur.
pat-imini for pati-imini.
L

Imper. Pres.
SuBj. Imperf.
Inf. Pres.

pati-untur.

pat-ere for pati-ere.

pat-erer for pati-erer.
pat-i for pati-i.

Note on the Verbs orior and potior. The Verbs orior and
potior belong to the Fourth Conjugation of Deponents,
but in some tenses they have forms borrowed from the
Third, as,
r

Indic. Pres.

\
I

2 p. S.

3 p. S.
I

p. PI.

Part. Fut.

Indic Pres.

oritur.

orlmur.
orlturus.

S.

potltur or potitur.

PI.

potimur or potimur.

S.

poterer or potirer.
potereris or potlreris.

S.

SuBj. Imperf.

oreris.

S.

poteretur or potiretur.

PI.

poteremur or potiremur.

PI.

poteremini or potlremini.

3 p. PI. poterentur or potircntur.

COMPARATIVE TABLE OF TENSES,

<

O
n-l

<U

S
^5

F 2

67

LATIN GRAMMAR.

68

Conjugation of the Anomalous Verbs.

59.

I.

Possum

[potis-sum],

to be able.

Indicative Mood.
possum, p6t-es, pot-est, pos-sumus, pot-estis, pos-siint.
Present,
FuT. Simp, pot-ero, -eris, -erit, -enmus, -entis, -erunt.
potu-i, -isti, -it, -imus, -istis, -erunt or -ere.
Perfect.
FuT. Perf. potu-ero, -eris,- erit, -erimus, -eritis, -erint.
Imperfect, pot-eram, -eras, -erat, -eramus, -eratis, -erant.
Same in form as Perfect.
AoRiST.
potu-eram, -eras, -erat, -eramus, -eratis, -erant.
Pluperf.

Subjunctive Mood.

Present,
Perfect,
Imperfect,
Pluperf.

pos-sim,

-sis, -sit,

potu-erim,

pos-sem,

-sTmus,

-eris, -erit,

-ses, -set,

potu-issem,

-sitis,

-erimus,

-semus,

-sint.
-eritis, -erint.

-setis, -sent.

-isses, -isset, -issemus, -issetis, -issent

Infinitive

Pres. and Imperf.

Mood.
posse.

Perf. and Pluperf. potu-isse.

Present Participle, (wanting^).
Note,

Possum has no Imperative Mood.

rVolo,
2.

'

to <wish^ be qjuiUlng,

Nolo fnon volo], to

( Malo [magis volo]

be unwilling.
to qvish rather, prefer.

Indicative Mood.
f

Present.

\ nolo, nonvis,
'

FuT. Simp.
^

volumus, vultis, volunt.

nonvult, nolumus, nonvultis, nolunt.
malo, mavis, mavult, malumus, mavultis, malunt.

volo, vis, vult,

vol-

nol-

(.

mal-

am,

The form potens

is

-es, -et,

-emus,

-etis,

-ent

only used as an Adjective, powerful.

^59-]

CONJUGATION OF ANOMALOUS VERBS.

)

volunolu-

malu-

Perfect.

'

malu-

vol-

f\.ORiST.
c

<

i,

-isti, -it,

-imus,

-istis,

-erunt or -ere.

<

> ero, -eris, -erit,

[mperfect.< nol'
mal-

Pluperf.

volunolu-

FuT. Perf.

-enmus,

-entis, -erint.

ebam,-ebas,-ebat,-ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant.

^
*

Same

in

volunolu-

form

as Perfect,

eram, -eras, -erat, -eramus,

*

'

malu-

vel-

69

'\

-eratis, -erant.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present.

Perfect.

<

nol-

malmal

volunolu-

'

malu-

veil-

<

-itis, -int.

em,

-es, -et,

-emus,

-etis, -ent.

mall-

Pluperf.

-Tmus,

-is, -it,

erim, -eris, -erit, -erimus, -eritis, -erint.

lMPERFECT.) noil^

im,

volunolu-

issem, -isses, -isset, -issemus,

-issetis, -issent.

malu-

Imperative Mood.
(

S.

Pers. noli,
Pers.

2
3

Present.
P.
*

nolTto.

Pers. nolTte, nolTtote.

nolunto.
Pers.

2
3

Note,

nolTto.

Volo and malo have no Imperative Mood.

'

'

'

Injanitive

Pres. and Imperf.

Perf. and Pluperf.

Mood.

velle.

<

nolle.

'

malle.

voluisse.

noluisse.

maluisse.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

70

Gerunds.

<
'

volen-dum,
nolen-dum,

-di, -do.

malen-dum,

-di, -do.

Supines.

(wanting).

Pres. Participles.

volens.
nolens.

3.

Fero,

-di,

-do.

to bear.

Indicative Mood.

Present,
f^ro, fers, fert, ferimus, fertis, ferunt.
FuT. Simp, fer-am, -es, -et, -emus, -etis, -ent.
Perfect,
tul-i, -isti, -it, -imus, -istis, -erunt or -ere.
FuT. Perf. tul-ero, -eris, -erit, -enmus, -entis, -erint.
Imperfect, fere-bam, -bas, -bat, -bamus, -batis, -bant.
AoRiST.
Same in form as Perfect.
Pluperf.
tul-eram, -eras, -erat, -eramus, -eratis, -erant.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present,
fer-am, -as, -at, -amus, -atis, -ant.
Perfect,
tul-erim, -eris, -erit, -erimus, -eritis, -erint.
Imperfect, fer-rem, -res, -ret, -remus, -retis, -rent.
Pluperf.
tul-issem, -isses, -isset, -issemus, -issetis, -issent.

Imperative Mood.
S. 2 Pers. fer,

ferto.

Pers.

ferto.

Pers. ferte, fertote.

ferunto.
Pers.

Present.
P.

Infinitive

Mood.

Pres. and Imperf.

ferre.

Perf. and Pluperf.

tul-isse.

Future.
Gerunds.

feren-dum,

Supines.

latum, latu.

laturus esse.

Pres. Participle.

ferens.

FuT. Participle.

laturus.

-di,

-do.

59-]

CONJUGATION OF ANOMALOUS VERBS.

Feror,

4.

71

to be borne.

Indicative Mood,

Present.
FuT. Simp.
Perfect.
FuT. Perf.
Imperfect.

feror, ferrisorferre,fertur, ferimur,ferimini,feruntur.

fer-ar, -eris or -ere, -etur,

lat-us

sum,

lat-us ero, eris, erit,

-ebaris

fer-ebar,

-emur, -emini, -entur.

sumus,

es, est, -i

estis, sunt,

erimus,

-i

-ebare,

or

eritis,

erunt.

-ebatur,

-ebamur,

-ebamini, -ebantur.

AORIST.

Same

Pluperf.

lat-us eram, eras, erat,

in

form

as Perfect,
-i

eramus,

eratis. erant.

Subjunctive Mood,
Present.
[Perfect.
Imperfect,
Pluperf.

-amur, -amini, -antur.

fer-ar, -aris or -are, -atur,

lat-us sim,

sis, sit, -i

sTmus,

sitis, sint.

fer-rer,-reris or-rere, -retur,-remur,-remini,-rentur.

lat-us essem, esses, esset,

-i

essemus, essetis, esscnt.

Imperative Mood.
(

S.

2
3

Present.
P.

2
3

Pers. ferre,
Pers.

fertor.
fertor.

Pers. ferimini.
fe run tor.
Pers.

Mood.

Infinitive

Pres. and Imperf.

ferri.

Perf. and Pluperf.

latus esse.

Future.

latum

Perf. Participle,

latus.

Gerundive.

ferendus.

5.

Eo,

to

iri.

go.

Indicative Mood.

Present.
00, is, it, Tmus, itis, eunt.
FuT. Simp. T-bo, -bis, -bit, -bimus, -bitis, -bunt.
Tv-i, -isti, -it, -Tmus, -istis, -erunt or -ere.
Perfect.
FuT. Perf. iv-ero, -eris, -erit, -erimus, -eritis, -crint.
Imperfect. T-bam, -bas, -bat, -bamus, -batis, -bant.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

72

AoRiST.

Same

Pluperf.

iv-eram, -eras, -erat, -eramus, -eratis, -erant.

in

form

59

as Perfect.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present,
e-am, -as, -at, -amus, -atis, -ant.
Perfect,
iv-erim, -eris, -erit, -erimus, -eritis -erint.
Imperfect. I-rem, -res, -ret, -remus, -retis, -rent.
Pluperf.
iv-issem, -isses, -isset, -issemus, -issetis, -issent.

Imperative Mood.
(

S.

2
3

Present.
P.

2
3

Pers.
Pers.

T,

Pers.
Pers.

ite, Ttote.

Infinitive

ito.

Ito.

eunto.

Mood.

Pres. and Imperf.

ire.

Perf. and Pluperf,

ivisse.

Future.
Gerunds.

eun-dum,

Supines.

itum,

Pres. Participle.
FuT. Participle.

iens.

6.

iturus esse,

Fio,

to

-di, -do.

itu.

[Gen.

eiint-is.]

iturus.

be made, to become.

Indicative Mood.

Present,
fio, fis, fit, (fimus), (fitis), fiunt.
FuT. Simp, fi-am, -es, -et, -emus, -etis, -ent.
Perfect,
fact-us sum, es, est, -i sumus, estis, sunt.
FuT. Perf. fact-us ero, eris, erit, -i erimus, eritis, erunt.
Imperfect, fi-ebam, -ebas, -ebat, -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant.
AoRiST.
Same in form as Perfect.
Pluperf.
fact-us eram, eras, erat, -i eramus, eratis, erant.

Subjunctive Mood.
Present,
fi-am, -as, -at, -amus, -atis, -ant.
Perfect,
fact-us sim, sis, sit, -i sTmus, sitis, sint.
Imperfect, fi-erem, -eres, -eret, -cremus, -eretis, -erent.
Pluperf.
fact-us essem, esses, esset, -i essemus, cssetis, essent.

CONJUGATION OF ANOMALOUS VERBS.

59-]

73

Imperative Mood.
Present.

S.

P.

Mood.

Infinitive

Note,

Pres. and Imperf.

Perf. and Pluperf.

factus esse,

Future.

factum
factus.

Gerundive.

faciendus.

Fio

The Verb

'

edam. edas, edat,

edim,

etc.

ederem, ederes, ederet,

etc.

essem,

etc.

esses,

esset,

am

is

found for editur, and essetur for

and, nequeo, / am unable, are conjugated

but have no Imperative or Gerunds.

able,

Inf,

Supine,

Perf.

Possum, posse,

potui,

to be able.

Volo,
Nolo,

velle.

volui.

nolle.

nolui.

be qjuilling.
be unwilling.
to iijish rather.
to

to

Malo,
Fero,

malle,

malui,

ferre.

tuli.

4.

Feror,

ferri,

latus sum,

5-

Eo,

Ire,

Tvi or

6.

Flo,

fieri,

factus sum,

like

chief tenses of the Irregular Verbs.

3.

or

edere or esse.

Table of the

7.

Infin. Pres.

Ind, Pres.

8.

or

Sing, ede, edito or esto.

Plur, edite or este, editote or estote, edunto.

*eo,'

edis, edit, etc.

Imperative.

Queo, /

make.

edo, edis or es, edit of est, edimus, editis or

estis, edunt.

In the Passive, estur

ederetur.

2.

to

edo, / eat, has irregular forms in certain tenses.

Imperf.

iri.

the Passive of the Verb facio,

is

SuBj. Pres.

I.

fieri.

Perf. Participle.

Indic. Pres.

8.

Pers. fi.
Pers. fite.

Ti,

edere or esse. edi.

Edo,
quTvi,
quire.
Queo,
nequTvi,
Nequeo, nequTre,

latum.

to bear.

itum.

to go.

to be borne.

to

be

become.

made or

to eat.
esum,
quitum, to be able.
nequitum, to he unable.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

74
60.

Interrogative Forms of the Verb.

The

Use of-ne.

made

Interrogative

Indicative
(i.e.

made

and Subjunctive Moods may be

to express a question)

the Particle -ne to the various

by adding

Numbers and Persons,

Indic. Present, amo-ne, do

2iTc\2i'i'n^,

as,

I love ?

dost ihou love ?

Future, amabo-ne, shall

etc.

I love?

amabis-ne, wilt thou love P

etc.

and so on throughout the Tenses.

Note.
For videsne, audisne,
audin, etc., in Poetry.

The

Position of -ne.

tached to
usually

am at,

added

we sometimes
-ne

Particle

not necessarily at-

is

word

to the first

in the sentence, as,

It

is

puerne

does the hoy love ?

Use of

When

num.

the answer

used in a question instead of -ne,

is

find the forms vid^n,

an Interrogative sentence.

Verb in

the

etc.,

no'

is

expected

num

as,

num

amat, he does

not love, does he ?

When

Use of nonne.

nonne is used in a
or, / love, do I not ?
Double Questions.

which the answer

first

expected
not love?

word or occurs in a question to

no is expected, it is translated
Particles utrum, num, -ne must be
'

or

'

'

part of the question, as,

utrum servus es an liber

num servus es an liber?
servusne cs an

is

nonne amo, do I

If the

yes

by an, and one of the

used for the

answer *yes'

the

question, as,

lii)cr.'*

Are you

a slave or a free man?'^

Literally 'Whether are you a slave or a free man?' ])ut the lui<;lish
Interrogative whether is now seldom used in direct (juestions. It appears
more frequently in older English, as, Mark ii. 9, Whether is it easier to
say to the sick of the palsy, Thy sins be forgiven thee or to say, Arise,
and take up thy bed and walk ?
'

'


NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS.

-63.]

The

Interrogative Pronouns^ etc.

nouns and Particles in Latin are

chief Interrogative Pro-

of what sort?
quantus, how great?

why?

cur,

qualis,
.

quo ties, how often?

quare, wherefore ?

which of two ?

ft

uter,

ft

quis,

who ?
c^oi, how many ?

quam, how ?

quotus, which in numerical

num, whether ?

'

q}iomodiO,

ut,

how ?

whether?

-ne,

order?

unde, whence ?
ubi,

75

how ?

an, or whether ?

where ?

utrum, whether of the twoJ^

quando, when ?

NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS.

The Pronouns she and

61. Third Person Singular.
Singular
are used, as well as he, to translate the 3rd Person
Thus amat may mean he, she, or it loves/
of the Verb.
Verb sum
In Tenses compounded of a Participle and the

it

'

according to the
the termination of the Participle will vary

Gender of the person or thing spoken

amatus

amata

est,

est,

amatum
62.

He

has been

She has

est,

Certain Verbs are found only

Person Singular, and have the word

apparent Nominative in English,

These are

63.

called Impersonal

amo, may be

translated

list

as,

licet,

it

it

is

for their

permitted

Verbs\

Present Indicative.

loved,

been loved,

// has been loved,

Impersonal Verbs.

in the 3rd

of, as,

love,

Present Indicative,

I am

of the chief Impersonals

is

loving, or
given in

78.

as

do love,


LATIN GRAMMAR.

76

The

sign do

phasis

is

seldom used affirmatively except when em-

required, but

is

it

and Interrogative forms,

do

constantly occurs in the Negative

as,

non amo, /

do not love ;

amone,

I love ?

Imperfect Indicative. An Imperfect Indicative,

amabam, may be translated / ivas loving, I loved, I used
to love, or / began to love.
The translation / loved can only
be used when the meaning is I was loving at the time, a sense
64.

as

which

is

65.

often loosely expressed by the English Past Tense.

The

Aorist Indicative.

affirmatively, except

stantly occurs in the Negative

/ did not

non amavi,

sign did

seldom used

is

sake of emphasis, but

for the

it

con-

and Interrogative forms,

as

love, etc.

Present Subjunctive. This Tense admits of

Thus amem means / may, would, or
should love, may I love, and let me love : and, further, it has
66.

many

translations.

often to be translated as a Present Indicative,

loving, or

do love,

when

ordinate sentences.

English by since

Thus,

it

love,

I am

occurs in dependent or sub-

quum amem

is

expressed in

I love.

What has been

67. Other Subjunctive Tenses.
marked of the Present holds good with respect to all

re-

the

other Subjunctive Tenses, viz. that they frequently have to

be translated by the corresponding Tense of the Indicative,

and not by the signs would, would

audivissem does not

when I had

68.

Tenses.

Thus,

quum

should have heard, but

heard.

Contraction in the Perfect and Pluperfect

Perfects ending in -vi, and the Tenses formed

from them,
letter

mean when I

have, etc.

may

v being

suffer contraction in all Conjugations, the

omitted,

e. g.

-7l

NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS.

Conj.

I.

Amasti/^?r amavisti

Conj.

2.

Summosses /or summovisses.

Conj.

3.

N6runt_/^?r noverunt

Conj.

4.

Audisti /or audivisti.

is

also

a form

77

amassent/?r amavissent.

n6sti/^?r novisti.

In this Conjugation there

produced by throwing out the

v,

without any contraction of vowels, as Perf. audii/d?r

This form

audivi.

is

also

found

in certain

the Third Conjugation, as, peto, cupio,

have Perfect in

which

-vi, as, petii /or petivi.

This contraction

Nofe,

Verbs of

etc.,

is

not allowed before -re in the

We

3rd Person Plural of the Perfect Indicative.

cannot say amare /or amavere.

Old Latin Forms sometimes used in Poetry.

69.

was used

(a) In the Pres. Infin. Pass, -ier

for

-i,

as,

amarier /or amari.

(d)

In the Imperf Indie, of 4th Conjugation e was

dropped,

as,

audibam /or audiebam.

In the Fut. Simp, of 4th Conjugation the regular

(c)

forms -ibo and -ibor were used,

Afterwards

forms

these

were

proper to the 3rd Conjugation,

(d)

The

audibo, audibor.

replaced

as,

by forms

audiam, audiar.

and 3rd Conjugations

Subj. Pres. in the ist

sometimes ended in -im,

as,

duim, k/ me give, for

as,

dem edim, lei me eat, for edam.

Facio, fero, dico,
70. Note on certain Imperatives.
and duco^ make in the Imperative Present fac, fer die, due.
;

Scio,

I know,

71.

has only

scito,

never

sci,

Note on the termination

for Imperative.

'-re' for

'-ris.'

The

use of -re for -ris as the termination of the 2nd Pers. Sing, in
the Passive Voice

is

common

Present Indicative, where

finitive

it

in

all

Active or Imperative Passive,

^

Make^

the tenses except the

might be mistaken
as,

hear, say, lead.

amare.

for the In-


LATIN GRAMMAR.

78

The

Gerundive in '-undus/

72.

gerundives of the

3rd and 4th Conjugations are sometimes formed in -undus

instead of -endus, especially

when

precedes, as potiundus,

capiundus.

The Periphrastic Conjugation.

The Future
may be coupled with all the Tenses of the
Verb sum, and thus a new Active Conjugation, called the
73.

Active Participle

Periphrastic,
to

is

do a thing or

formed, indicating that a person has a mind

is

upon the point of doing

amaturus sum,
amaturus eram,

And

on throughout

so

'

sum

'

to

e. g.

/ a?n about to love,

/ was about to love.
all

the tenses.

In the same way the Gerundive

Tenses of

it,

may be coupled

with the

form a Passive Periphrastic Conjuga-

tion, as,

amandus sum, / ought to be loved or / must be

amandus eram, I ought to have been loved, etc.

loved,

DEFECTIVE AND OTHER VERBS.

74. Defective Verbs are those of which only
Moods, Tenses, or Persons are found e. g.

certain

{a)

Aio,

Indie. Pres.

/ say

or affirm.

Aio,

Imperf. Ai-ebam,

Subj. Pres.

{b)

^%

aiunt.

S-it,

-ebas,

-ebat,

alas,

aiat,

-ebamus,

-ebatis,

-ebant.
aiant.

Inquam, I say.

Indie. Pres.

Inquam,

Imperf. Inquiebat.

Fut.

Imperat. Pres.

inquYs,

inquYt,

inquKmus, inquYtis,

Perf. Inquisti, inquit.

inquYes,

inquYet.

inquS,

inquYto,

inquYte.

inqiiYiml

DEFECTIVE AND OTHER VERBS,

75.]

Coepi,

(c)

and

/lave begun, or

odi,

parts of the

Tense,

Verb which

most

coepi, coepisti, coepit, etc.

Pluperf.

coeperam.

Fut. Perf.

coepero.

coeperim.

Subj. Perf.

coepissem.

Pluperf.

and Pluperf.

coepisse.

Coepi and odi have

Note,

osus,

part, only those

are formed from the Perfect

e. g.

Indie. Perf.

Inf. Perf.

memini, / remember,

begin,

hate, have, for the

79

and a Fut.

a Perf. Part, coeptus,

also

Memini,

Part, coepturus, osurus.

has an Imperative memento, Plur. mementote.

(d)

Fari^

and

to speak,

fare,

has fatur, he speaks, fabor,

speak

Nominative), fatus,

and Supine
[e)

The

with

thou,

Gerunds

fandus,

speak,

fantem (no
fandi,

fando,

fatu.

following Imperatives

Ave

(or have), avete, haiL

Salve, salvete, hail,

Cedo, cedite (or

Apage,
75.

/ shall

Participles

Infin. avere.

Infin. salvere.

cette), give me,

apagite, begone.

Many Verbs

Derived Verbs.

are derived either

from other Verbs or from Nouns.

Those chiefly derived from Verbs

are of four kinds,

Inceptive, Desiderative, Frequentative, and Diminutive.

(a)

end

Inceptive Verbs

signify

in -see, as, ealesco,

(from caleo), tenerasco,

(b)

I grow

Desiderative Verbs

and end

do a thing,' and
warm, grow warfn

to begin to
be

to

tender (from tener).

signify

in -uric, as, esurio,

(from edo).

begin

'

to desire to

wish

to

eat,

or

do a thing/
ain

hungry

LATIN GRAMMAR.

8o
(c)

Frequentative Verbs

quently/ and end in -so,

drive),

signify

and

canto (from cano,

sing),

do a thing

to

-ito, as,

fre-

pulso (from pello

and clamito

(froir

I shout).

clamo,
id)

-to,

[ 76-

Diminutive Verbs

signify

'

to

do a

thing,'

little

anc

I sing a little song (from cano).

Verbs derived from Nouns belong usually to the First

end

in -illo, as, cantillo,

Conjugation

if

Transitive,

as, fraudare, to deceive

and

to the

[from fraus,

Second

deceit'],

Intransitive,

if

albere, to be white

[from albus, w'iite\

Semi-Deponent

76.

These are audeo,

fide,

Neuter Passive) Verbs.

They have an

(or

gaudeo, and soleo^

Active Present with a Perfect of Passive form,

ausus sum;

audeo,

as,

sum; gaudeo, gavisus sum;

soleo,

sum.

solitus

fisus

fido,

77.

These

Quasi-Passive

(or

Neutral

are vapulo, veneo, liceo, exiilo,

Verbs.

Passive)

and

They

fio

are

Active in form but Passive in meaning.

78.

Impersonal Verbs. The chief Impersonal Verbs

They are of the Second Conjugation,

are the following.

and being only found

in the 3rd

Person Singular of the Finite

Verb, and in the Infinitive Mood,

Pres.

may be

Per/.

called Unipersonals.

Itifin.

hbet, (lubet), llbuit or libitum est,

or Hcltum est,

Kbere,

it pleases.

Hcere,

it is

llquere,

it is clear.

Hcet,

licuit

liquet,

Kcuit,

mlseret,

mlseruit or mtseritum est, miserere,

lawful.

moves

it

to

pity.

oportet,

oportuit,

oportere,

it

behoves or

is necessary.

plget,

p'^guit

Dare,

Am

trust, rejoice^

heate?i, ajji

for

or pigltum est,

am
sale,

pigere,

accustomed.
am put up to auction,

am

// troubles.

banished,

am

made.

PARTICLES.

-82.]
Pres.

8l

Per/.

jnfin,

paemtet,

paenltuit,

ipudet,

pudiiit or

taedet,

taeduit or pertaesum est, taedere,

79.

puditum

The above Verbs

meaning

it delights,

Pres.

it

shames.

it

wearies.

repents.

most part, only found

But many completely conjugated

Verbs are used impersonally,

juvat,

it

pudere,

are, for the

the Impersonal form.

in

est,

paenitere,

with

Per/.

as, juvo,

many

assist,

others,

e.

which has

g.

Infin,

accedit.

accessit.

accedere.

it is

accldit.

accidit,

accidere,

it

added.

happens.

constat,

constitit,

constare.

it is

convenit.

convenit.

convenire.

it suits.

well known.

decet,

decuit.

decere,

it

dedecet,

dedecuit.

dedecere.

it

misbecomes.

fit,

factum

fieri.

it

comes

est.

becomes or beseems.

to

pass.

Together with certain Verbs denoting change of weather,

pluit, it

80.

rains, fulminat,

Intransitive

Voice,

jive

as, sto,

Hence

nade.

Verbs are used impersonally

stand, statur, //

statur a

as,

lightens, tonat, // thunders, etc.

me =

2'/

is

is

stood by

in the Pas-

stood or a stand

is

me=il startd.

PARTICLES.
81.

or

ler,
)is,

Adverbs. These may express Place, Time, ManNumber, as, eo, thither, tunc, then, sapienter, wisely,

twice.

82. Derivation of Adverbs.

rorn Adjectives.

From
less

are formed

Adjectives in -us are formed Adverbs in

commonly)

lUbito, suddenly,

From

Most Adverbs

Thus,

-o]

-e,

and

as digne, worthily, from dignus, worthy]

from

subitus, sudden.

Adjectives of two terminations in

-is, -ns,

-x. Sec,


LATIN GRAMMAR.

82
are

formed Adverbs in

or

-iter

-ter,

Adjectives
verbially, as

and

-us

in

horrendum

There

libens, willing.

and

as separatim, separately;

dulce

sounding horribly;

stridens,

chiefly a Poetic usage.

is

also a termination in -im, chiefly

is

Ad-

often use their Neuter^

-is

This

ridens, smiling sweetly.

as feliciter, happily, from

from

felix, happy; libenter, willingly,

from

Participles,

in -itus, as divimtus, divifiely.

Adverbs are also formed from Pronouns thus from hie,

hinc,
this, are derived the Adverbs hic, here, hue, hither, and
;

from

hence ;

from

or which, are derived qua, where,

who

qui,

and quo, whither, etc.

For comparison of Adverbs, see

For a

Prepositions.

83.

see III

These

Conjunctions.

and 162

(d).

of the Latin Prepositions

for a full account of their usual

and 122, and

meanings, with Examples, see

84.

list

28

318-363.
are of two kinds, viz.

Coordinative, which simply link together words,

phrases, or clauses, and do not influence the Mood

(i.)

They

of the Verb.
{a)

Copulative,

et,

are,

-que, ac, atque, ajid; nec or neque,

and not.
(h) Disjunctive, aut, vel, -ve, either;
(c) Adversative, scd,

sive,

whether,

autem, verum, vero, ceterum,

at,

hut.
Note. Sentences linked together by the above Conjunctions are called
Coordinate Sentences.
(ii.)

Subordinative,

Clauses

Those marked

which

The

94).
*

introduce

chief kinds

are

Subordinate
as

follow.

are almost always found with a

Subjunctive.
Masculine and Feminine Adjectives are also used Adverbially, as, invitus {or invita) Romam migravit, he (or she) has unwillingly removed to
^

Rome,

PARTICLES,

-85-]

Ut*, in order

Final.
lest,

in

order that

order that

Consecutive.

Temporal.

quo*, in order

that,

83
thai, iie*,

quominus*, quin*,

not,

in

not.

Ut*, so

Quum,

that,

ubi,

quin*, that

ut,

when;

not.

donee,

dum,

quoad, whilst, until; antequam, priusquam, before

that; postquam, after that; simul, simul ac, as
soon as; quoties, as often as.

Quum*, quoniam, quandoquidem,

Causal.

si7ice;

quod, quia, because.

Conditional.

Si,

if

nisi,

if not, unless

dum*, dum-

modo *, provided that.

Concessive.

quum*,

ut,

Etsi,

licet*,

quamquam,

quamvis*,

although.

Comparative.

Quasi*, tanquam*, tanquam

si*, as

if as though.

Interjections.

85.

hail;

grief, as,

ecce, lo

and

Interjections express joy,

heu or eheu, alas

calling or

summoning,

astonishment,
as heus, ho J

as,

as,

io,

en or

86-

A SHORT CATECHISM
OF

LATIN SYNTAX.
Elementary Rules for Construing.
86.

Q.

sentence

A.

How

do we begin the translation of a Latin

and then

First look for the Finite Verb,

87.

Q, Will any Finite

Verb do

that

for its Subject.

happens

to

be

in

the sentence.'^

The

A, No.

Verb of

Finite

the Sentence

is

never to be

looked for in a clause introduced by the Relative

quod, or by a Subordinative Conjuncquum, when^ ut, that, ne, lest, si, if^ etsi,

qui, quae,
tion, as,

although, etc.
88.

What do you mean by

Q,

A. The Subject
is

is

Thus

said.

Caesar writes,

hence Caesar
Note.

89.

A.

It

That which
Q.
is,

How

is

'

the Subject'

the person or thing of which something

it

is

in

the

as a rule, a

Caesar

scribit,

called the Subject of the sentence.

said of the Subject

do we

sentence

said of Caesar that he writes

is

is

called the Predicate,

find the Subject

Noun

in the

Nominative

Case.'-^

If

^ Under
the head of * Nouns' are also included words or phrases
equivalent to Nouns, e. g. an Infinitive Mood, an Accusative and Infinitive, an Adjective used Substantively, or a whole clause introduced by a
Conjunction.
2 The Subject of an Infinitive Mood is put in the Accusative.
See
112.

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX.

-9^2.]

there

no Nominative expressed,

is

one of the Pronouns

/, thou,

he,

the Subject

she,

is

we, you,

it,

or they, contained in the Verb-ending.

Varieties of the Sentence.

Q,

90.

How many

kinds of sentences are there

A. Three, namely

The

(a)

Statement,

Caesar

as,

scribit,

Caesar

is

writing,

The

(h)

Question,

Scribitne Caesar?

as,

Is Caesar

writing ?

The Command

(c)

Write,

or Request, as, Scribe, Caesar,

Caesar ;

Scribat Caesar, Let Caesar

write.

Q.

91.

What

A.

an Oblique or Indirect Sentence {Oratio

is

Ohliqud)

Statement, Question, or

Command, which forms

Subject or Object (see 39) of another Verb,^

Caesarem

Ait

Scribatne
Caesar

is

scrib^re.

writing

no importance

In the

first

Object of

ait;

He

says that Caesar

Caesar nostra
to

nihil

is

interest,

the

as,

writing.

Whether

of no importance to us, or
us whether Caesar is writing.
is

it is

of

example the words Caesarem scribere are the

in the

second the words scribatne Caesar are

the Subject of interest.

92.

A.

Q.

What

is

Complex Sentence?

sentence consisting of a number of clauses joined

together in such a

manner

that

one clause

is

Prin-

cipal and the others Subordinate.

said to

sentence which does not form the Subject or 0])jcct of a

be in Oratio Recta or Directa.

vcrl)

is

LATIN GRAMMAR.

86

93-

Distinguish between Principal and Subordinate

Q.

93.

clauses.

A. The Principal clause contains the main Statement,

Question, or

added

Noun

a
Q.

94.

How

Subordinate clauses are

some word,

are Subordinate clauses introduced

clauses

Relative,

are

On

The inan

who??i

by

the

quern video,

see is good,

as,

haec

fecit,

or by a

ut lauda-

did this that he might be praised.

the Three Concords or Rules of Agreement.

Q'

95-

A.

He

either

quae, quod, as, vir

qui,

est.

introduced

Subordinative Conjunction,
retur,

usually either

or Verb, in the Principal sentence.

A. Subordinate

bonus

Command

in order to explain

(a)

Name the

Three Concords or Rules of Agreement.

The Finite Verb agrees with its Nominative in

Number and Person, as. Rex audit, The king
hears, or is hearing ;

Reges audiunt, The kings

hear, or are hearing.

We

Note.

than

we

could not in Latin say rex aiidi^ or reges aud/V, any more

could say in English, the

(b)

The
der,

ki?ig are hearing,

Adjective agrees with

Number, and Case,

its

or the kings

is

hearing,

Substantive in Gen-

as,

Bonae matres bones pueros amant. Good mothers

good

Opus perfectum

est.

lUud opus perfectum

Note.

Participles and

Adjectives.

love

boys.

The work
est.

is

accomplished.

That work

Adjectival Pronouns

is

accomplished.

are here considered as

^ SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX,

99-]
(c)

The

Relative

Antecedent

quae

grows

to

own

its

in the garden

is

What

which

high.

The

tree

which

I see

is

high.

Copulative Verbs.

are Copulative Verbs?

A, The Verb sum, and Passive Verbs of

or making, as, vocor,

What

97. Q'

its

but

clause, as^

in horto crescit, alta est, T/ie tree

On
Q,

Gender, Number, and Person

quam video, alta est.

Arbor,

96.

quae, quod, agrees with

qui,

in

Case belongs

in

Arbor,

87

is

I am

thinkings calling,

I am

called, fio,

made,

etc.

the Case-Construction after Copulative

Verbs?
A. They take the same Case
before them,

dies

as,

after

fit

them

sensimus diem fieri noctem, we

was becoming night.

On
What

98. Q,

is

it,

99.

A.

Q.
(a)

its

Name

The

Apposition.

its

meaning

to
is

another to explain some

said to be in Apposition to

kind

is

where the second Substantive

close after the

meaning,

first

and explains some part

as,

Marius consul triumphavit, Marius

(b)

The second

is

erat

the consul triumphed;

where the second Substantive

separated from the

Marius

the prophetess.

the three kinds of Apposition.

first

comes
of

perceived that day

Cassandra vates, Cassandra

as,

they have

meant by Apposition?

A, One Substantive added

part of

as

nox, day becomes night;

first

by a Copulative Verb,

consul, Marius was

Marius consul creatus

est,

as,

consul.

Marius

ivas

made

consul.

is

LATIN GRAMMAR.

88
(c)

The

third

where both Substantives are

is

Accusative after an Active Verb of

in the

//iiri/wig, calling\

or makings as,

consulem

Marium

creaverunt,

Marim

made

They

consul.
Note.

Apposition of the second and third kind is also explained by

as forming what is called the Complemejit of the Verb.

Grammarians
100.

What

Q.

A.

It

must be
it

the rule for the Case of a

is

Apposition

Noun

in

same Case as the Noun

in the

which

to

refers.

Rules of Time, Place, and Measure.

101. Q. Give the

rules for expressing Duration of

Time

and a Point of Time [or time

[or time hoiv-lo7tg\

when\,

A, Duration of Time
annos

is

put in the Accusative,

he lived

vixit,

many years ;
prima luce

in the Ablative, as,

first
102.

Q.

as,

multos

a Point of

Time

surgit, he rises at

dawn,

How

is to

a place expressed?

^. By ad or in with Accusative, unless the place be a

town or small

island,^

when

the

Preposition

is

omitted, as.

Ad portam

Romam
103. Q.

eo,

eo,

/ go

I go

to

to the gate.

But,

Rome.

How is from

a place expressed?

A. By ab or ex with Ablative, unless the place be a town or

small island,^
^

as

the Preposition

is

omitted, as,

Except also domum, home, rus, the coimtry, and foras, out of doors;
ibo, / will go home ; rus ibo, I luill go into the country ; foras
/ will go out of doors.
Or domo, from home ; rwre, from the country; humo, from the ground.

domum

ibo,

when

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX.

-107.]

Ex

He

castris profectus est,

Roma
104.

profectus

Q.

A. By ad,

How
in,

is

He

est,

set outfrom the

set outfroin

89

camp.

But,

Rome.

at a place expressed?

apud,

etc.,

with their cases, unless the place

be a town or small island, when the Locative Case

must be used, as,

Ad

105. Q.

A.

He

fluvium constitit,

Cortonae mansit.

An

What

is

He

halted at the river.

the Locative Case?

old Case specially used to denote

ends

the

like

Number
where

it

Ablative,

of the

ends

at a place.'

except in the

106.

Q.

and Second Declensions,

First

vixit,

He has

Rome, Samos, Athens, Carthage, and Cadiz.

What Nouns have

a Locative Case in use?

A. Names of towns and small islands;

words domi, at

survives in the
doors,

It

Singular

like the Genitive, as,

Romae, Sami, Athenis, Carthagine, Gadibus

lived at

But,

remained at Cortona.

humi, on

vesperi,

in

the

the

ground,

evening,

ruri,

belli,

the Case also

ho??ie,

at

in

foris,

out of

the country,

the

war,

and

militiae, on military service.

107.

Q,

How

is

Measure of Space expressed?

A. Usually by the Accusative,

as,

Fossa ducentos pedes longa,

Duo

millia

passuum

trench 200 feet long.

progreditur.

But sometimes by the Ablative,

He

advances two miles.

as,

Hiberna duobus millibus passuum aberant. The winterquarters were two miles distant.
Note. Measures in the Genitive, as, fossa diicentorum pedum, a trench
200 feet long, may be classed as Genitives of Quality. For Ablatives of
Measure, as multo major, etc., see 121 (g).

On

LATIN GRAMMAR.

go

the Accusative Case.

Q. Define the Accusative Case.

io8.

A.

[ loS~i

The

Accusative

properly the

is

Case of the Direct

Object.
109.

A.

What

Q.

The

is

the Accusative of the Direct Object?

Accusative which follows Transitive Verbs,

Video taurum,

I see

as,

bull.

110. Q. What other uses of the Accusative are there?

A. (a) The Cognate Accusative or Accusative of Kindred
Meaning, which follows Intransitive Verbs,

Duram

servit servitutem,

The

{b)

He

serves a

hard

as,

servitude,

Accusative of Limitation, which

generally

is

an Adjective or Pronoun in the Neuter Gender,

and is added chiefly to Intransitive Verbs, as,

Quid

refert.

What

does it matter ?

Sera comans narcissus, The late-blooming narcissus.

(c)

The

Accusative of Respect, which follows certain

Verbs, Participles, and Adjectives, and

by the sign

ivith respect to

Latus humeros. Broad as

(d)

to

or as

is

translated

to, as,

his shoulders.

(/) The Accusatives of Duration of Time,

Motion to, and Measure, which have already been
(e)

<

noticed ( loi, 102, 107).

(g)

The

Accusative

of Exclamation,

without an Interjection,

Me

miserum

Unhappy me

The

or

Proh deorum atque hominum fidem

of Gods and men I
(h)

used with

as.

Alas for

the faith

Accusative after a Preposition.

^ SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX.

.113.]

III. Q.

What

Prepositions govern the Accusative?

A Ante, apud,
.

Circum,

ad, adversus,

circa, citra, cis.

Contra, erga, extra, infra.

Inter, intra, juxta, ob.

Penes, pone, post, and praeter,

Prope, propter, per, secundum.

Supra, versus, ultra, trans.

And

unto these,

if

motion be intended,

Let in, sub, super, subter, be appended.

Note.

For the meaning of these Prepositions

112. Q,

Explain

the

see 318-347.

and

Accusative

con-

Infinitive

struction.

A,

The

Accusative and Infinitive

is

used as Subject of

Impersonal Verbs, and as Object of Verbs of

declaring^ perceivings knowing, thinkings or believing.

The

rule for translation is;

that,

and

then

construe

begin with

the

Accusative

the

word
as

Nominative, and the Infinitive as a Finite Verb

of the same Tense,

Caesarem amare
loves.

as,

constat, //

is

well

known

that Caesar

(Caesarem amare, Subject; constat,

know

Verb^)

that Caesar has

Caesarem amavisse scimus,

(Scimus, Verb; Caesarem amavisse.
loved,
113.

Object)

Q, Give a rule for translating the Conjunction that

into Latin.

When

that

means

the

by Accusative and

fact that

is

usually translated

Infinitive, as,

Nuntiat Caesarem rediisse.

Caesar has returned.

it

He

announces (the fact) that

LATIN GRAMMAR.

9^

But when ihat means

lated

Hoc

113.

in order that or so that

by ut with Subjunctive,

Caesar redire cogeretur,

fecit ut

Caesar might

it

trans

is

as,

He

did this tha

be forced to return,

Tantum bellum exortum

So great a war broke

Caesar redire cogeretui

est ut

out that Caesar

was forced

return,

114.

Q,

What Verbs

take two Accusatives?

A. Verbs oi asking and

teaching,

and

celo, to conceal, as,

Me sententiam rogavit, He asked me my opinion.

Me hanc rem celavit, He concealed this matter from

me.

The Accusative

Note

of the thing asked or taught remains even

whei
the \ erb IS in the Passive Voice, as, Rogatur
sententiam, He is asked ht
opinion ; Docta est litteras, She has been taught
her letters.

On

the Dative Case.

115. Q. Define the Dative Case.

A. The Dative

is

the Case of the Indirect Object.

The

Note.

Indirect Object is the person (or thing)

affected but no
directly acted on by an action or quality.

116.

Q.

What words can

Object

A,

(a)

take a Dative of the Indirect

Transitive

Verbs,

which already have a

Direct

Object, as,

Fabio consilium dedi, /gave counsel

(b) Intransitive

Plaudunt
{c)

Verbs,

histrioni.

est.

They applaud the actor}

He

is friendly to

me.

^-'^"y ^e^bs which seem from

be Transitive are really Intransitive in
e. g. noceo is
I am hurtful' rather than

^'^^

i-^'l

their

J^.nghsh

L-at^in

and so require a Dative,

I hurt,'

&c.

Fabius,

Adjectives, as,

Mihi amicus

'

to

as,

translation

to

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX,

117.]

A.

Q.

17.
(a)

What

other uses of the Dative are there

The

Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage (Dati-

vus

Commodi

vel

Incommodi), used generally of

persons after Verbs and Adjectives, as,

Praedia

coluit,

aliis

non

sibi,

He

cultivated

farms for

others^ notfor himself

te.
It is very difficult to separate this Dative from the Dative of the
Roughly speaking we may class the Datives that are
ect Object.
slated by to as Datives of the Indirect Object, and those that are
anslated by /or, v^^hen referring to a person, as Datives of Advantage or

isadvantage.

(p)

The

Ethic Dative

a Dative of the Personal Pro-

nouns, used in order to

to

the

person

particular attention

call

indicated.

It

admits

of

many

renderings in English according to the sense of

'

the passage, as.

Pray tell me, what is Celsus doing ?

me see him strike a lictor.
What do you want?

Quid mihi Celsus

agit,

Pulset mihi lictorem, Let

Quid

tibi vis,

The

(c)

Dative after the Verb sum, with the significa-

tion of habeo,

father;

The

{d)

/ have,

est tibi frater,

as, est

mihi pater,

you have a

Dative of the Agent, which

/ have

is

used with the

Gerundive, with Passive Verbs and Participles

poetry),

and with Verbal Adjectives

Hoc tibi non faciendum est, This must

Non intellegor ulli, / am understood by
Bella matribus detestata.
Nulli flebilior

quam

tibi,

(in

in -bilis, as.

not he done by you.

no one.

Wars abhorred

By

brother,

by mothers.

none more lamented than by

thee.
(e)

The Dative

of Purpose,

as,

Decemviri legibus scribendis

for

the purpose

of writing

creati,

the laws.

Decemvirs created

LATIN GRAMMAR,

94

(/) The Dative of

the Predicate, which in English wc

express by a Nominative,

Ea
118.

A,

impedimento

res

erat,

the Dative?

sum

compounds of

Many Verbs compounded

(^h)

Bene^ male,

Ad,

as,

That matter was a hindrance,

What Verbs govern

Q.

(a) All the

[ 117.

except

possum.

with

satis, re^

ante, con, in, inter, de,

Ob, sub, super, post, and prae.

{c) I.

dative put with shew,

give,

Tell, envy, spare, permit, believe,

3.

Persuade, command, obey ; to these

threaten, pardon, succour, please,

4-

Note

and

2.

5.

With

6.

Servlre, nubere, studere,

7.

Heal, favour, hurt,

vacare, displicere,

resist,

and

indulgere^.

All the above take a Dative of the perso?i (also

occasionally
ot the thing); some of them, e.
g. dico, do, invideo, permitto, persiiadeo
ignosco, with some others not mentioned,
as, excuso, / plead in excuse,
detendo, / ward off, gratulor, / congratulate,
etc., take a Dative of the
person and an Accusative of the thing,
as, do tibi librum, / give you a
book mmor tibi mortem, / threaten death
to you, threaten you with death.
Note 2. Jubeo, smo, laedo, delecto, sano^ take an
Accusative temper
and moderor take an Accusative when they mean to govern,
but a Dative
when they mean to restrain or refrain from.
I.

Q. What is the Passive use of Verbs which in the

Active Voice govern a Dative only ?
A, They are only used irnpersocially in the Passive.
Thus,
I persuade is persuadeo,' but / am persuaded is not
119.

'

'

persuadeor,' but

is

persuaded

to

'

Lme

I. Ostendo, monstro, etc.

]
mttto, concedo licet, etc. credo.
;

4.

plnceo or

libet.

pay

3.

5.

Have

'

literally, it

do.

leisure for

Bico, etc.; invideo; parco ; per; impero, mando, etc.

pareo or
succurro, auxilior, suhvenio, etc ;

2.

Persuadeo

Minor; tgnosco or co?idono

obecito.

to

persuadetur mihi

me.

displease.

6.

Be a

slave to

attention to.
7. Medeor ; faveo ; noceo ; resisto or repugtio
tonmiafid, permit, hurt, please, heal.

he married
;

indulge,

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX.

-1:^1.]

On

the Ablative Case.

Q. Define the Ablative Case.

120.

The

A,

95

Ablative

is

the Case which modifies the

of Verbs or Nouns,

like

meaning

an Adverb, especially as

regards Place whence, Place where, and Instrument

Examples

with which.

Place whence,

a.

Athens
h.

as,

are,

Athenis

redit.

He

from

returns

( 103).

Place where,

as, terra

marique.

By

land and

sea.

This Ablative is often hardly distinguishable from the

!^ocative, on account of the similarity of the endings.
Note 2. Here, perhaps, should be noticed the forms magni, at a great
irice. parvi, tanti, quanti, etc., which have lately been classed by etymoogists as Locatives, though the old grammarians classed them as
jrenitives of Value.
Note

c.

I.

Instrument with which,

as,

gladio pugnare,

to

fight

with a sword,
121.

A,

Q.

What

other uses of the Ablative are there

(a) Separation, as,

from

.^^

oppugnatione desistunt. They

desist

the attack,

(d) Origin, as, clarissimo patre natus,

Born of a most

noble father,
{c)

Comparison (used after Comparative Adjectives,

and translated by than), as, Caesar major erat
Crasso, Caesar was greater than Crassus.

(d) Price (or

emit.
(e)

Time

amount at which),

He

as,

hortum

bought a garden for three

tribus talentis
talents.

This

ivhen^ as, tertio anno, in the thirdyear.

Ablative has been already noticed in loi.

(/) Respect,

as, aetate

(g) Measure,

as,

provectus. Advanced in age.

tribus millibus

three miles distant.

passuum

abcst,

Especially frequent after

parative Adjectives, as, multo major,

He is
Com-

much greater.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

96
(k) Matter

which,

7m'//i

with a

Adjective

sapientia,
{k)

Manner how
as,

parvo contentus,

as,

by
in

and never found except

of,

agreement),

man of the

Cause,

(I)

did this of his

to Place whence, d, e,/,

(ni)

own

uses, a,

summa

b, c

may be

to Place where,

is

caused

sua sponte hoc

fecit,

accord.

senectute mortuus

as,

Of the above

vir

Injury

injuria,

fit

either by violence or fraud :

Note.

as,

utmost wisdom.

(usually with Adjective in agreement),

aut vi aut fraude

He

cojitejited

little.

(y) Quality (translated

with

[ 121-

est,

He

referred

and

died of old age.

more or

less closely

A, 7, k, I to Instrument.

Agent by whom,

after Passive Verbs, (always used

of a living thing, and always requiring the Pre-

a or ab,)

position
est,

as,

Caesar a Bruto interfectus

Caesar was slain by Brutus,

(n) Ablative after a Preposition.

122.

What

Q.

A.

Prepositions govern the Ablative?

absque, coram, de,

palam, clam, cum, ex or e,
(ab),

sine, tenus, pro, and prae.

And

unto these, if rest at be intended.

Let in, sub, super, subter be appended.
Note.

For the meaning of these Prepositions see

348 -363.

123.

A.

Q.

What

the Ablative Absolute?

is

construction formed of a

agreement
Bello orto,

Caesar

Noun and

Participle in

in the Ablative Case, as,

Caesar profectus

est,

War

having

arisen^

set out.

Note. Absolute means independent, and the name is given to the

construction l^ecause it is independent of the rest of the Sentence, being
in fact equivalent to a Subordinate
Clause.
Thus orto bello is the I
same as quum helium ortum essct, and might be rendered 'when war
had arisen,' or ^ince war had arisen,' or 'though war had ari[:cn,' etc.
'

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SFNTAX.

-128.]

124. Q,

What Verbs govern

97

the Ablative?

A. Fungor, fruor, utor, vescor, potior, dignor, supersedeo^ and Verbs of wanting, being full, enriching, or depriving.
Note.

Impleo, compleo, egeo, indigeo^ are also found with Genitive

125. Q.

What

Adjectives govern the Ablative?

^. Dignus, indignus, fretus, extorris, liber ^, and Adjectives which signify wanting, being full, ejiriching, or depriving.
126.

Q.

A Opus

What

Substantives govern the Ablative?

and usus

On
127.

the Genitive Case.

Q. Define the Genitive Case.

A, The Genitive

the Case which qualifies Nouns, like

is

an Adjective.
of

used as the Direct Object

It is also

Nouns and

Adjectives,

and

as

the

Indirect

Object of certain Verbs.

128.

Q. Distinguish between the Subjective and Objective

Genitive.

A, The Subjective Genitive

is

a Genitive dependent on

a Substantive, and regarded as the Subject from

whence

The
'

that Substantive proceeds, as,

the love

of God,

(where

God

is

i.e.

the Subject

Objective Genitive

Perform, enjoy,

use,

eat,

the love which

is

who

Amor

God

Dei,

has for us

loves).

a Genidve dependent on

get possession

of,

deem worthy,

desist

from.

Potior also takes a Genitive].

*

want, be in want.
[Dignus and indignus
Worthy, unworthy, relyi?ig on, banished, free.
ometimes take a genitive, as, magnorum indignus avorum, unworthy of
Fill, fill, be in

ly
*

great ancestors'].
Need, use.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

98

128.

a Substantive, and regarded as the Object toward

which that Substantive,

of God,
(where God

love

129.

A,

is

is

Amor

Dei

we have for

Got

directed, as,

the love which

i.e.

the Object of our love).

Q. Classify the uses of the Genitive.

{a) Genitive

of

Possessor or Author,

the

Caesaris, ihe gardens of Caesar;

hort

as,

pater Bruti, tk

father xf Brutus.

(when the Genitive of a

(h) Partition

a whole

Noun

dependent on a

is

of that whole),

as,

magna

Noun

par

pars militum, a great par,

of the soldiers ; fortissimus Graecorum,

of the Greeks,

the braves^

(showing of what a thing consists),

(c) Definition

honos consulatus,
cadus

signifying

signifying a

vini,

the

as.

honour of the consulship;

a cask of wine.

(d) Quality (always found with Adjective in agreement),

as,

summae

vir

sapientiae,

man of

the

utmost

wisdom.
Note
Note

I.

Quality

2.

The above

{e)

is

by the Ablative. See 121 (7).

are all to be classed as Subjective Genitives.

also expressed

Object of Substantives,

timor hostium, fear

as,

of

the enemy.

(/) Object of Adjectives,

as,

avidus laudis, eager for

praise.

(g) Indirect Object of Verbs, as,

he accuses

me of

he reynemhers

treason ;

[lit.

me

datae

majestatis accusat,
fidei reminiscitur,

renwids himself of] his promise'

given,
(h) Respect or

Cause (usually

in

imitation of Greek

constructions), as, integer aevi, unimpaired in age

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX,

rI32.]

99

notus in fratres animi paterni, well known

for his
paternal affection towards his brothers.
Note 3. For the Genitive of Value see 120, 6, Note 2.
130. Sometimes the Substantive on which a Genitive is dependent
s omitted; of this there are two cases, (a) of place,
as, ventum erat ad
/estae, we had come to Vesta's, i.e. Vesta's temple; just
as we savin
.English *to go to St. Paul's,' i.e. St. Paul's Cathedral;
(6) when the
l^overnmg Substantive signifies nature, duty^ or
ondere oves, it is the duty of a shepherd to shear
|:ases the Genitive is known as Elliptic.
j

131. Q.

What Verbs govern

business, as, pastoris

his sheep.

est

In both these

a Genitive?

A. (i) Reminiscor, obliviscor, memini, recordor, misereor,

miseresco,

with

potior,

interest,

Verbs

certain

and

signifying

refert;

want,

together
as,

egeo,

indigeo.^

SVb/f.
(pative

Reminiscor, obliviscor, memini, and recorder also take an Acand potior an Ablative.

(2)

Verbs of

accusing, convicting, condemning, acquitting,

admonishing, and reminding, take an Accusative of

the Person and a Genitive of the Thing, as,
Furti

me

accusat,

He

accuses

me of theft.

The Impersonal Verbs.

132.

Q.

What

Verbs

is

the construction after the Impersonal

The Unipersonals

A.

except

and they may

.

Abire

me

all

and

liquet,

which take a Dative

take an Infinitive

Mood,

as,

/ ought to go away.
/ am permitted to go away.

oportet,

Abire mihi
Note

take an Accusative of the Person,

licet, libet,

licet,

Licet and others sometimes take a Subjunctive with or without

mihi abeam, or ut abeam, I am permitted to go away.
Note 2. Miseret, piget, paenitet, pudet, and taedet may also lake a
enitive of the thing, as, taedet me vitae, / am weary of life.

t,

I.

as, licet

*
Remember, forget, remember, remember, pity, pity, get possession of,
akes a difference, it concerns, be in want, be in want.

it

LATIN GRAMMAR.

TOO

Other Verbs used Impersonally take a Dative of

Person, often with an Infinitive, or ut Clause,

Expedit mihi abire,

go

to

or, ut

Accusative,

T e pugnare
Q'

expedmit for nu

is

aivay.

But decet, dedecet,

133-

abeam, //

the

as,

juvat.

What

refert

juvat, delectat,

fallit,

fugit,^

take ar

as,

You

delight in fighting.

the construction

is

after

interest anc

A, They take a Genitive of the Person, often with

ar

ut Clause.

But instead of mei, tui.

sui, nostri, vestri, the forms mea, tua, sua.
Infinitive or

nostra, vestra, are used,

Nec

of importance

to

On

134. Q.

A.

It

as,

Caesaris nec nostra interest ut venias, //

is,

What

Caesar nor

to

the Infinitive

Nominative,
est

neither

the Infinitive Mood.

is

Mood?

properly speaking, a Verb-Noun, and

Dormire

is

us thatyou should come.

may

be

as,

jucundum,

to sleep is

pleasant^ or sleeping

is pleasant,

or Accusative, as,

Cupio dormire,
135-

Q'

What

/ wish

are the

to sleep.

Gerunds?

A. They are Cases of the Infinitive, the Gerund in -dum

being Accusative (after a Preposition), the Gerund
in -di Genitive,

and the Gerund

in

-do Dative

01

Ablative.
* Jt becomes or beseems, 77iisbecomes,
delights, delights, escapes
escapes one's notice.

//

is

importance

of imporlaiice
to.

to

or viahes a difference

to,

it

oiie's notice^

coficerns or

is

OJ

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX,

I39-]
136.

Q,

What

are the Supines?

A, These are also Cases of the

-um

I go

to

play),

-u Ablative (of Respect),

horrendum

Supine

Infinitive, the

being Accusative (only used

motion, as, eo lusum,

in

lOI

in

Verbs of

after

and the Supine

after Adjectives, as,

dictu, horrible to be told,

i.

horrible in

e.

the telling.
137.

Q.

How

is

the Future Infinitive Passive formed?

A, By the Supine in
Passive of eo,

occisum
killed ;

-um and iri the Present

/ go, used hnper sonally
,

Caesarem, 1

iri

literally,

a going, occisum

On
138.

Q.

the

Can

/ am

be

that there

is

credo

to kill,

Caesarem Caesar.

believe,

iri

credo

Caesar will

Gerund and Gerundive.

Gerunds

the

Accusative Case

A. Sometimes \

believe that

Infinitive
as,

as,

take

an

Object

in

the

Efferor studio patres vestros videndi,

elated with the desire

But usually the Noun

is

of seeing your fathers.

put into the Case of the

Gerund, and instead of the Gerund the Gerundive

used, agreeing in Gender,

is

Number, and Case

with the Noun.

1 39-

Q' Give an example.

A. Instead of saying, amor exercendi virtutem,

practising virtue,

we

usually say,

amor

the love

of

exercend^?^^

virtut/>.

when

a Pronoun or Adjective is the Object, as, studio

a desire of seeing that thing; studio multa videndi,
'Ath desire of seeing ma?iy things.
This is to prevent amljiguity, because
tudio illius videndi might mean with a desire of seeing that man or that
king : studio multorum videndorum, might mean with a desire (f seeing
lany men, or many things.
^

Especially

llud videndi,

z^/Z/A

LATIN GRAMMAR,

i02
140.

How

Q.

word

the

is

[ 140-j

translated into Latin?

;//^/^/

A, In the Passive Voice by the Gerundive; in the Active

amandum

by the forms

dum

we must

est,

est,

we must

advise, etc.,

love,

monen-

which are probably,

the neuters of the Gerundive.

Can amandum

141. Q.

Object after

God

love

A, No;

Amandus

say,

But

est

Deum, We must

est

Deus, God must

Verbs which only govern

after

of the Object

Dative, a Dative

cendum

est take an Accusative of the

Amandum

we must
loved.

as,

it,

used,

is

We must spare

est hostibus.

as.

he

the

Par-,

our emmies.

Fungor, fruor, utor, vescor, and potior, which govern an Abhave both Gerund and Gerundive hence we may say, utendum
est aetate, we must make use of our age, or, utenda est aetas, (the latter
form very rare).
Note.

lative,

In what case

142. Q.

whom

a thing

A. In the Dative,

as,

is

is

the Agent, or

livt7tg

person by

done, put after the Gerundive

Canendum

est poetae,

The poet must

be sung by the poet';] unless

sing

[literally,

the

Verb be one of those w^hich only govern a

when a or ab with Ablative must be used,

it is

to

Dative,

Credendum

as,

mean

est a poeta.

The poet must

believe.

nobis credendum est poetae might

either the poet must believe us or we must believe the poet.

Note. This

to prevent

is

ambiguity

Rules for Qui, Quum, and Ut.

143. Q.

What

qui

A. Qui,

in

is

the rule for the

Mood

of the Verb

after

its

simple sense of

who or which,

Indicative, as, qui peccat miser est,

miserable.

order

that,

But
or

if

there

such

is

that,

He

implied in
it

takes

takes the
ivho sins

it

the

is

since, in

Subjunc-

tive, as,

A SHORT CATECHISM OF SYNTAX.

-146.]

Stultus es qui huic credas,

this

Fou

IC3

are foolish for believing

man.

He

Mittit equites qui agros vastent,

sends cavalry

lay

to

waste the fields.

Non

est is qui timeat,

What

144. Q.

A.

is

He

since or

quum

perfect

Quum
Quum

ita

Since these

sint.

quum, meaning when,

things are so ;

afraid.

always takes the

although^

Subjunctive, as, quae

junctive

to be

quum?

the Rule for

Quum, meaning

man

is riot the

takes a Sub-

the sense requires an Imperfect or Plu-

if

Tense

otherwise

Athenis essem, When

takes the Indicative, as,

it

I was

at Athens.

Athenas pervenisset, When he had arrived at

Athens,

Vix haec locutus erat quum clamor exortus est,

had he said these things when a shout arose,

145. 0-

What

A. Ut, meaning
ut vales.

or so

Edimus

Tam

Scarcely

the rule for ut?

is

when, or how, takes an Indicative,

as,

How

meaning

are you ? ut,

that, tak-^s

ut vivamus,

a Subjunctive,

We

eat that

as,

in order that,

as,

we may

live,

God

potens est Deus ut omnia regat,

is so

powerful

that he rules all things.

Note.
The Rules given in the three foregoing sections must be
understood to apply only to Oratio Recta, so far as the use of the
[ndicative is concerned. When the learner has mastered the Note on
.he Subjunctive given in 197-203, he will understand that whenever
I Sentence is Oblique the use of an Indicative is inadmissible.

146.

Q.
7iot

How

are in order that

translated

A, In order that

and

not

.v^

that

not by

ne

so that

7iot

by ut non.


LATIN GRAMMAR.

104

On
147.

the Sequence of Tenses.

What

Q.

[ I47-9.

meant by the Sequence of Tenses

is

A. The correspondence regularly observed between the

tenses of the Principal Verbs in a sentence and
those of the Subordinate or Dependent Verbs.

What

148. Q.

the rule for the Sequence of Tenses.?

is

A, Primary Tenses are followed by Primary, Historic

by Historic.
{a)

Affirmat,

Examples

He

declares or

or

would have

is

se

affirmabit,

declaring

scripsisse,

scribere,

fuisse.
^

has declared will declare, that

,

wrote or has written, will write,

writing,

is

Oblique Statement,

affirmavit,

scripturum esse, scripturum

he writes

are

writteji.

Affirmabat, affirmavit, affirmaverat, se scribere, scripsisse,

scripturam esse, scripturam fuisse.

She was declaring, declared, had declared, that she wrote or

ivas writing,

had

imuld

written,

would have

write,

ivritten.

After Primary Tenses, scribere and esse are Presents, scripsisse

and fuisse Aorists or Perfects after Historic Tenses they are Imperfects
or Aorists, and Pluperfects, respectively.
Note.

{b)

Oblique Question.

Quaero, quaesivi, quaeram, quid

quid scripturus

sit,

quid scripturus

scribat,

quid

scripserit,

fuerit.

I have asked, I shall ask, what he

what he wrote or has written, what he
will write, what he would have written.
Quaerebam, quaesivi, quaesiveram, quid scriberet, quid
ask or

am

asking,

writes or is writing,

scripsisset,

/ was

esset,

I asked, I had

quid scriptura
asked,

what she had written, what

would have written.

writing,
she

quid scriptura

asking,

what
she

fuisset.

she wrote or

would

write,

was

what

APPENDIX.
A TABLE OF VERBS, SHEWING THE PRESENT,

AND

INFINITIVE, PERFECT,
Note.

Some Verbs,

have forms belonging to more than one Conju-

as lavo,

These are bracketed and placed in the

Conjugations to which either of the forms can be
gation.

*5^*

Forms enclosed

in

round brackets,

Infinitive.

Regular Form,
Exceptions
{a)

as,

order of the

earliest in

referred.

(jutum) are rarely used.

First Conjugation.

149.
Present.

-are,

amo,

as.

SUPINE.

amare,

Supine,

Perfect.

-atum.
amatum.

-avi,

amavic

Those having -ui

in Perfect,

-itum or -turn

in Supine.

Meaning.

Pres.

Inf.

Perf.

Supine,

1.

crepo,

crepui,

cubo,

cubiii,

crepitum,
cubitum,

creak,

2.

crepare,
cubare,

3.

domo,

domare,

domui,

tatne.

4.

eneco,

enecare,

domitum,
enectum,

enecui,
(

explicui,

5.

explico,

explicare,|g^j;,i^-^i^

6.

fricare,

fricui,

7.

fnco,
mico,

micare,

micui,

8.

seco,

9.

o.

sono,
tono,

:i.

veto.

secare,
sonare,
tonare,
vetare,

The

So nearly

secui,

sonui,

tonui,
vetui,

explicitum,
explicatum,
frictum,

lie

do^n.

k'lll^.
1

rub.
glitter^

sectum,
sonitum,
tonitum,
vetitum.

cut,

sound.

thunder.
forbid.

simple form neco, to hill, is regular.

or Supine.
all compounds of plico, to fold, which has no Perfect
But duplico, double, multiplico, multiply, supplico, supplici.'e, are regular, nut

being compounds of plico.

3

-ui.

Compounds have -atum

in Supine.

Dimico, contend, has Perf.

-avi or


LATIN GRAMMAR,

io6

Those having -vi

(b)

Pres.

Supine,

(jutum),
r lautum,
< lotum,
L lavatum,

juvo,

juvare,

juvi,

lavo,

J lavare,

lavi,

2.

lavere,

(<:)

(lavavi),

poto,

3.

potare,

Meaning.

Perf.

1.

-turn in Supine.

in Perfect,

Inf.

potavi,

potatum,

\ potum,

Those having reduplicated ^

drink.
J

Perfect, -turn in Supine.

1.

do,

dare,

dedi,

datum,

gi've,

2.

sto,

stare,

steti,

statum,

stand

Second Conjugation.

150.
Pres.

Supine,

Perf.

Inf.

Regular Form,

-eo,

-ere,

-ui,

-itum.

as.

moneo,

monere,

monui.

monitum.

Exceptions
{a)

Those having regular

Perf. in -ui, but -turn or

-sum

in

Supine.
Pres.

Inf.

Perf.

2.

censeo.
doceo.

censere.
docere.

censui.
docui.

3.

misceo.

miscere.

miscui,

4-

retineo.
torreo.

retinere,

retinui

censum,
doctum,
mixtum, [
{ mistum, J
retentum,

torrere.

torrui.

tostum.

I.

5.

(6)

Those having -vi

aboleo,

abolere,

adoleo,
'ladolesco,

adolere,
adolescere,

Supine,

(-ui) in Perf.,

abolu^'

Meaning.
reckon y think,
teach,

mix,
retain

^.

parch.

-turn or -itum in Supine.

abolitum,

;adoIevi,-j_

tadolui

abolish.

{enlarge,

gro^ *.

*
That is, having the first consonant of the Present, together with a vowel,
prefixed to the Perfect Tense, as do, de-d\.
In the Perfects of compound
Verbs the initial consonants of the Verb, not of the Preposition, appear as the

redupHcation of the Perfect, e.g. consto, con-s//ti.

^ The compounds make -sttti in Perf, as, praesto,

praestiti, and seldom

have a Supine.
^ So all compounds of teneo,' to hold, which has no Supine.
* Adoleo (iisiially in Perf. adolui), io erdarge, hence as sacrificial term
(i) /o honour by sacrifice, (2) to burn sacrifice.
Adolesco (tisually in Perf.

adolevi), 0

grow

(inlrans.).

APPENDIX,

-I50.]
Pres.

Perf.

Inf.

3.

conTveo,

4.

deleo,

107

avink.

tconixi, J
delere,

delevi,

ferveo,
J
^*\fervo,

fervere,
fervere,

ferbui,

fervi,

6. fleo,

flere,

flevi,

fletum,

implere,
nere,
pavere,

implevi,

impletum,
netum,

7.
8.
9.

impleo,
neo,
paveo,
{/)

Those having

algeo,

algere,

alsi,

ardeo,
augeo,

ardere,
augere,

arsi,

rfulgeo,

fulgere,

7.
8.

9.

10.

boil.

-si in Perf.,

2.

^Ifulgo,
6. frigeo,

tabsorbui, J

(absorptum),

make

bigger.

glitter.

be cold.

(frixi),

haesi,

haesum,

stick.

indulsi,

(indultum),

indulge.

haerere,
indulgere,
jubere,

jussi

jussum,

command.

maneo,

manere,

mansi,

mansum,

remainja^ait,
mourn.

luxi,

(luctum),

mulcere,

mulsi,

mulsum,

13.

mulgeo,

mulgere,

mulsi,

ridere,

risi,

risum,

suadere,
torquere,

suasi,
torsi,

suasum,
tortum,

tersi,

tersum,

14. rideo,

suadeo,

16. torqueo,

rtergeo,
''Itergo,

turgeo,

19. urgeo,

(d)

tergere, \
tergere, J
turgere,
urgere,

Those having

(mulsum),

tmulctum,

laugh,
aduise.
t^ist.
ivijpe.

ursi,

urge.

-i in Perf.,

cavere,

cavi,

favere,

favi,

-turn or

-sum

cautum,
fautum,

3.

fovere,

fovi,

fotum,

moveo,

movere,

movi,

motum,

5.

voveo,

vovere,

vovi,

votum,

all

milk.

tursi,

4.

So

soothe.

s^ell,

caveo,
faveo,
foveo,

be on fire,

fulsi,

lugere,

2.

s^uuallonju up'^,

be cold,

arsum,
auctum,

auxi,

fulgere, J
frigere,

or -turn in Supine.

mulceo,

1.

spin,

be afraid.

-sum

12.

18.

fill'-

haereo,
indulgeo,
jubeo,

11. lugeo,

15.

destroy,

pavi,

absorbeo, absorbere,

4.

deletum,

nevi,

I.

3.

Meaning.

Supine.

fconivi, \

compounds of pleo/
*

pounded form.
2
So all compounds of sorbeo,

to fill,

which

is

in Supine.

beware.
fanjour.
cherish.

'VOW.

never found

in

an unconi-

sorbGre, sorbui, no Sup., to swallow.


LATIN GRAMMAR.

io8
Pres.

6.
7.

prandeo, prandere, prandi,

respondeo, respondere,respondi,

sedeo,
9. video,

sedere,
videre,

8.

(e)

sedi,
vidi,

Those having redupKcated

mordeo,
pendeo,
spondeo,
tondeo.

mordere,
pendere,
spondere,
tondere.

Meaning.

Supine.

Perf.

Inf.

[ 150-

pransum,
responsum,

dine.

sessum,
visum,

sit'^,

Perf.,

answer ^,
see,

-sum

in

Supine.

momordi,

morsum,

bite,

pependi,
spopondi,

pensum,
sponsum,
tonsum,

be suspended.
promise.

totondi,

shear.

(/) Semi- deponent Verbs.

audeo,
gaudeo,

audere,
gaudere,

ausus sum,

soleo,

solere.

solitus

The

dare,

gavisus sum,

rejoice,

sum,

be accustomed.

following have regular Perfect but seldom or never a

arceo, ^ward off; caleo, be ^arm (calitum)
egeo, be
in qjoant ; ^or^o^ flourish ; horreOj shudder ; \2ite0, lie hid ; madeo,
be q.uet ; niteo, shine ; oleo, sme/I ; pateo, lie open ; rigeo, be stiff;
rubeo, be red; sileo, be silent; studeo, pay attention to; stupeo,
be amazed: tepeo, be rjjarm ; timeo, fear ; tumeo, swell; vigeo,

(g)

Supine

flourish; vireo, be green.

151.

No

Third Conjugation.

Infinitive ends in -ere.

of Conjugation are the following

regular form.

rieties

The

principal va-

Those having -si in Perf., -turn in Supine.

in -xi are considered as ending in -si, since x

{a)

Perfects
only a double

\lSlote,
is

letter standing for cs, gs, ks, or qs.]

Meaning.

Supine,

Pres.

Inf.

allTcio,

allicere,

allexi,

allectum,

entice

aspicio,

carpo,
cingo,

aspicere,
carpere,
cingere,

aspexi,
carpsi,

behold^,
pluck,

cinxi,

aspectum,
carptum,
cinctum,

como,

comere.

compsi,

comptum.

^.

surround,
adorn.

compounds of spondeo,

So

The compounds,

all

Perf.

to promise.
except circumsedeo and supersedeo,

make

-sideo,

li,

-sessum, as obsideo, to besiege.

^
*

So
So

all
all

compounds [except elicio '] of the unused Verb

compounds of the unused Verb specio, to see.
'

lacio, to entice.

APPENDIX.
Pres.

Inf.

Perf.

lOQ
Supine.

IVTcfining

contemno, contemnere,contempsi, contemptiim, despise ^.

coquere.
coxi,
coquo,
coctum,
cook.
demere,
dempsi,
demo,
demptum.
take a^vay.

6.

7*
8.

9-

JO.

dlco,

dicere,

dixi.

dictum.

duco,

ducere.

duxi.

ductum.

say. tell.

emungo,

emungere. emunxi.

emunctum.

bl o<zv the Jiose,

extingiio,

extinguere, extinxi,

extinctum.

extiTi^uts h

fingo,

fingere.

ttlDCTlt

roast.
ti4/

^.

frigere.

(frixi).

fictum.
frictum.

gerere.

gessi,^

gestum.

infligere.

inflixi.

inflictum.

junxi.
nupsi.
pinxi.
planxi.

nuptum,

UC f/lUiiieCl

pingo,
21. plango,

jungere.
ninguere,
nubere.
pingere.
plangere.

pictum.
planctum,

beat the breast.

promo,

promere.

prompsi.

promptum.

dra^iv out.

regere,
repere.
scalpere,
sculpere.
scribere.
stringere.
struere.
sugere.

rexi.

rectum.
(reptum).
scalptum,
sculptum,

sumere.

texi.

traho.

tegere.
tinguere.
trahere,

unguo.

unguere,

unxi.

urere,
vehere,
vivere,

ussi,

i*

14. frigo,

gero,
16. infligo,
T

jungo,

8.

(ninguo),

nubo,

rego,
24. repo,
fscalpo,

isculpo,
26. scribo,
.

stringo,

28. struo,
29. sugo.
30.

sumo.

3T. tego.
32. tinguo,

34.

35. uro.

36. veho,

37. VIVO,

The

So

,finxi,

(ninxi),

repsi,
scalpsi.

sculpsi,

junctum,
.

ly

u/i.

injiict

STIG^IV

engra've.
J

write

struxi.

suxi.

suctum.

suck.

sumpsi.

sumptum.

take.

tectum,
tinctum,
tractum.

couer

tinxi,

traxi.

ep.

VI H<jC

strinxi.

'I

scriptum.
strictum,
structum,

scripsi.

join.

(JUL C ^jC .

build.

draw.
anoint.

vexi,

unctum,
ustum,
vectum.

vixi,

victum.

li've.

burn.
carry.

simple form temno, despise, is seldom found in Perf. or Supine.

compounds of stinguo, to quench, which has no Perfect

all

or

Supine.
profligo,
all compounds of the unused Verb fligo, to smite, except
which is of the 1st Conjugation.
* Not found except as Impersonal ninguit, it snows, ninxit, etc.
5 Lit. put on a bridal veil, and always, therefore, used of a luoinmi.
Pergo,
^ The compounds make -rigo, -rexi, -rectum, as dirigo, direct.
and
proceed, and surgo, rise, are for perrigo, surrigo (per rego, sub-rego),
^

So

rout,

make

pergere, perrexi, perrectum, surgore, surrexi, surrectum.

..

LATIN GRAMMAR.

TIO
{h)

Those having

-si in Perf.,

3-

4-

divido,

5*

evadOj

2.

dividere,

divisi.

di visum.

evadcrCj

evasi.

V.

shake

IX,
J%x

Jlo^.

laesi,

flexum.
fluxum,
laesum,

lusi,

UdLIiII,

play.

flecterCj

flexi.

8.

fluo,

fluere,

fluxi.

9.

laedo,

laedere,
ludcrCj

bend.
hurt.

mergsrej

mersi,

IIlt;rbUIll,

plunge

12. niitto,

mitterej

misi,

missunij

send.

13- necto,

nectere,

nexum,

hind.

14. pecto,

pectere,

pexi,

15- pidULUJj

jJlciULlcl

T\ 1

i yj

plectere,

1 1.

niergOj

plecto,

plectere,

premo,

premere,

19. rado,
20. rodo,

21. spargo,

22. trudo,

(r)

llcXUl, J

18.

rnexi,

rasi,

sparsi,
triisi.

A5.

disco,

discere,

didici,

fallere.

fefelli,

3*

6. fallo,
7.

pango,

pangere.

cecidi.

cecTdi,
cecini.

cucurri.

pepigi,

The compounds make -dudo,

So
So

The compounds,

all

scrape.
gna<iv.

sprinkle

as,

-sum

in Supine.

casum,
caesum.
cantum,
cursum,

fall.

falsum,

deceiue.

cut^ kill.

sing.

run.

\
/

pactum.

J fasten,
t

recludo, -Sre,

-si,

make

bar

gain.

-sum,

opeji.

compounds of quatio, to shake, which has no Perfect.

compounds of vado, /o go, which has no Perf. or Sup.
except applaudo,

^\

thrust.

learn.

/pegi,

all

punish,
press ^,

a reduplicated Perf., -turn or

cadere,
caedere,
canere,
currere.

iJC iJli fl%.ij

plait.

pressum,
rasum,
rosum.
sparsum,
trusum,

rosi,

cado.
caedo,
cano,
curro,

I.

2.

t ICllJ

uiCA mil.

comb.

T^lQIICIITn
pidUbUlll,

pressi,

radere,
rodere,
spargere,
trudere,

Those having

pexum,

0 1 1 CI

diuide.

V ClDLllil,

11 A.Lllil

flectOj

lO. liidOj

Meaning.
go^ yield.
shut .

clausum.
concussum,

iigere,

o.

in Supine.

Supine.

Perf.

Tnf.

Pres.

cessi,
ced6rej
cedo,
clausi,
claudere,
claudo,
concutio. concutere, concussi.

-sum

[ 151-

in use.

-plodo, -plodere, -plosi, -plosum,

a? explddo, hiss off the stage.

^

The compounds make

-primo, -primere, -pressi, -pressum, as exprimo,

express.
^

The compounds make

-spergo, -spersi, -spersum, as aspergo, besprinJle.

APPENDIX.

151.]
Pres.

Inf.

Perf.

Supine,

8.

parco,

parcere,

peperci,

9.

par 10,

parere,

peperi,

10. pello,

11.

pendo,

bring forth,

pulsiim,

pendere,
perdere,

pependi,

pensum,

^eigh.

perdidi,

perditum,

lose, destroy

pungo,

pungere,

15. resisto,
16. sisto,

resistere,

restiti,

sistere,

(steti),

17. tango,

tangere,

tetigi,

tendo,

tendere,

t^tendi.

19. tollo,

tollere,

20. tundo,

tundere.

(d)

pepuli,

poposci,
pupugi,

18.

Meaning,
spare,

pellere,

poscere,

14.

parsum,
paritum,

Ipartum,

perdo,
13. posco,
12.

Ill

Those having

dri've,

punctum,
restitum,
(statum),

tactum,

/ tensum, \
1 tentum, /

prick
resist

^.

place, stop,
touch,
stretch,
lift,

take a^juay^.

beat, pound.

-i in Perf.,

-turn

in Supine.

I.

attingo.

attingere,

attigi.

attactiim.

touch

2.

ago^

egi,

actum.

act, drive.

3.

bibo,

bibitum,

drink.

agere,
bibere,
capere,

cap 10
cepi,
contendo. contendere, contendi.
emo^,
emere,
emi.

5.
6.

demand,

bibi,

captum,
take.
contentum, strive

emptum.

^.

^.

buy.

So most compounds of the unused Verb do, dere, to place [probably

as, addo, add; abdo, hide; condo, found ; credo,
believe; dedo, give up; edo, give forth; prodo, betray; reddo, restore;
trsido, deliver up ; vendo, sell.
But circumdo, surround; pessumdo, rwm
satisdo, give security; and venumdo, offer for sale, are compounds of do,
dare, to give, and belong to the ist Conjugation.
^ The compounds, as expungo, to expunge, make -punxi in the Perfect.
2 So all compounds of sisto, to stop [itself a reduplicated form of
sto '].
* SustuH, sublatum, from suffero [sub-fero], are used for the Perfect and
Supine cf this Verb.
The compounds, as attollo, extollo, have no Perfect
^

a form of do, dare];

'

or Supine.
^

So all compounds of tango, to touch.

The compounds, except circumago,

perago, satago, make -Ygo, -igSre,

-actum, as exigo, exact.
Cogo, co'"gi, coactum, collect or compel^ is for
co-ago
Dego (de-igo), degi, to spend tifne, has no Supine.
^ The compounds, except antecapio, make -cipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum,
^

-egi,

as accipio, receive.
So all compounds
of tendo, to stretch. Extendo, extend,
shew, and some others, have -sum as well as -tum in the Supine.

ostendo,

^ Most compounds (except como, demo, promo, sumo,

151, d)
-Imo, -imSre, -emi, -emptum, as adTmo, take away.

make

LATIN GRAMMAR.

TI2

8.

9*
1

0.

^,

frango ^,
f11 p"i n
impingOj

1 1

facere,

feci,

frangere,

fregi,

impactum.

strike upon

thro^v.

lectum,

choose, read.

relictum.

lea've^.

lambo,

lambere.

Iambi,

legere,

legi,

refellere.

retelli.

16.

rumpo,
{e)

I.
2.

3-

4.
5.

lick.

refute.

relinquere, reliqui,

rumpere.

rupi.

ruptum,

hurst through.

vincere,

vici.

victum.

cojiquer.

Those having

-i in Perf.,

-sum

in Supine.

accensum,
set on fire
contunsum,
bruise^.
contundo, contundere, contudi, /
\ contusum, 1
defensum,
defendo. defendere. defendi.
defend^
edere.
edi.
esum,
eat.
edo.
excusum.
excudere. excudi,
excudo,
hammer out
accendo.

accendere. accendi,

facessere,

facessi,

facessTtum,

findere,

fldi.

fissum.

clea've.

fodi.
fiidi,

fossum.
fusum,

dig.

fundo.

fodere,
fundere,

mando.

mandere,

mandi,

mansum,

che<iv.

IT. occido,

occTderc,
occTdere,

occTdi,

occasum.
occTsum,

fall^\

6. facesso,
7.

findo,

8. fodio,

9.

10.

do.

break.

j actum.

leci.

lego

17. vinco,

Meaning.

make^

iiTipingere, imDesri.

I 3.

14. refello,
15. relinquo,

factum.
fractum.
fugitum,

jacere,

12.

^,

Supine.

Perf.

Inf.

Pres.

7, facio

12. occTdo,

occTdi,

execute.

pour.

kill '\

^ Facio, when compounded with a Preposition, makes -ficio, -ficere, -fvci,

-fectum, and the Passive is formed regularly in -or, as afficio, affect, Pass,
But when compounded with bene, satis, male, or a Verb, the form
afficior.
-facio is retained, and the Passive is -fio, as benefacio, benefit^ patefacio, lay

open, Pass, benefio, patefio.

The compounds make -fringo, -fringere, -frOgi, -fractum, as effringo.

From pango, to fasten. Some compounds retain the a, as depango.
|
The compounds make -jicio, -jic(5re, -jcci, -jectum, as conjicio.
The compounds are sometimes written -lego, as perlogo, read throus^h,
sometimes -Itgo, as deligo, choose.
Most make -legi, -lectum in Perfect
^

and Supine

make

-lectum.

-lexi,

but diligo, love, intellego, understand, and neglego, neglect^

So all compounds of linquo, Perf liqui, to leave, which has no Supine.

So all compounds of the unused Verb cando, to set on fire.
So most compounds of tundo, to beat or pound.
So all compounds of the unused Verb fendo, to strike.
So all compounds of cudo, cudi, cusum, to hamnier (rarely used).
So all compounds of cado, to fall ; but the Supine is rarely found.
So all compounds of caedo, to cut or kill.

APPENDIX.

151.]
Pres.

pando,

13.

14. percello,

Perf.

Inf.

Supine.

pandere,

pandi,

percellere,

perculi,

15. prehendo, prehendere,prehendi,

16. repello,
repellere,
repuli,

perculsum,

strike

prehensum,

seize.

climb.

17. scando^,
18. scindo,

scandere,
scindere,

scandi,

repulsum,
scansum,

scidi,

scissum,

19. sido,
20. succurro,

sidere,

sTdi.

succurrere, succurri,
suspendo, suspendere, suspend!,

21.

22. vello,

vellere,

23. verro,

verrere,
vertere,

verri,

vTsere,

vTsi,

24. verto,
25. viso,

^yu|s/

(/) Those having -ui

verti,

1.

accumbo, accumbere,
alo,

alere,

alui,

3.

colo,

colere,

colui,

succursum,
suspensum,

succour^.
suspend^,

vulsum,

pluck,

versum,
versum,
visum,

s^weep,

njisit.

in Supine,
sit

cultum,
.

culti'vate.

fj/wp"

concinere,

concmui,

(concentumj,<|

consulo,

consulere,

consiilui,

consultum,

elicere,

elicui,

elicitum,

elicit,

8.

excello,

excellere,

excellui,

excel

9.

fremo,

fremere,

fremui,

excelsum,
fremitum,

frendere,

(frendui),{fress^i^,

11. furo,

furere,

(furui),

in

^^^e

elicio,

roar,

gnash the teeth.

rage,

gemere,

gemui,

gemitum,

groan,

13. gigno,

gignere,

genui,

genitum,

beget.

sum,

har-

consult,

gemo,

12.

restrain.

at meat

nourish.

concino,

10. frendo,

turn.

-sum

{alturn^'

compesco, compescere,compescui,
.

cut.
settle,

accubitum,

acciibui,

do^n.

repel^.

in Perf., -turn or

2.

Meaning,

fpansum, \
Ipassum, /

Repuli is also spelt reppuli.

So all compounds of pello.
Scando becomes scendo in compounds, as, descendo, descendi, descento descend.

So all compounds of curro, to run. But some have the reduplicated

form also, as, decurro, to run down, which has Perf. decurri and decucurri.
^ So all compounds of pendo, to weigh,
5 So all compounds of the unused Verb cumbo, to lie (a form of cubo,
2

cubaic).

So most compounds of cano, to sing.

So all compounds, except percello, 151

impel.
1

of the unused Verb cello, to

LATIN GRAMMAR.

114

Meaning.

Supine,

Perf.

Inf

X res.

[ 151-

reap.

metOj
15. molo,

molere,

molui,

molitimij

grind*

16. occulo,

occulere,

occultum,
positum,

puty place*

rapere,

occului,
posui,
rapui,

raptunij

sei%e.

serere,

serui,

sertum,

se^.

stertere,

(stertui)

snore.

textum,

ynake a noise*
^ea've.
tremble*

vomitum,

'vomit*

14.

17-

ponere,

pono,

18. rapio

^,

19. sero,
20. sterto,

hide.

21.

22. texo,

texere,

texui,

23. tremo,

tremere,

tremui,

vomo,

vomere,

vomui,

24.

{g)
I.

4
5.

6.
7.

Those having -vi

abolesco,
ctl

CCd3U,

abolescere,
adsciscere,
arcessere.
cernere,

in Perf.,

(aboil turn),

adscivi,

civiov^ X L u. 11 1

arcessivi,

n T*p v^ooiU
p QQTf" n
ai
Liiii,

crevi,
cerno,
cognosce, cognoscere, cognovi.
crevi.
cresco.
crescere.
cupio,
cupere,
cupivi,

8. incesso.

9- lino.

incessere.

-turn in Supine.

abolevi,

cretum.
cognitum.
cretum.
cupitum,

linere,

Llivi,

\
/

litum.

10. nosco.

noscere,

novi,

notum.

II. pasco,

pavi.

15. riido,

pascere,
petere.
quaerere.
quiescere.
rudere,

16. scisco.

sciscere.

sclvi,

17. sero.

serere.

sevi.

18. sino,

sinere.

sTvi,

19. sperno.
20. sterno,

spernere.
sternere,

sprevi,

pastum,
pStitum,
quaesitum,
quietum.
(ruditum).
scitum,
satum.
(situm),
spretum.
stratum,

12. peto,
13.
14.

quaero
qmesco.

The compounds make

petivi,

quaeslvi.
quievi,
rudlvi,

stravi,

^
ti/yyiyyinfi
U/HifUJIl *

ii

discern*

kno^ ^*
gro^*
desire*

attack*

incesslvi.
flevi,

decay*

smear*

J become ac'
\ quainted <with.
feed*
seek*

ask*
rest*

bray*
ratify*

SOfW.

allo^*
despise*

tbro^w down*

-ripio, -ripere, -ripui, -reptuni, as, diripio, to tear

in pieces.
^ So capesso, take in hand^ and lacesso, provoke.
Arcesso and lacesso
sometimes have -iri for -i in Present Infinitive Passive. Arcesso is some-

times written accerso.

^ So
agnosco, to recognise.
Other compounds of nosco, to become
acquainted with, have no Supine, except ignosco, pardon, which has igiiotum.
*

The compounds make

-quiro, -quir^re, -quisivi, -quisitum, as exquiro.

APPENDIX.

-152.]

21

2 2.

"5

Pres.

Inf.

Perf.

Supine.

suesco,

suescere,
terere,

suevi,

suetum,

trivi,

tritum,

tero,

Meaning.
be accustomed.
rub,

Those ending in -uo in Present Indicative First Person Singular, which [with the exception of some already mentioned,

(b)

make -ui in Perf. and -utum in Supine,

tribuo, tribuere, tribui, tributum, assign.
Pluo, to rain, has
In this class must be included
Perf. plui or pluvi.

as, struo, struxi, etc.]

as,

1.

2.

solvere,
volvere,

solvo,
volvo,

solutum,
volutum,

solvi,

volvi,

loose,

pay,

roll.

Ruo, rush do^Uy makes Supine rutum. The following have no

Supine: dirmuo, assent ; coYi^vnOy agree ; rnQtMO, fear pluo, rain.
,

These Verbs are formed {a') from Verbs

from Nouns. The former
chiefly of the Second Conjugation,
have no Perfects, except those of the Verbs from which they are
derived, as, pallesco \^from palleo], / gro^ pale, Perf. pallui
the latter either have no Perfects or lorm them in the same

(y) Inceptives in -sco.

way

Few

duresco [from durus], I gro^^ hard, Perf. durui.

Inceptives have any Supine.

in -ui, as,

Of the exceptions
scisco, suesco,
1.

2.
3.

concupisco, concupiscere, concupivi, concupTtum, desire.

blaze forth.
exarsum,
exardesco, exardescere, exarsi,
expavesco, expavescere, expavi,
gro^ alarmed.
.
.
.

illucescere,

4. illucesco,
5.

to the above rule some, as abolesco, adolesco,

have already been given. Notice the following

illuxi,

inveterasco, inveterascere,inveteravi,

{k)

The Semi-Deponent,

compounds confido,
Perfects confidi and
152.,

gronju light.

gro^

has Perfect

fido, trust,

trust confidently,

and

confisus sum, diffidi

fisus

The

diflTido, mistrust,

and

diffisus

have

sum.

The Fourth Conjugation.

Pres.

Supine.

Perf.

Inf.

Regular Form,

-10,

-ire,

-ivi,

as,

audio,

audlre,

audlvi,

Exceptions

old.

sum.

-itum.
auditum.

{a) Those having regular Perf., but -turn in Supine.

Pres.

Inf.

Supine.

Perf.

1.

eo.

Ire,

Ivi (ii),

2.

sepelio,

sepelTre,

sepelTvi,

The compounds

usually

make

ii

in

Supine.
I

Ttum,
sepultum,
Perf.

VGneo,

Meaning.

go^,
bury.

am for

sale,

has no

LATIN GRAMMAR.

Il6
Those having

(I?)

Pres.

-tum

-i in Perf.,

comperio, comperire, comppri,

reperio,

reperlre,

reperi,

vemo,

venire,

veni,

(f)

Those having

confercio, confercire,

2.

feno,

3-

fulcio,

haurio,
5. sancio,
4*

find.

ferire,
fulcTre,

fulsi,

hausi,

sarcire,

sarsi,

7. sentio,

sentTre,

sensi,

8. saepio,

saepire,

saepsi,

9. vincio,

vincTre,

vinxi,

-sum

in Supine.

press together
strike

lultum,

prop.

sanctum,
sartum.
sensum.
saeptum.
vinctum,

decree.

nmcit^
HI
UjJ
U^iM iJ'h

sanxi,

6. sarcio,

or

contertum,

confersi,

haurire,
sancTre,

ascertain.

VPTrfllTTl

-si in Perf., -turn

I.

Meaning.

compertunTi,

in Supine.
Supine.

Perf.

Inf.

mend.
feel.

fence round.
bind.

{d^ Those having -ui in Perf., -turn in Supine.

1.

amicio,

amicire,

2.

aperio,
operTo,

aperire,

{amlxi''

'

3.

4. salio^,

operire,

aperui,
operui,

apertum,
opertum,

co'ver,

salire,

salui,

(saltum),

leap.

unco'ver^ open,

Desideratives ( 75) have no Supine, and with the exception

of esurio, nupturio, parturio, no Perfect.
{e)

153.

Deponent Verbs.

{a) Deponents

of the First Conjugation are all regular,

making Infin. in -ari and Perfect Participle in -atus.

Deponents of the Second Conjugation make

and Perf. Part, in -itus, except

(J))

Pres.

Meaning.

Perf. Part.

Tnf.

1.

fateor*,

fateri,

fassus,

2.

misereor,

misereri,

miseritus or misertus,

3.

reor,

reri,

ratus,

compounds of

ackno^uoledge,

think,

So

Percuss!, percussum, from percutio, are used

all

Inf. in -eri

farcio, farcire, farsi, fartuni, to stujf.

for the Perfect

and Supine

of this Verb.
^

The compounds make

-silio, -silire,

-silui

or

-silii,

-sultum,

as, rt^slHo,

to leap back.
*

The compounds make

-fltgor, -flteri, -fessus, as confltSor, to confess.

APPENDIX.

-153.]
(r)

117

Deponents of the Third Conjugation have no regular form.

great number end in -scor in Pres. Indie., e. g.

Pres.

Inf.

Perf. Part.

1.

adipiscor,

2.

comminiscor, commmisci, commentus,

3.

expergiscor,

adipisci,

Meaning,

adeptus,

obtain'^.
de'vise.

expergisci,

experrectus,

anvake.

Trasci,

Tratus,

become a7igry.

nanciscor,
nascor,

nancisci,
nasci,

nactus or nanctus,

obtain,

natus,

be born,

7. oblTviscor,

4. Trascor,

5.
6.

oblTvisci,

oblitus,

paciscor,
9. pascor,
10. proficiscor,

pacisci,

pactus,
pastus,
profectus,

11. reminiscor,

reminisci,

8.

pasci,
proficisci,

12. vescor,

vesci,

13. ulciscor,

ulcisci,

forget.
bargain,

feed,

march.
remember.

eat,

set out,

ultus,

a'venge.

amplecti,

amplexus,

embrace,

15. fruor,
16. fungor,

frui,

enjoy.

fungi,

fructus and frmtus,

functus,

17. gradior^,
18. labor,

gradi,

gressus,

labi,

19. loquor,

loqui,

lapsus,
locutus,

20. morior,

mori,

mortuus,

die,

21. nitor,

nlti,

nisus or nixns,
passus,
questus,
secutus,
usus,

strive.

The
14.

others are

amplector,

22. patTor'"^,

pati,

23. queror,

queri,

24.

sequor

25. utor,

sequi,
uti,

(d) Deponents of the Fourth Conjugation

and Perf. Part, in -itus, except

perform,
march.
glide,

speak,

allo^.
complain.

suffer,

follow,
use,

make

Inf. in -iri,

1.

assentiri,

assensus,

assent.

2.

experlri,

expertus,

make

metiri,

mensus,

measure.

assentior,
experior,
3. metior,
4. opperTor,
5. ordior,
6.

orior,

opperTri,

oppertus,

^ait for.

ordTri,

orsus,

begin.

orlri,

ortus,

rise.

compounds of

So

The compounds make

The compounds make

'

all

trial of.

apiscor, apisci, aptus, to obtain.

-gredtor, -gredi, -gressus, as aggredior, to attack

-petior, -peti, -pessus, as perpetior.

;^

LATIN GRAMMAR.

[T54-

A TABLE OF RULES FOR THE GENDERS OF

LATIN NOUNS.

{a)

General Rules.

154.

Males, Mountains, Months, the Winds, the Stream,

And People Masculine we deem

Isles are Feminine to these
Add Females, Cities, Countries, Trees
;

Indeelinables we call
Neuter Gender, one and all.
Note, For exceptions see Madvig
[b)

I.

Common

2.

Artifex, and opifex,

2 8-3 J.

are to either sex

Conviva, vates, advena,

Testis, civis, incola,
5. Parens, sacerdos, custos, vindex,
6. Adolescens, infans, index,
7. Judex, heres, comes, dux,
3.

4.

Princeps, municeps, conjux,

Obses, ales, interpres,
TO. Auctor, exul
and with these
ir. Bos, dama, talpa, tigris, grus,
12. Canis and anguis, serpens, sus\
8.

9.

Genders of the Five Declensions.

155.
(^7)

First Declension.

Feminine, except names of men, as

Publicola, PubUcohy and designations of men, as poeta, a poety

nauta, a sailor, together with Hadria, or Adria, the Adnatic Sea,
and Greek Nouns in -as and -es, as Aeneas, Atrides, which are

Masculine.
{b)

Second Declension,

Exceptions
-us.]

Line

2.

8. chief, bjirgess,

exile;

11.

-um, Neuter.

workman;

5.

husba?id or

ox or cow,

Some

Masculine

3. gtiesi, prophet, neiu-comer ; 4. witness,

parent, priest or priestess, guardian, ave?iger ; 6.
or wo7nan, infa?it, informer; j. judge, heir, companioji, guide
nrtljicer,

inhabitant

young man

-er,

Alvus, colus, carbasus,

hiimus, vannus, pampinus,

I.

2.

citizen,

-us and

ivifc

9. hostage, bird, interpreter

deer, 7nole, tiger, crane;

lo. author

12. dog, snake, serpent, swine.

other words, as hospes, guest or host, miles, soldier, hostis, ene??iy, etc.,
their meaning may be of either sex, arc sometimes, hut rarely,
Feminine.
(Copied by permission from the Public Schools Latin Primer.)

which from

APPENDIX,

-155.]
3.

domus [Fourth

4.

and jewels, Feminine are reckoned.

5.

Then come

6.

as well as Second^],

pelagus \the sea],

Vulgus^, virus, Neuters three

Third Declension,
Case.

{c)

of

119

Gender

^.

various, according to termination

Nom.

(1) Masculine terminations

r

\
Exceptions

Masculines -er, -or, and -o,

-OS, and -es increasing, shew.

-er.]

I.

Cadaver, and

2.

With

3.

To

One

4.

-or.]

linter

*.

I.

With

3.
I.

2.

3.

-es, increasing.]

Feminine,

2.

2.

-OS.]

is

Four in -or, are Neuter, cor,

Marmor, aequor, and ador;
One is Feminine, arbor ^
GarOjyfd'j^, and endings three,
-do, -io, -go, must reckoned be
In Feminino Genere.
Feminine are cos and dos,

I.

-o.]

d\\ plants in -er,

uber, verber, ver,
the Neuters we refer;

iter,

i.

2.
3.

the Neuters reckon os^.

Feminine are compes, teges,
Merces, merges, quies, seges.
Aes [aeris], is Neuter''.

(2) Feminine terminations

Feminines -do, -io, -go,

J -is, -as, -aus, and -x, will shew,
r

-es, if no increase is needed,

L-s by Consonant preceded.

'

that

Declensions, except
is declined like both the Second and Fourth
Hence the
avoids the endings, -me, -mu, -mi [in Plural], and -mis.

Domus*
it

memorial
2
3

3.

house ;
Line
^ Line
6 Line
^ Line
*

line,

Vulgus
Line i.

6.
I.
I.

i.
1,

Sperne me, mu, mi, mis, si declinare domus vis.

once or twice found masculine also.
belly, distaff, canvas; 2. ground, winnowing-fan, vine-leaf;
is

common

people, poison.

journey, udder, whip, spring ; 4. boat.

heart; 2. marble, sea, spelt; 3. tree.
_
_
unsj.
whetstone, dowry; 2. bone [5s, G. ossis] or mouth [os, G.
brass.
fetter, mat; 2. reward, corn-sheaf, rest, crop; 3.
corpse;

2.


LATIN GRAMMAR,

120
Exceptions

[ 155.

-do, -go, -io.]

I.

Males are

2.

Cardo, ordo, and papilio,

ligo, vespertilio,

Pugio, scipio, and quaternio,

Curculio, harpago, and ternio ^

3.

4.

Note. Besides ternio and quaternio, all names of numbers, as unio, binio,
scnio, etc., are Masculine.
Optio, an adjutant, is, by meaning!
Masculine.
Margo, edge, is common.

quinio,

-is.]

2.

Many Latin Nouns in -is

Are Masculini Generis.

I.

3.

Amnis,

axis, fascis, follis,

4.

Callis

caulis, crinis, collis,

5.

Fustis, ignis, orbis, ensis,

6.

Panis, piscis, postis, mensis,

Torris, unguis, and annalis,

7.

^,

8. Glis, natalis,

and

canalis,

Vectis, vermis, cucumis,

10. Lapis, pulvis, and cinis^,
11. Sanguis, sentis^, and vomis.
9.

Masculine are clunis,

13. Corbis, torquis, finis, funis ^
12. Chiefly

-as.]

X.]

I.

As, adamas, and elephas,

2.

Are Masculina
Most are Male

I.

2.
3.

4.
5.

6.

-es not increas-

i.

ing.]

Line

2.

Neuter vas *.

e plus x,
Save nex, supellex, forfex, lex.
Common imbrex, and obex,
Pumex, cortex, and silex.
Three are Masculine in -ix,
Fornix, phoenix, and calix ^
Two are Masculine in -es,
Verres and acTnaces^
in

spade, hat; 2. hinge, order, butterfly;

3. dagger,
fiurnberfourj 4. weevil, grappli?ig-hook, the number three.
^

i.

Calli?, cinis,

Line

hill;

3.

and

staff,

the

sometimes Feminine, but very rarely.

pair of bellows ; 4. path, cabbage, hair,
sword; 6. bread, fish, doorpost, month; 7. torch,
dormouse, birthday, canal; 9. lever, worm, cucumber;
scntis are

river, axle, bundle,

5. club, fire, circle,

nail, chronicle;

10. stone,

8.

dust, cinder;

11. blood, thorn,

ploughshare;

12.

haunch;

13.

basket, necklace, end, rope.

^

Line

i.

as [a

Roman

vjidis, bail, surety, is

^

Line

2.

Line

2.

adamant, elephant;

2.

vase.

[But vas,

Masc]

murder, furniture, shears, law;

bark, flint-stone
^

coin],

6. arch,

phoenix, cup.

boar, scimitar.

3. tile, bolt;

4. pumice-stone,

APPENDIX.

155.]

preceded by

-s

i.

a Consonant.]

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

7.
8.

Masculine are fons and mons,

Rudens, torrens, dens, and pons,
Ghalybs, hydrops, tridens, cliens,
Fractions of the as, as triens,

Bidens [hoe] and confluens,

Oriens and occidens.

Common Gender is forceps,

Common also stirps, adeps^

(3) Neuter terminations

r

Neuters end

in -a, -c, -e,

1 -ar, -ur, -us,

Exceptions

121

and

-n,

-1,

-t.

-ur.]

in -ur,
Furfur, turtur, vultur, fur

I.

Feminine are some

I.

-us.]

Four are Masculine

2.

'^.

in

-us

Increasing long, as servitus,

Tellus, juventus, incus, palus,
4. Virtus, senectus, atque salus;
5. And [Genitive, pecudis] pecus.
6. Masculine are lepus, mus ^.
2.
3.

-1.]

-n.]

{d)

I.

Masculines

2.

Sal

I.

Males

2.

Lien, pecten, attagen^.

Fourth Declension.

Exceptions

sol

and

pugil*.

-n are delphin, splen,

in

-US, Masculine

-u. Neuter.

-us.]

I.

2.
3.

{e)

in -1 are mugil,

and consul,

Feminine are

trees in -us,

With tribus, acus, porticus,

Domus, Idus and manus^

Feminine, except dies, a day,

Fifth Declension.
in the Singular, Masculine in the Plural.

which

is

Common
^

Line

1.

fountain, mountain;

dropsy, trident, client

4. third

2.

part ;

rope, torrent, tooth, bridge;

5.

confluence

6. east,

west

7.

3.

steel,

pincnrs

8. stock, fat.
^
^

Line
Line

2.

2.

age, safety
^

Line
Line
Line

l.
l.

2.

bran, turtle-dove, vulture, thief

slavery; 3. earth, youth, anvil, marsh; 4. virti^e or valour, ohl
5. beast ; 6. hare, mouse.
mullet ; 2. salt, consul, sun, boxer.
dolphin, spleen; 2. spleen, comb, woodcock.
tribe, needle, portico ; 3. house, Ides, hand.

122

LATIN GRAMMAR,

[156-

NOTES ON THE DECLENSIONS.

156.

First Declension.

(a) Several Greek Proper Names in -as and -es, all

Masculine
as, Aeneas, Aeneas, Atrides, son
of Atreus, and some

Nouns

Feminine

-e, as,

Circe, Circe, crambe, cabbage, belone to this

clension.

N.

Aeneas,

AtrTdes,

V.

Aenea,

Acc.
G.

Aenean

Atride [a or a, rare],
Atriden [or -am],
Atridae,
Atridae,
Atride [or -a].

[or -am],

Aeneae,
Aeneae,
Aenea.

p
Ab.

De-

Circe,
Circe,
Circen,

Circes [or -ael,

Circae,
Circe.

Notes, The termination -ides or -ades means

'son of.' Nouns
ending thus, as Atrides, are called Patronymics'^ {le,
father-named)
The above Greek Nouns are declined in the Plural like mensa,'
but, with the exception of the Patronymics
[which have -urn in
Gen. PI.], are rarely found in this Number.
'

The

old Latin Genitive Singular of this Declension

ended
paterfamilias, father of a family.
Another ending, used chiefly by poets, is -ai, as, aulai
for aulae.
(^b)

in -as.

Hence

(f) -urn for -arum appears as Genitive

Plural (i) of Patronymics, (2) of drachma and amphora,
(3) in poetry of certain
people, as, Lapithilm, Teleboilm,
(4) of compounds of colo and
gigno, as, coehcolum, terrigenum.
Duum for duarum is frequent.
liberta^, make -abus for -is in Dative and
Ablative Plural, to distinguish them from the
Datives and Ablatives
ot deus, films, libertus.

157.

{a) Several Greek

Second Declension.

Nouns

in

-os and -on belong to this

clension.

N. V.
Acc.

Delon

S^"aV
u.
Ab.

Delo.

Delos,

Androgeos,
[or

-um],

S^^''

Androgeon

[o or ona],

Androgei [or
Androgeo.

-o],

De-

Pelion,
Pelion,
Pclii,

Pelio.

\ Feminine Patronymics end in -is or -ias, as Theseis, daughter of Theseus,

Pleias,
^

daughter of Pleione.

Goddess, daughter yfreedwoman.

APPENDIX.

-158.]

123

a man, makes Acc. vir-iim, Gen.

Deus, God, is thus declined

{b) Vir,
out.

vir-i,

and so through-

N. V.
Sing.

Plur.

Gen.

D. Abl.

Deus,

Deum,

Dei,

Deo,

Di

Deos,

Deum

Acc.

\or dii],

[or

deorum],

Dis [or

diis].

-um

for -orum appears as Genitive Phiral (i) of trades,

coins, weights, measures, and distributive numerals, as fabrum,
talentum, denum^; (2) in poetry, of names of people, as Rutulum; (3) of deus, vir, and liberi^, as deum, virum, liberum, and
some others, chiefly in poetry. Duum for duorum is frequent.
(r)

pf

{a)

The

158.

Third Declension.

stems of the Nouns of

this

Declension are very va-

and can only be completely learnt by practice.

lowing are examples of the principal varieties:

rious,

The

-A.

poema,

poem

-C.

lac,

milk,

-E.

rete,

net.

ret-is.

-I..

animal,

animal.

animal-is.

sal,

salt,

sal-is.

mel,

honey.

mell-is.

exul,

exile.

exul-is.

-N.

carmen,

song.

carmin-is.

-0.

iatro,

robber,

oratio,

speech.

Macedo,
homo.

Macedonian,

man.

>)

hirundo,
Carthago,

s^walloau,

?)

Carthage,

>)

caro,

-AR.

-ER.

calcar,

Gen. poemat-is.
lact-is.

latron-is.

?;

spur,

Caesar,

Caesar^
corn.

career,^

prison,

pater,
iter.

father.
journey,

ver.

spring.

>>

homin-is.
hirundin-is.
Carthagin-is.
carn-is.
calcar-is.

Caesar-is.
farr-is.

carcer-is.

patr-is.
itTner-is.

vOr-is.

talentum, talent, deni, ten apiece.

From

God, man, children.

faber," smith,

oration-is.

Macedon-is.

flesh,

far.

fol-

LATIN GRAMMAR.

124
-OR.

-UR.

labor,

labour,

arbor,

tree.

[ iS^.'

Gen.

labor-is.

arbor-is.
cord-is.

cor,

heart.

fnlp-iir

licrhtnino'.

robur.

strength.

robor-is.

fur.

thief.

.,

fOr-is.

cTvitas,

state.

,,

fulgur-is.

civitat-is.

anat-is.

-JIjO.

as.

as

mas.

ynale.

mar-is.

vas.

surety.

vad-is.

vas,>

uase.

nubes.
merces,

cloud.

pes.

,,

vas-is.

nub-is.

pay,

merced-is.

JOOt,
hos tage

ped-is.

CGres,

Ceres,

,,

Gerer-is,

aes.

copper.

,,

aer-is.

seges.
quies,
miles,

cornfield,

,,

seget-is.

,,

quiet-is.

soldier,

milit-is.

avis,

hit- /I
uiru.

av-is.

rest,

tigris.

tiger.

Is^pis,

stone.

sanguis,

bl ood,

sanguin-is.
ciner-is.

,,

cinis.

ash.

2"lis

UUl

semis.

half-an-as.

lis,

lanjusuit.

-OR

-T7R

\di L.U1I1/,

,,

tigr-is, tigrid-is.

lapid-is.

f/lUliJC,

semiss-is.
,

lit-is.

guardian.
sacerdos,

priest.

OS,

mouth.

OS,

bone.

opus.
corpus.

^ork,

,,

oper-is.

body.

,,

corpor-is.

palus.

marsh,

,,

T\cr>nc
pcL.
US,

beast

,,

sacerdot-is.
6r-is.

OSS-is.

r\ilnri_ic
pdlULl-lD.

pecud~is,pecor~is.

tellus.

earth.

virtus.

'virtue.

virtiit-is.

sus.

sowo.

su-is.

telliar-is.

-BS.

urbs.

city.

urb-is.

-MS.
-NS.

hiems.

winter.

hiem-is.

frons.
frons,

leaf,

forehead,

frond-is.

front-is.

APPENDIX.
Gen.

stirps,

stem

princeps,
auceps,

chief.

-B.S.

pars,

part,

-T.

caput.

head,

-AX.

pax,

peace.

fax.

torch.

J)

r>rllpv

thuTTib

>)

nex.

death,

lex,

la<w.
herd,

-PS.

grex.
senex.

-IX.

jj

aucup-is.

birdcatcher.

old

stirp-is.

princTp-is.

part-is.

capTt-is.

pac-is.
fac-is.

poUic-is.
nec-is.
leg-is.

))

man.

>>

greg-is.
sen-is.
salic-is.

salix.

<ivillo<w.

radix.

root,

strix,

screech-o^l.

)>

radic-is.
strig-is.

mv-is.

nix.

sno<iv.

-ox.

vox,
nox,

'voice,

night.

noct-is.

-ux.

nux,

nut,

nuc-is.

lux.

light,

liic-is.

conjux,

^ife,

conjug-is.

arx,

citadel

arc-is.

-RX.

J)

Nouns having -im

(^) List of

v5c-is.

in Accusative,

and

-i

in

Ab-

,tive.
1.

Vis, ravis, pelvis, sitis, tussis,

Sinapis, cucumis, amussis,

Praesepis, cannabis, seciiris,
4. Charybdis, tigris, atque buris,
5. Et Propria Nomina in -IS,
2.
3.

6.
(f)

List of

Vt Syrtis, Tibris, Tamesis^

Nouns having -em or -im

in Accusative,

and -e or

in Ablative.

1.

Restis, puppis, turris, navis,

strigilis, et clavis,

2.

Sementis,

3.

Messis, febris, et aqualis,

4.

-em

'vel

-im

dant, utrum malis

^.

cucumber,
force, hoarseness, basin, thirst, cough; 2. mustard,
charybdis, tiger, plough-tail;
3. enclosure, hemp, axe; 4.
and Proper Names in -is, 6. as Syrtis, Tiber, Thames.
2 Line i. rope, stern, tower, ship; 2. seed-sowing, flesh-scraper, and key;

Line

l.

irpenter's rule;
.

harvest, fever, washing-basin, 4. give

-em

or -im, whichever

you

prefer.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

1^6
(d) List of
lative in -e or

{e)

tristis,

Nouns having regular Accusative

[158-!'

-em but

in

Ab'

-i.

1.

Amnis, anguis,

2.

Givis, ignis,

3.

Neptis, orbis, patruelis,

Postis, unguis, -i si velis

avis, bilis,

imber,

finis,

4.
\
Nouns which were originally Adjectives
and make Acc. -em, Abl. -i, as, Atheniensis

All

in -is follov
[sc.

'homo']

an Athenian; Aprllis [sc. mensis], April; annalis [sc. liber], chronicle.

September, October, November, December [sc. mensis]
follow

'

Names,

acer.'
Nouns of this class when they become Propei
as Juvenalis, Martialis, have only -e in Abl.

(/) Neuters in

-e,

-al,

-ar, as, cubTle, bed, animal, animal

Abl. Sing., -ia in N. V. Acc. PI.
Rete
net, makes Abl. rete, rarely reti: mare,
sea, makes Abl. mare in
Poetry only. Note also the following exceptions,
1. Ablati'ves in -e are far,
2. Baccar, nectar, Wjubar^.

make

calcar, spur,

-i in

{g) Rules for the Genitive Plural.

(a) Nouns not increasing make -ium, except apis,
1. Vates,
proles, juvenis, senex, canis,
2. AccipTter, pater, mater, frater, panis^

(b)
1.

2.

Nouns

make -um,

bee,

and

except,

Monosyllabic Nouns of which the stem ends in two Consonants, as, dens, tooth, dent-. Gen. PI. dent-ium.
I. Glis, mas, mus, lis,
2.
3.

4.
3.

Neuters

4.

Nouns

5.

increasing

Compes, palus *
penates,
Nix, strix, faux, vis,
Servitus*, arid optimates*.

and -ar, as, animal, animal, calcar, spur.

Gen. atis, as civitas, state, and many Nouns
and Participles in -ns, as sapiens, ^ise, have both -ium
and -um in Gen. PI.
in -al

in -as.

I.

2.

Sans Plural Genitives

Cor, cos, and rus, sal,

we
sol,

class

and vas^

Line i. river, snake, bird, bile; 2. citizen,

fire, showery end; 3. granddaughter, circle, cousin ;
4. door-post, nail, -i if you like.
Line I. Spelt (a kind of grain)
2.
baccar
(a
plant), riectar, sun-beam.
^
Lnie I. Prophet, offspring, young man, old ftian,
dog ; 2. hawk, father,
mother, brother, bread.
[Mensis. a 7nonth, makes mensuni, rarely -ium.]
Line 1. dorfnouse, male, f?iouse, laivsuit
2. fetter, marsh, household
;
gods; 3. suoio, screech-owl, throat, force
Those
4. slavery, aristocrats.
marked ^- have both -ium and -um.
^ Lme 2. Heart, whetstone,
country, salt, sun, surety.
Sans means
^

without.

APPENDIX.

-l6l.]
(^) Greek Nouns of
make Acc. -em or -a,

Acc. aerem
Greek Nouns in

aer,

this
as,

127

Declension in -as, -er, -is, and -os,

heros, hero, Acc. heroem or heroa;

The

or aera.

Acc.

PI. usually

ends

in -a,s.

and -ys make -i and -y in Voc. Poesis,

poesy, has Acc. poesim or -in, Voc. poesi.
Greek Nouns in -es have the regular Latin form, and also, in
certain cases, duphcate forms derived from the Greek, e. g. Acc.
-en, -ea, or -etS<, Gen. -i, -ei, or -etis.

Orpheus

is

thus declined

Nom. Orpheus,

Acc.

Orpheu,

Voc.

-is

Orpheum

Gen. Orphei or

D.

Orpheo,
Ab. Orpheo.

or -ea,
-eos,

(y) The Acc. PI. of Nouns not increasing

stead of -es, as, nubis for nubes.
159.

spit

160.

PI. are dissyllables in

partus, birth;

portus,

Several have both forms.

artus, PI. limbs.

often spelt -is in-

Fourth. Declension.

Nouns which take -iibus in Dat. Abl.

-cus, as, arcus, bo^ ; also, tribus, tribe;
harbour ; veru,

is

-ei, -ei,

Fifth Declension.

The

-e of the Genitive ^ei is said to be long when preceded by a vowel, as faciei rei and fidli are perhaps doubtful,
but the form is altogether rare.
(/a)

Only *dies* and ^res* in this Declension have the Plural

(J?)
complete: the others either have N. V. Acc. Gases only, or no
Plural at

all.

161.

Adjectives.

In the Ab{a) Present Participles are declined like ingens.'

when
lative Absolute construction they make -e in Abl. Sing.
used as epithets, -i. But in Poetry this distinction hardly exists.
*

(Ji)

Many Adjectives belonging to the same class as *ingens' and

have no Nom. Voc. Acc. Neuters Plural, and are scarcely
used in the Nom. Voc. Acc. Neuter Singular. They make

'felix'

3ver

not -i, in Abl. Sing., and -um instead of

Such are dives, rich, and the following

-e,

il

-ium

in

Gen. Plural.

1.

Pauper, puber, hospes, compos,

Superstes, senex, sospes, impos,

Ales, deses, and reses,
4. Compounds add o/* corpus, pes,
5. As bicorpor, quadrupes^
2.
3.

'

Line

i.

poor,

grown

up, friendly, master of; 2. surviving, old, safe, not

5. double-bodied, four-footed.

naster of; 3. winged, inactive, inactive;

LATIN GRAMMAR.

128

The

following are like the above, but have

1.

Degener, inops, memor,

2.

Vigil, uber,

[i6x-i in

Ablative Sing.

immemor^.

Note. Celer, swift, hebes, blmit, and teres, s??ioothly-rounded, are not found
Celeres, the body-guard of the Roman kings, has Gen.
in the Gen. Plural.
Vetus, old, has Neut. Plural Vetera.
Plural Celerum.

(c) Plus, more,

is

defective in the Singular.

SINGULAR.
N. V. A.
Gen.
Dat.
Ab.

PLURAL.

N.

M. F.

N.

plus.

plures.

plura.

M. F.

plurium.

pluris.

pluribus.
(plure)

pluribus.

pluris hoc,
Pluris is only found as an expression of value
inquam, mihi eris, you (will be the more njalued by me, I replied,
Complures, se^veral, has Neut. complura, rarely compluria.
:

(^) Satur,yw// (of food), makes satur, satura, saturum,

endings throughout being like those of tener.

etc.,

the

(^e) The Adjectives (ceterus), cetera, ceterum, the rest, and

(ludTcer or ludicrus), ludicra, ludicrum, sporti've, have their Declension complete, with the exception of the Singular Nominative
Masculine, which is not found in any writer.

162.

Comparison of Adjectives.

The

following instances of irregular Comparison, in addition to those given in 27, are to be noticed.
N.B. Square
brackets, as [egentior], denote that the degree of Comparison is
borrowed from some word of equivalent meaning round brackets,
as (piissimus), denote that the word is rare in Classical Latin.
{a)

maturus,

maturior,

ripe,

egenus, needy,
providus, prouident,
'

maturissimus.

maturrimus.

[egentior],
[providentior],

[egentissimus].
[providentissimus].

dives, rich,

divitior,

divitissimus.

(dis), rich,

ditior,

vetus, old,
(potis, able).,
[a)/cu,

s^i/t^,

frugi, 'virtuous.

Line

I.

ditissimus.

[vetustior]

\ (veterior)

\
'

potior, preferable,
ocior,
frugalior.

Degenerate, needy, mindful

veterrimus.

2.

potissimus.
ocissimus.
frugalissimus.

wakefid, fruitful, unmindfid.

APPENDIX,

rustic us, rustic J

129

rusticior,

fa}sus,fa/sey

falsissimus.

novus, ne^,

novissimus.

mcMtus, famous,

inclitissimus.

There are

several exceptions to the rule given in 26 (c)

respecting Adjectives in -us preceded by a vowel. The chief
areassiduus, constant,
assiduior,
assiduissimus.
egregius, eminent,
(b)

I"

pius, dutiful,

magis

strenuus,

strenuior,

pius,

<
L

acti've.

maxime

pius.

(piissimus).

(pientissimus).
strenuissimus.

Many Adjectives have no Comparative or Superlative. It

impossible to give comprehensive rules for these, but the
following classification will assist the learner.
(1) Adjectives derived from Substantives, and signifying
made of, endowed with, and of or belonging to, as, ligneus,
wooden, aurltus, long-eared, Gallicus, Gallic, See 169, b,
(2) Most Adjectives compounded of Verbs or Substantives,
as, armiger, armour-bearing, degener, degenerate, inops,
(r)

is

poor.

Note.

The

exceptions are Adjectives ending in -dicus,

-ficus, -volus,

26,

and compounds of ars, mens, and cor, as iners, inactive, demens, mad,
vecors foolish, which are compared regularly, as, inertior, dementior, etc.
(4),

(3)

I.

Ferus, mirus, gnarus, gnavus,

2.

Kud'is, tvux, non habent

gradus

^,

(d) Comparison of Adverbs.

bene, well,
male, badly,

melius,
pejus,

magnopere, greatly,
parum, too little,
multum, much,

magis,

diu,

for a long time,

intus, within,

nuper,

saepe, often,
satis, enough,
secus, otherwise,
*

Line

i.

maxime.
minime.
plurimum.

less,

plus,

diutissime.
intime.

diiitius,

interius,

nuperrime.

lately,

[prae, before\,
prope, near,

iO

minus,

optTme.
pessime.

prius,

primum.

propius,
saepius,

proxime.

setius,

Fierce, wonderfid, linowing, active;

degrees (of comparison).

saepissime.

satius,

2.

unpolishedy savage, have

LATIN GRAMMAR.

{a)

163.

The

[ 163.

Anomalous and other Substantives.

following are a few Declensions to be noticed

Jovem, Gen. Jovis, etc.

Acc. bovem, has Gen. PI. bourn, Dat. Abl. b5bus

Jupiter, Jupiter, has Acc.

N. V.
N. V.

Bos, ox,
or bubus.

Paterfamilias, /^//^^T of a family, Acc. patremfamilias. Gen.,

Here familias is an old form of the
patrisfamilias, etc.
Gen., but there is also a form paterfamiliae, Acc. patrem
In the PI. we find patres familias, patres
familiae, etc.

N. V.

familiae,

and patres familiarum. So mater

familias, filius

familias, etc.

Jusjurandum, oath, Gen. jurisjurandi, Dat. jurijurando, etc. No Plural.

Respublica, state, Acc. rempublicam. Gen. reipublicae.
Supellex, furniture, Acc. supellectTlem, Gen. supellectilis,
Abl. supellectili or -e.

N. V. Acc.
N. V.
N. V.

Nouns are Nouns of varied declension. They

two kinds
(1) Those having one form of the Nom. but more than one
Thus, many names of trees in
of the Oblique Cases.

(^) Heteroclite

are of

-us, as, cupressus, cypress, ficus, fig-tree, laurus, bay,

pinus, pine, are declined like both 2nd and 4th Declensions.
{Note. Quercus, oak, is 4th Declension only,

except Gen. PI. quercorum.) Notice also,

femur,
thigh, Gen. femoris and feminis.
jecur,
jecoris, and jecinoris.
Uuer,

jugerum, aci^e,
jugeri,butPl.Gen.jugerum(3rdDecl.),
D. Abl. jugeribus (rarely jugeris).
requietis, but Acc. requietem and rerequies,
rest,

quiem, Abl. requiete and requie

(3rd and 5th Declensions),
vasis, but PI. vasa, vasorum, vasis (2nd
vas,
'vessel

Deck).

Many

Note,

Nouns,

other instances will be found under the head of Heterogeneous

163, c.

(2)

Those having two or more forms of Declension,

as,

and elephas, G. -antis, 3, an elephant.

Many Nouns of the 2nd Declension have forms in -us,
and -um, as, jugulus and jugulum, throat. Many names
of qualities follow both the ist and 5th Declensions, as,
luxuria and luxuries, luxury.
Notice also,
elephantus, G.

p^nus.
p^nus,

penum,

-i, 2,

Gen. penoris,

penus,
peni,

2,

4,

3,

V
J

pro'visions,

APPENDIX,
Gen.

plebis, 3,

plebes,

plebis, 3,
plebei, 5,

praesepe,
praesepes,
praesepium,

praesepis,
praesepis,
praesepii,

tapes,

tapetis, 3,
tapeti, 2,

plebs,

plebes,

tapete,

tapetum,

tapetis,

the

3,

manger.

3,
2,

3,

Gen. vesperae,

vespera,
vesper,
vesper,

common people.

carpet.

i,

Acc. vesperum,

2,

Abl. vespere, or

-i, 3,

evening.

{c) Heterogeneous Nouns are such as have different Gender

(accompanied almost always by different form also) in PI. from
Sing., as,^

carbasus,

caelum,
frenum,

f.,

m.

hea'ven,

caeli,

n.,

bit.

freni, m.,

a jest,

joci, m., and]0C2i, n.

place,

and loca, n.
and ostrea, n.
Pergama, n.
rastri, m., and rastra, n.
sibili, m., and sibila, n.

jocus, m.,
locus, m.,
ostrea,

PI. carbasa, n., sails.

can'vas,

n.,

Pergamus, m.,
rastrum, n.,
sibilus, m.,
Tartarus, m.,

The

m.,
ostreae,

n.

loci,

oyster.

f.,

and frena,

Pergamus,
harrow,
hissing.

Tartarus,

Tartara,

f.,

n.

no Sing, except
Dalneum, a private bath, pi. balnea; and, on the other hand,
^pulae, a private banquet, has no Sing, except epulum, a public
Note,

PI. balneae,

a public

bath, has

mtertainment,

(d) The following Nouns (commonly called Indeclinable

^ouns), have no flexions ( 12); fas, right, nefas, avrong; names
)f letters of the alphabet, as, alpha, beta; together with the Adectives frugi, 'virtuous, and nequam, avorthless, and the Numerals
rom quattuor, /our, to centum, a hundred,
(/) Some
lingular, as,

Nouns

are

found only

in

one Oblique Case

in

the

verbere, Abl., full pi., from (verber), nvhip.

So ambage, from (ambages), roundabout qvay, compedc, from
compes), fetter, fauce, from (faux), throat, obTce, from (obex),
dt, have full plural but are only found in Ablative in the
lingular.

Note.
1

Round

brackets, as

(verber), denote

classical Latin.

that the

word

is

not found

LATIN GRAMMAR,
Sponte, by impulse noctu, by night, jussu, by order, injussu, cjoithfound in Abl. Sing., and have
,

out orders, natu, by birth, are only

no

plural.

(/) Some Nouns have only two

cases in the Singular, as

no plural,
impetis, impete, no pL, from (impes), uiolence,
sordem, sorde, full pL, from {soy des), Jilt h.
veprem, vepre, full pi., from (vepres), bramble.
fors, chance, Abl. forte,

{g) Some have only three cases in the Singular, as

fidem, fidis, fide, full pi., from (fides), lyre,
lues {Nom.), luem, lue, no pi., a pestilence.
opem, opis, ope, full pi., in the sense of riches, power, from
(ops), help.

precem, preci, prece, full pi., from (prex), a prayer.

vTcem, vicis, vice, pi. vices, vicibus, no Gen., from

(vicis),

change.
vis
(h))

{Nom.^, vim,

Some have

vi, 'violence.

PL vTres,

virium, viribus, strength,

only four cases in the Singular, as

from (daps), a feast.

from (dicio), dominion,
frug-em, -is, -i, -e, full pi., from (ixwyC), fruit,
internecion-em, -is, -i, -e, full pi., from (internecio), destruction*

dapem,

dapis, dapi, dape, full pi.,

dicion-em,

(y)

-is, -i, -e, full

Nouns used only

pL,

in the Singular.

Names

of Qualities, as sapientia, wisdom, senectus, old age, and

of Materials, as ferrum, iron, aes, bronze, lignum, wood, are, from
their meaning, only used in the Singular.
Names of materials
are, however, sometimes found in the Plural signifying objects
made of the material, as aera, works in bron%e, ligna, logs ; and
names of qualities are sometimes used in the Plural to denote
instances of the quality, as omnes avaritiae, all forms of a'varice.
Proper Names are, of course. Singular, but may be used in the
Plural to denote a class of names, just as in English.
Pelagus, the sea, vulgus, the common people, virus, poison, supellex,
Many other Nouns have been already
furniture, have no Plural.
noticed as occurring only in the Singular.
Qi) Nouns used only in the Plural.
There are very many nouns of this class

in Latin.
See Madvig,
Lat. Gr. 51.
The following are a few
inter alia
1. Artus, ilia, majdres,
3. Towns, as Veii
2, Casses, manes, and primores,
4. Festi'vals, as Saturnalia \
:

4.

Line

I. Littibs,

Saturnalia.

fafiks, ancestors;

2.

fiet,

ghost, chief

men;

3. Veii;

-1 64.]

APPENDIX.

(/) List of

Nouns which vary

their

meaning

in the Plural:

P.

Aedes, a temple,
Aedes, a house,

Impedimentuni, hindrance.
Impedimenta, baggage.

S.

S.

Auxilium,

P.

Auxilia, auxiliary forces.

Littera, letter of the alphabet.

Litterae, epistle^ literature.

S.

Career, prison.
Garceres, starting place,

Ludi, public games.

P.

help.

Ludus. play.

S.

Gastrum,ybr^.

Lustrum, space off've years.

P.

Castra, camp.

Lustra, dens^

S.

Co^m, plenty.

lairs.

P.

Copiae,ybrrd'j.

Opera, labour.
Operae, ^ork-people.

S.

Finis, end.

Opem

P.

Fines, boundaries.

OpeSy po^werj wealth,

S.

GrdXm, Ja'vour, popularity.

Sal, salt.

P.

Gratiae, thanks or the Graces,

Sales, avit.

[Acc.], help.

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.

164. Numerals are of various kinds.

() Cardinal,

as,

The

unus, one, duo, two, etc.

first

three Car-

been already declined (see 23). From quattuor,

to centum, a hundred, they are indeclinable.

dinals have
four,

(J))

Ordinal,

as,

pxxmws, first, secundus, second,

(f) Distributive, as, singuli, one apiece, bini,

(d) Multiplicati've,

as,

two

apiece.

simplex, simple, duplex, twofold, triplex,

threefold,

(e) Ad'verbial

Numerals,

as,

semel, once,

bis, twice,

(/) There are also Proportional Numerals^ ending in -plus, and

meaning how many times as great,' as, duplus, twice as great,
*

great ; and a class of Adverbs formed Ironi

the Ordinals and ending in -o or -um, as, primo or \)X\\\\\\\\\^ for

triplus, three times as

the first time,

(g)

The principal Numerals are

given

in

the following Table

LATIN GRAMMAR.

134

3.^

-M

'

(U

flj

ri,S:>

5-

.S^

s -

5-1

[ 164.

O ^

l'^

5"\

rj

^ '5 ^ 5^ 5- -a 1^
1 ij g. ^ s I
<U

o g

2
p

c/2

13
CD

W C

r-

.a +j

iZi

,0

^^
?3

CO

2S ^
^ c5
J- JO)

CX,

5g 5^

CD
CT*

Cr

t/)

S g

rr-K

'

^^
'"^

cq

_J ^d T"!

C o
c/3

-a

ili

cu

p p

in^

-rJ

if)

'k^

> >

rv^^

1^

i5

^ S

i
2 p
S3
!

o S

)0
5P

t :3.p

S o

)p

)o

joi

2^
^

g >

I-

P c o

APPENDIX.

i64.]

Cr CT

c/3

c/)

cAi

<u

C O O

-^3

CO

,^

3:^

c/)

c/3

O C

CD

CD

5::^

c/5

^3
rl

bX3

CD
,

CD

^ o a

TO

.,1

is

a o S
O C O U

CT*

6 S

CD

^ ^

t:

CD

-r^

S
^3 'So

a>

QJ

as

c2

c/3

.5

4-

CT

CA)

(/)

O (D
O C O

CD
CD

5^
4-

CT"

^3?

.S bClcd

led

12

S!

E2

'i'

CD .S3

<D

a a ^
^ CD

'^n

.boicd

.a 'g -^'2

c c

cr'

o
o

On^

u
u

0000000
OOOOOOOOmOOO
0000000
ro-^iOvot^OO
O O O O O
M M
a\

<N

ro

U-)

vo

cx)

C7N

O^

n
o
U
U

o
o
n
n
u
u
u
u

LATIN GRAMMAR.

136

{a)

165.

[ 165-

Notes on the Numerals.

Cardinal Numerals.

(1) Mille is an indeclinable Adjective meaning one thousand, as,

mille equites, 1000 horsemen: millia is a Neuter Plural Substantive of the Third Declension, meaning thousands, and takes
a dependent Genitive, as, tria millia equitum, 3000 horsemen.
Such phrases as tria millia quadringenti quadraginta sex milites
interfecti sunt, 3446 soldiers qjoere killed, are for tria millia militum

quadraginta sex milites.

(2) bis mille, ter mille, etc., are found instead of duo,

et quadringenti

tria, etc.,

poetry; also with anni, as, bis mille anni, 2000

years^ rather than duo millia annorum.
(3) When the smaller number is put first et is generally used,
four and twenty
when the
as, quattuor et viginti, like our
greater is put first et is omitted, as, viginti quattuor.
(4) Cardinals used partittTely take a Genitive, 300 of the ships
w^ere lost,' trecentae navium amissae sunt.
(5) In translating twenty-one, thirty-one, etc., unus must be
kept in the Singular.
sent twenty-one soldiers,' milites
millia, chiefly in

'

viginti

unum,

or,

milit^w et viginti
(^)

unum

We

et viginti

milites,

misimus

unum

[i.e.

milit^-j].

Ordinal Numerals.

(1) For 'the

first

and second

legions,' say, prirn^ et

secund^

[not prim^^d- et secund^d'] legiones.

(2) For 'thirteenth,' 'fourteenth,' etc., say, tertius decimus,

quartus decimus, not decimus tertius, etc., except when following
higher numbers, as, ducentesimus decimus tertius, the 211th,
(3) For forty-fifth,' ' seventy-eighth,' etc., say, fortieth fifth,
seventieth eighth, quadragesimus quintus, etc., not quadraginta
quintus.
The Cardinals are not joined with Ordinals in Latin,
as they are in English, except that unus is sometimes used for
primus, as, unus et vicesimus, the 21st.
(4) The date of a year is expressed in Ordinals For in the
year 2875 B.C.,' say, 'in the year before Christ born twicethousandth, eight-hundredth, seventieth, fifth,' anno ante Christum
natum bis millesimo octingentesimo septuagesimo quinto.
(5) Fractions are expressed by 'pars' with Ordinals, as, sep'

'

tima pars, one-se'venth, duae scptimae partes, tn.vo-se^enths, etc.

Pars is often omitted, only tertia, quarta, etc., being used. Onehalf is pars dimidia.
When the denominator exceeds the numerator by I only, it is often omitted, as, duae partes, t^vo-ihirds^
quattuor ^TivteSj four -Jifths, etc. For fractions of the as see 173.

APPENDIX,

-16;.]
(c)

Distributive Numerals.

(1) Distributives shew that the number spoken of appHes to

each individual of a class. They are often indicated in English
by the words each^ euery, or apiece, * He gave each [or, every one]
of them five books,' or, ' he gave them five books apiece,^ quinos
Quinque libros iis dedit would mean he gave
libros iis dedit.
them five books in all,^ i.e. five books among the whole number.
(2) Use Distributives for Cardinals (i) with Substantives that
have no Singular, (2) with Substantives that have a different
meaning in the Plural from the Singular, as una littera, one letter
(of the alphabet), but binae litterae, t^juo epistles. Unus, however,
one camp,' una castra, not singula castra.
is an exception
*

'

TABLE OF RELATIVE, INTERROGATIVE,

AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

166.

The Simple Forms.

The

Relative Pronoun,

Qui, quae, quod,

The

Interrogative Pronoun,

The

Indefinite Pronoun,

| Q^f quae

qjuho

or ^uhicb.
'

''quod ^ }

^1

{ gif^^ae:
}
These duplicate forms of the Interrogative and IndeThe first is the Substanfinite should be carefully remembered.
ti'val Form, as, Quis hoc fecit? IVho did this? Si quis hoc faciat,
If any one should do this ; the second is the Adjectiual, used when
some Substantive is introduced agreeing with the Pronoun, as.
Qui puer hoc fecit? IVhat boy did this? Si qui puer hoc faciat. If
The same distinction is preserved in
any boy should do this \
many of the following Compounds.
Note,

Quidam, a

certain per-

The Compounds.

167.

Quidam, quaedam, quiddani,

Quivis,

Quivis, quaevis, quidvis, Subst.

quodvis, Adj.

*^
I

any

Quilibet,

yon

J
*

These

by beginners.

si qtiis

(
]

arc by no means rigidly observed among Latin

Dens, en ego, dicat,' Hor., but they should be noticed

distinctions
'

Quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet, Subst.

quodlibet. Adj.

please.
|

writers, e.g.

Subst.

quoddani, Adj.

son.


LATIN GRAMMAR.

138
Quicunque,

whoso-

Quisquis,

ever.

is

neut. quidquid or quicquid.

Quisquis,

neut. quidquid or quicquid.

Quoquo, quaqua, quoquo.

generally used as a Substantive, quicunque as an Adjective.

Quisque, quaeque, quicque or quidque, Subst. )

quodque, Adj.
\
)St.
Unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquicque or -dque, Subst,

Quisque, each.

Unusquisque, each

167-

Quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque.

The forms in use of quisquis are

Sing. N.
Acc.
Abl.
Note. Quisquis

otie.

unumquodque, Adj.
Aliquis, some.

Aliquis, aliqua, aliquid,

Subst.
j

Aliqui, aliquae, aliquod, Adj.

Quispiam, any one.

Quisquam,

a?iy

one at

^
Quisquam,

quidquam or quicquam.

{^11

Note.

Quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam or quippiam, Subst.

quodpiam. Adj.

Quisquam

is

generally a Substantive

the Adjective

is

uUus, -a, -um,

at all.

Ecquis, ecqua,

ecquae or

bcqui,

^
-a,

ecquid,

ecquod,

Interro2;ative-Indefinite

Pronoun,

The

Interrogative part is translated by throwing the sentence in which the

Pronoun occurs into the form of a question, and the Indefinite part by supplying the word any, as Ecqua puero cura est ?
Has the boy any care ?

TERMINATIONS OF DERIVED NOUNS.

Derived Substantives are formed, {a) from Verbs,
from other Substantives, (r) from Adjectives.
(a) Substantives derived from Verbs.
(1) -tor and -sor express the perso?i qjuho does the action denoted by the Verb, as, amator, a lever, from amo suasor,
an adnjiser, from suadeo. A feminine form in -trix is
sometimes found, as, victrix.

168.
{b)

Note.

Some

Substantives in -tor are derived immediately

from other Substantives, as viator, a traueller, from via.

(2) -tio, -tus, -sic, and -sus, express the action of the Verb,
as, motio and motus, a monjing, from moveo
visus and visio,
a seeing, from video.
(3) -ium, -or, and -us express the effect of the action denoted by the Verb as, gaudium,yo>', from gaudeo; amor,
lo've^ from amo
usus, use^ from utor.
;

APPENDIX.

-i69.]

-mentum and -men express means of attaining that

which the Verb denotes, as, documentum, means of teaching, from doceo
tutamen, means of defence, from tutor.
(5) -ulum, -bulum, -culum, denote instrument, as, jac-ulum,
instrument for throwing, from jacio.
(4)

Substantives derived from other Substantives.

(1) -lus, -la, -lum [the termination varies according to the
gender of the Primitive Substantive], express diminutives.
These terminations assume various forms, e. g. -ulus,
-cuius, -ellus, -illus; as, cornic-ula, a little croqv, from
cornix corni-culum, a little horn, from cornu libellus, a

(b)

little

Note,

from liber lapillus, a little stone, from lapis.

is sometimes a diminutive ending, as, equuleus,
from equus.

book,

-leus

colt,

(2) -ium denotes either an office, as, sacerdotium, />r/>j/^oo^/,

the office of the sacerdos or an assemblage of indi'viduals,
as, collegium, a college, or assembly of collegae.
(3) -etum denotes 2. place qju here plants gro^, as quercetum,
a gro've of oaks, from quercus salictum {for salicetum), a
;

<willo^-bed,

(4)

from

salix.

-arium denotes

a receptacle, as, armarium, a cupboard,

from arma.
(5) -ile denotes a place ^here animals are kept,
sheepfold,

from

as, ovile,

ovis.

(6) -ia denotes a country, and is usually derived from the

name of its people, as, Italia, the country of the Itali,
(7) Patronymics end in -Mes, if derived from Nouns of
ist Decl., or of 2nd Decl. in -ius, as Aeneades, son of
Aeneas; Thestiades, son of Thestius ; in -ides if from
Nouns of 2nd Decl. in -us, as Priam ides, son of Priam ;
in -ides, if from Nouns in -eus, as Atrides, son of Atreus.
The feminines end in -is, as. Nereis, daughter of Nereus

or -as,

as,

Thestias, daughter of Thestius.

Substantives derived from Adjectives.

all denote the quality which the Adjective expresses
attributively.
The chief terminations are
(1) -itas or -tas, as, bonitas, goodness, the quality of the
(c)

These

bonus.
(2) -ia, as, audacia, boldness, the quality of the audax.
the justus.
(3) -itia, as, justitia,ywj//V<?, the quality of
quality of the fortis.
(4) -tudo, as, fortitudo, bra'very, the
(a) from Verbs,
169. Derived Adjectives are formed,
Substantives, (c) from Adverbs and Prepositions.

(b)

from

LATIN GRAMMAR,

140

Adjectives formed from Verbs.

usually have the force of Participles.
are the principal terminations
(a)

These

The

following

These = Present Active Partiwith intensive meaning, as, lacrymabundus, ^weeping

iracundus, full of q.vrath^ from
profusely^ from lacrymor

(1)

-bundus and -cundus.

ciples,

irascor.

(2) -ax denotes

actinje inclination^ as, pugnaXj/oTz^^'

offightings

from pugno.
(3) -idus, chiefly from Intransitive Verbs, denotes actitnty^
as, fervidus, globing, from ferveo.
(4) -ilis and -bilis denote capacity^ and are generally used
Passively, as, docilis, teachable, from doceo; mobilis (for
But some are used
movibilis), mo'vable, from moveo.
Actively, as, terribilis, terrible (i. e. capable of terrifying)

from terreo.
(5) -tivus denotes a state resulting

from

verbal action, as,

been taken),

captTvus, captive (i.e. in a state of having

from capio.

(6) -tilis and -silis have the force of Perfect Passive Participles, as, sectilis, cut, from seco
pensilis, hung up, from
;

pendo.
{b)

Adjectives formed from Substantives.

\

These

express, (a) made of (b) full of (c) endowed with, (d) of

or belonging to.
The last class is by far the most numerous.
(1) The chief terminations expressing made of a.re:
1. -eus, as, ligneus, wooden, from lignum.
2.

-nus,

as,

quernus,

oa/ien,

from quercus.

Note.
These terminations may, however, express of or belonging to, when the Noun from which they are derived is
not a Noun of Matter, as, virgineus, maternus.
(2) The chief terminations expressing /w// o/*are
:

-osus, as, nivosus, full of snow, I'rom nix, nivis.

2. -lentus, as, vinolentus,//^// of wine, from vinum.
(3) Adjectives signifying endowed with end in -tus, and have
the nature of Perfect Passive Participles, as, ?iurhtus, gilded,
1.

from aurum; ciuvitus,

nosed, from nasus.
(4)

The

long-eared,

from

auris; nasutus, long-

terminations expressing of or belonging to are very

The following are the most common

numerous.
1.

2.
3.

-ius, as, regius, royal, from rex.

-icus, as, Galiicus, Gallic, from Gallus.
-lis (or -ris), preceded by a vowel, as, mortalis,
mortal, from mors popularis, popular, from populus
;

APPENDIX,

fidelis,

faithful,

from

fides;

hostilis,

hostile,

from

hostis.

Note.

4.

The

termination -ris is the same as -lis in

meaning, and seems to be used in order to avoid
a
repetition of the letter 1, as, Solaris for sohilis.
-nus preceded by a vowel, as, montaniis, ynountainous,
from mons; terrenus, of earth, from terra; caninus,

canine,
5.

lestis,

6.

(r)

tions,

from

canis.

-ter or -tis,

as,

heauenly,

pedester, pedestrian, from pes; cae-

from caelum.

-as and -ensis are usually confined to Adjectives

derived from names of Places, as Aquinas, of Aqiiinum
;
Atheniensis, Athenian,

few Adjectives are derived from Adverbs and Preposidiuturnus, lasting, from diu
posterus, next, from

as,

post.

The

terminations of derived Verbs are given above,

75.

THE ROMAN CALENDAR.

170.

number

The Roman Calendar

agreed with our own in the

but their manner of

of months, and of the days in each

dating was very different.

Each month had three distinctive days, namely
The Kalends [Kalendae, Gen. -arum], which fell on the ist.
The Nones [Nonae, Gen. -arum], which fell on the 5th, usually.
The Ides [Idus, Gen. -uum], which fell on the 13th, usually.
But in March, May, July, and October, the Nones fell on the 7th
and the Ides on the 15th.
:

171.

In dating

{a) The ist, 5th, and 13th were denoted by the Ablatives,
Kalendis, Nonis, Idibus, with the name of the month added in
But in
agreement, as Kalendis lanuariis, the ist of January.
March, May, July, and October, Nonis and Idibus stood for 7th
and 1 5th respectively.
(^) The day before the Kalends, Nones, or Ides, was denoted
by the Adverb pridie, the day before, used like a Preposition

governing an Accusative Case, as, pridie Kalendas lanii.u-ias, the

list of December, pridie Idus lanuarias, the 12th of January, pridie
Idus Martias, the i^th of March.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

171-

(c) All other days were denoted by reckoning back from the
next ensuing Kalends, Nones, or Ides. The reckoning included
not only the day reckoned from but the day reckoned to ; thus
the 30th of December was called the third not the second day
before the Kalends of January. The form for expressing the
date thus found is as follows
Ante diem tertium Kalendas Januarias, the loth of December,
Ante diem octavum Idus Januarias, the 6th of January.
Ante diem quartum Nonas Martias, the \th of March.
Ante diem duodevicesimum Kalendas Maias, the 14th of April.
172. A short form for expressing the above dates is as
:

follows

Kal. Jan., the loth of December,

VIII. Id. Jan., the 6th of January.
a. d. IV. Non. Mart., the ^th of March.
a. d. XVIII. Kal. Mai., the i^th of April.
Note I. An easy method of finding the Roman date corresponding to an English is by adding i to the Nones or Ides, or 2
to the days of the month, and then subtracting the English date
from the result. Thus, to find the Roman date for the 6th of
= 14, and 14-6 = 8. Hence our 6th of January
January
1 3 + 1
So, the 4th of March is
is the Roman 8th day before the Ides.
7 + 1-4 = 4; the 1 4th of April is 30 + 2- 14=18, etc.
Note 2. In leap-year the 24th of February [ante diem sextum
Kalendas Martias, or a. d. VI. Kal. Mart.] was reckoned for two
Hence this day was called dies bissextus, and
consecutive days.
In such years the additional
leap-year itself annus bissextus.
day was not reckoned in calculating the date from the 14th
Thus a.d. X. Kal. Mart, stood for
to the 24th of February.
the 20th of February, whether the year was leap year or not.
Note 3. The phrase for expressing a date was considered as
a single word admitting of government by the Prepositions in
and ex, as, Supplicationes edictae sunt in antediem quartum et
tertium et pridie Kalendas Novembres, Public t hanksgi'vings avere
decreed for the 2gth, ^oth^ and list of October ; Supplicatio indicta
est ex antediem quintum Idus Octobres,
public thanksgi'ving
nvas decreed^ beginning from the wth of October.
Note 4. The names of the months were Januarius, Februarius,
Martins, Aprilis, Mains, Junius, Julius, Augustus, September,
October, November, December. These are Adjectives, but may
be used as Substantives, mensis being understood. See 158,
Note 5. The months of July and August were called Quintilis
and Sextilis before the time of the Emperor Augustus.
a. d. III.
a. d.

APPENDIX,

-175.]

H3

ROMAN WEIGHTS AND MONEY.

The

as, or pound, also called libra, which served as the

standard unit both for weights and coins, was divided into twelve
173.

parts.

Romani partes sunt uneia, sextans,

Quadrans, atque trieris, quincunx, et semis, et inde
Septunx, bes, dodrans dextanti junge deuneem.

Assis

1
T2 of an as =

Uncia

Sextans

_3_

Quadrans

Triens

12

Quincunx
Semis
Septunx

Bes

T2

Dodrans

1%

Dextans

Deunx

2
3
3

ounce.

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

2 ounces.

=10

=11

i 1

T2
TdTWj used hi bequeathing property,
<whole estate;

an as

12

Heres ex

heres ex deunee, dextante,

asse, heir to the

eleven

etc., heir to

twelfths, five sixths, etc.

174.

Interest.

In the later times of the republic the

reckoned interest by the month, not by the year.

Romans

Hence,

asses

usurae =-1 as per cent, per mensem = 12 per cent, per annum
deunces usurae =1^ of an as per cent, per mensem = 11 per cent,
per annum, and so on.
Instead of asses usurae we sometimes
find the phrase centesimae usurae, or simply centesimae, i. e.
hundredth parts of the principal paid monthly, or 1 2 per cent,
per annum. Binae centesimae = 24 per cent.
Note. For the phrase fenus unciarium see Smith's Dictionary of Antiquities.
175. The Sestertius, or nummus sestertius, was a coin of the
value of 2 asses, being rather more than twopence of our money
before the reign of Augustus, and rather less than that sum afterwards. It is denoted by the symbol HS. (i.e. L(ibra) L(ibra)
S(emis), or perhaps IlS(emis), 2\ pounds).
The sum of 1000 Sestertii was called Sestertium, roughly
This also was denoted
equivalent to about 8 English money.
by the symbol HS.
The expression for a million sestertii was decies centena millia
sestertium (for -orum) for 1,100,000 sestertii, undecies centena
millia sestertium, etc. The words centena millia are often understood hence, decies sestertium, a million; millies HS., a hundred
;

millions^ etc.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

144

175-

In order to distinguish HS. meaning sestertii from HS. meansestertii, a line is sometimes written over the subjoined

ing

Thus,

numeral.

HS.MD. =

i5oo

sestertii,

but

HS.MD.=

i5oo

To indicate centena millia

1,500,000 sestertii.
sestertium a line is sometimes placed over the whole expression,
sestertia,

i.

e.

HS.MD. = millies et quingenties centena millia sestertium

150,000,000 sestertii or 150,000 sestertia.

as

ABBREVIATIONS.

Proper Names.

176.

Aulus.
Gains, Gains.

N.

Numerius.

P.

Publius.

D.
K.

Decimus.

L.

LiTicius.

or Sex. Sextus.
Servius
Ser.
Spiirius.
Sp.

M.

Marcus.
Manius.

A.

C, G.
Gn ,Gn. Gnaeus, Gnaeus.

Quintus.
S.,

Kaeso.

T.

Titus.

Ti.

Tiberius

For women's names these letters are inverted, as O. Gaia.

Note.
All the above are praenomina or individual names.
Besides his
praenomen, a Roman had a nomen which showed his gens, and a cogno-

men

showing to what branch or family of the gens he belonged. Thus,

Marcus Tullius Cicero denotes Marcus of the Cicero branch of the Tullia
gens.'
An agnomen was usually a title of honour, e. g. Africanus, Magnus,
'

etc.,

or a title denoting adoption,

as

Octavianus (being the

name

of his

former gens with the termination -a/^z/s), assumed by C. Octavius after being
adopted by C. Julius Caesar, whose praenomen, nomen and cognomen he
also assumed, and became known as Caius Julius Caesar Octavianus.
177.

Miscellaneous.

A. U. G. Anno urbis conditac.

Gos.
Gonsul, -e.
Goss.
Gonsul-es, -ibus.

P. G.
P. R.
S. G.

Patres conscripti.

D.O.M. Deo Optimo Maximo.

D. D.
Dono dedit.

S.
S.

Salutem.
Salutem

F.

Filius.

HS.

Sesterti-us,

Imp.

Imperator.

Id.

Idus.

Kal.

Kalendae.

Non.

Nonae.

P. D.

Populus Romanus.
Senatiis consultum.

plurimam

dicit {or dat).

um.

S.P.Q,. R. Senatus Populusque

Romanus.
Si vales bene

S.V.B.E.E.V.

Ego

est,

valeo.

For a more complete list of Abbreviations see Roby's Latin

Grammar, vol. i. Appendix G, or Public Schools Lat. Or., Appendix K.
Note.

APPENDIX.

-i8o.]

EXPLANATION OF CERTAIN TERMS USED

BY GRAMMARIANS.
178.

Uncial

letters.

Cursi've letters.

Letters.

Capitals.

Small letters.

The letters c
q), g, h; t, d;
The letters m, n.
Liquids.
The letters r.
Spirants.
The letters f, h,j, s, 'v.
Double Letters. The letters
%,
Gutturals,
The throat sounds, viz.
Dentals,
The teeth sounds, viz. d, j, I,
Mutes,
Nasals.

b,f(y).

/,

Labials,

pThe hp sounds, viz./,

179.

b,

n,
^> J?

x.
^>

^*

m/f^nj,

Syllables, etc.

The last syllable of a word.

Ultima,
The last syllable but one.
Penultima.
The last syllable but two.
Antepenultima,
Enclitic.
A name given to words which are attached to the
of some other word in the sentence, as -que, and.

180.

end

Nouns.

Having the same number of

syllables in the Oblique

Cases as in the Nominative, i. e. not increasing.
Imparisyllabic.
Increasing in the Oblique Cases.
Root,
The Root of a word is that part which it has in common
with other kindred words. Thus the root of bellator, a (warrior^ is bell^ which it has in common with bellum and bellare.
^ouns of Common Gender, Nouns which can be used either as
Masculine or Feminine, to suit the sex referred to, as, parens,
a parent ; see 154 b.
Nouns of Epicene Gender.
Certain names of animals having only
one Gender, whichever be the sex referred to, as, passer,
Masc. a sparrow ; vulpes, Fem. a fox, aquTla, Fem. an eagle.
To indicate sex, when necessary, the words mas or femina
Parisyllabic.

are used, as mas passer, cock-sparrow.

Nouns of Doubtful Gender. Nouns which are used either Masculine or Feminine, without regard to the sex signified, as, talpa,
Masc. or Fem., a mole,

LATIN GRAMMAR.

146

181.

181-

Verbs.

= Indefinite).

Properly the Tense denoting Indefinite

Time, whether Past, Present, or Future (see p. 67), but in
Latin restricted to Past Time.
Protasis and Apodosis. In a Conditional Sentence, as, Si voluisset,
fecisset, the si clause is called the Protasis, the other the
Apodosis.
Aorist

182. Etymological Figures.

When

a consonant changes itself to one which

one like that which follows thus, sub-pono
becomes suppono in-berbis becomes imberbis.
Aphaeresis,
Gutting off letters from beginning, as, nosco for
Assimilation.
follows it, or to

gnosco.

Taking away from middle, as, periclum for periciilum.

Gutting off from end, as, die for dice.
Antithesis,
Changing one letter for another, as, bubus for bobus.
Metathesis.
Transposition of a letter or syllable, as, columns for
Syncope,

Apocope.

corulnus, accerso for arcesso.

Tmesis.
Separation of parts of a compound word by the insertion of one or more words between the parts, as, septem
subjecta trioni for subjecta septemtrioni.

Syntactical Figures.

183.

Omission of something, e. g. of a Substantive, as, ferina,

njenison [supply caro]
of a Verb, as. Nam Polydorus ego. For
I am Polydorus [supply sum].
Pleonasm.
Using more words than are necessary to express the
meaning, as, sic ore locutus est, where ore is redundant.
Zeugma. When two words or two clauses have the same Verb,
which does not apply equally to both
so that for one of
them another Verb (to be gathered from the sense of the
passage) must be mentally supplied, as, Inccptoque et scdibus
haeret in isdem. He abides by his resol've, and remains seated in
the same place.
Asyndeton.
Omission of Conjunctions, as, veni, vidi, vici.
Hendiadys. Use of two Substantives instead of Substantive and
Adjective to express one object, as, pateris libamus et auro
for libamus aureis pateris.
Enallage.
Use of one word for another, e. g. one Part of Speech
for another, one Case for another, use of Singular for Phiral, etc.
Hypallage.
Interchange of Cases, as, dare classibus Austros,/or
dare classes Austris, or using an Adjective in agreement with
a Noun other than that to which it belongs in sense, as, sagitta
celeres transilit umbras.
Ellipse.

'

APPENDIX.

-1 84.]

The poets sometimes put an Adjective or Participle

agreement with a Substantive, though the quality implied
cannot belong to it until the action of the Verb to which the
Substantive belongs is completed as, Scuta latentia condunt,
which means, They sto^ a^vay the shields so that they become
hidden, i.e. hide the shields out of sight ; where latentia is said
to belong to scuta proleptically, that is, by anticipation.
Compare the English phrases to strike a man dead,^ to beat him
black and blue,' etc., and Macbeth, Act iii. Sc. 4, Ere humane
statute purged the gentle weal.'
When the Verb agrees not in
Synesis or Constructio ad Sensum.
grammar but in sense with its Subject, the Adjective with its
Prolepsis,

in

'

Substantive, or the Relative with its Antecedent, as, fatale

moxistrum, quae, etc., Hor. Od. I, xxxvii. 21. See also 216,
220.
Anacoluthon. When the latter part of a sentence does not agree
in syntax with the former; which sometimes happens when a
parenthetical clause has intervened, so that the author has lost
sight of the construction with which he set out.

184.

Prosody.

A name

given to a set of two or more syllables by which

lines of Latin poetry are divided.
Scansion. \ The distribution of a verse of poetry into its proper
feet.
Scanning, }
A foot consisting of one long and two short syllables, as,
Dactyl.
Foot,

carmma.

A foot consisting of two long syllables, as, mensas.

Iambus, ^ Trochee, ^
Other kiiids of feet. Pyrrhic,
Anapaest,
-; Tribrach,
Hexameter
six; fxerpov, measure). Averse of six feet, of which
the first four may be either Dactyls or Spondees, the fifth
must be a Dactyl, and the sixth a Spondee, as,
TTtyre tu patu|lae reculbans sub tegmme fag"i||.
Pentameter {jrivTe^fi've). Averse of five feet. It has two divisions,
each consisting of two feet and a long syllable, the two long
The first half
syllables virtually constituting the fifth foot.
may have either Dactyls or Spondees, the second half Dactyls
Spondee.

only, as.

Res
Note

I.

est

The

short vowel- Q\\6\v\g

sollici

ti

||

plena

ti

moris a

mor

||

may

be either long or short, but a

should be avoided, especially in the Pentameter.

last

syllable of a verse

Note 2. A Hexameter should end with a trisyllable or dissyllable word*

Pentameter should end with a dissyllable, which should be either a Sub*

stantive. Verb, or Personal or Possessive

Pronoun.


LATIN GRAMMAR.

148

184-

The point in a verse where a word ends, so as to cut

Caesura.
In a
[caedo] the foot in two, and the voice pauses a little.
Hexameter line a Caesura should usually occur in the third
foot, as,

Tityre tu patu lae recu bans, etc.

Penthemimeral Caesura (nevre, fi've, rj/jLLy half^ iJLpoSj a part). A
Caesura after the fifth haljf-foot, as in the line just given.
Hepthemimeral Caesura {enrdj seuen). A Caesura occurring after
the seventh half-foot, as,
Form5 sam reso nare do ces Ama ryllida sTlvas||.
|

In the Hexameter last given the 3rd

Strong and Weak Caesura,
foot contains what is called a qjueak^ the 4th a strong Caesura.
A name given to a verse which is incomplete by one
Catalectic,
syllable.
Thus, each of the two divisions of the Pentameter
is said to be Catalectic.
(a) A definite
Metre or Measure (fierpov) is used in two senses
system or combination of particular Ferses ; e. g. the Elegiac
Metre, the Iambic Metre, etc. {b) A definite portion of a
particular Verse. In Verses made up of Dactyls and Spondees,
like the Hexameter and Pentameter, one Foot makes a Metre,
(hence the name //^.vameter, the six-measure verse, and Petitdmeter, the Jiue-measure 'verse).
But in Verses made up of
Anapaests, Tribrachs, Iambics, or Trochees, a Metre consists
of t^o feet. Hence the Iambic senarius, or Verse of six Feet,
is called an Iambic Tr/meter.
Arsis and Thesis (apais, deais).
The syllable on which the Ictus
or stress of the voice falls is said to be in Arsis.
In
Dactylic Verses the first syllable of each foot is in Arsis, the
other syllable or syllables being in Thesis. A short syllable
in Arsis is sometimes lengthened by the force of the Ictus, as,
LTmina que laur usque de i, etc.
Synaloepha.
Elision (or cutting off) of a final vowel before
another vowel or h at the beginning of the following word, as,
siirg' ag' et,ybr surge age et, and polluer' hospitmm for poUuere
hospitmm. Heu and O are never elided.
Ecthlipsis,
Elision of m and its vowel in the same way, as,
monstr* horrend' informe, etc., for monstrum, horrtMidum
Tnforme.
Synaeresis.
Contraction of two vowels inta one, as, demdc for
;

delnde.
Diaeresis,
Resolution of one vowel into two, or of a diphthong
into two vowels, as, evoliiisse for evolvTsse, aquaiVor aquae.

-1 85.]

APPENDIX.

149

LAWS OF QUANTITY.

General Rules.

185.

Most monosyllables are

{a)

Words
Words

Exceptions.

long, as, me, par, hic (the Adverb).

in b, d,

1,

and

t,

enclitic, -que, -ne, -ve,

Es (from sum)^, the Pronoun is,

Nominatives mc and quis,
An and cor, nec, fac, and fer,
In, vir, CIS, per, bis, and ter.

(^)

word,

is

vowel before another vowel, or before

Exceptions,

(a)

quae

the same

Many Greek words,

Diana

dius, eheu, ohe,

fieri

h, in

short, as mens, prohibeo.

possje

(c) the

negabam

doubtful, as unius,

illius,

as Aeneas ; (6) diei, aulai, and the like

in fio, except before er, as, omnia jam fiunt,

(d) the

but short in

of Genitives in -ius, which

long in alius,

alterius, utrius,

sometimes

is

solius, totius.

(c) All diphthongs and contracted syllables are long, as aut,

praeter, ml (for nihil).

Exception.

word,

is

is

shortened before a vowel, as praeustus.

or before j, x, z, in the same

long by position^ as ventus, Ajax, rexi, Amazon.

Exceptions.

Note

when

Prae

A vowel before two consonants,

(d)

I.

Bijugus, quadrijugus.

This rule applies also to

the next

word

bles -or, -at, nec, sit in the following line

Talis

Note

2.

am

or tene

at nec

syllables ending in a Consonant,

with a Consonant. Thus the syllaare long by position

final

in the verse begins

sit

mihi

cura

med

eri

||.

word

short final vowel cannot remain short before any

be-

ginning with sc, sm, sp, sq, st, x, or z, except smaragdus, Scamander,
Xanthus, Zacynthus.
Virgil has lengthened such a vowel once, perhaps, in
muros||, lEn. ix. 37, but this
the doubtful reading date
tel^
scandite
is a licence which must never be imitated.
Avoid the position altogether.
|

vowel short by nature becomes doubtful before a mute

/ or r, rarely when followed by m or n.
Thus pater has Gen. patris. (But a long vowel always remains
long thus, the Gen. of mater is always matris, never matris.)
thus, ah
Exceptions.
In compound words this rule is not often observed
{e)

( 178)

when followed by

and ob in ab-luo ob-ruo, are never shortened

is never lengthened.

the re in re-pleo, re-primo, etc.,

(/) Derived words usually follow the quantity of their primiperlego from lego, legere, but ablego from lego, legare.
There are however many exceptions to this rule.

tives, as

{g) Dissyllabic Perfects are long, as vidi.

Bibi, dedi, fidi,
Exceptions,
Steti,

tiili,

scidi.


LATIN GRAMMAR.
{h) Dissyllabic

Supines are long, as visum.

Datum, itum, litiim, quitum,
Ratum, rutum, satum, situm.

Exceptions.

Also citum from cieo, citum from cio; statum from

(y)

Pro

composition

in

is

sisto,

statum from

sto.

generally long, as procedo.

and generally where

Exceptions. Procella, pronepos, propero, protervus
/follows, as proficiscor, profundus.
But profero, proficio, profui.
;

Re

{k)

in

composition

is

short, as refert (from refero).

Refert (the Impersonal), religio, reliquiae, reperit, repulit,

(The last three are often written repperit, reppulit, rettulit.)

Exceptions,
retulit.

(a)

Rule for long

186.

Final Syllables.

final syllables

O, U, C,
AS, ES, OS, must lengthened be.
Final A,

I,

(1) Exceptions to a long are ita, quia, eja, and Nominative, Vocative, and
Accusative Cases (except Vocatives of Greek Nouns in -as).
Greek Vocatives and Datives, as
(2) Exceptions to i long are nisi, quasi
Alexi. Palladt; and the doubtful vowels mihi, tibi, sibi, ubi, ibi. Compounds
of ubi, except ubique, are short, as ubivis.
(3) Exceptions to o long are cito, ego, modo, quomodo, duo, homo. The
o of the First Person Singular of Verbs is said to be common, but except in
scio, nescio, volo, putd, it is almost always found long.
(4) Exceptions to c long are fac, nec, donee, hic.
(5) Exceptions to as long are anas, vas (vadis), and most Greek Cases of
the 3rd Declension in -as.
(6) Exceptions to es long are penes, es (from sum) and its compounds,
and -es of the 3rd Declension increasing short as seges. But aries, abies,
;

paries, Ceres, pes.

(7) Exceptions to os long are compos, impos, os (ossis), and

Greek words

in -OS, as epos.
(Z*)

Rule for short

final syllables

Finals reckoned short are E,

B, D, L, R, N, and T,
IS and US nor place deny
;

To

words from Greek

in

YS and

Y.

(1) Exceptions to e short are the final e of 5th Decl., as die, and Adverbs
derived therefrom, as hodie, quare ; 2nd Sing. Imperative of 2nd Conj., as

mone

Adverbs (except bene, male) derived from Adjectives

Greek Nouns in -77.
;

(2) Exceptions to / short are sal and sol.

(3) Exceptions to r short are far, fur, ver, cur, par, with

Greek nouns

in -rjp.

in -us

its

and

-er;

compounds;

APPENDIX,

-191.]

(4) Exceptions to ti short are en, n5n, quin, and Greek words in -rjv or -oov,
Nouns of 3rd Decl.
(5) Exceptions to is short are Dat. and Abl. Plural
;

in -is

increasing long, as SamnTs

have 2nd Pers.

Subj.

is

PI. in -itis,^as

(itis)

audis.

2nd

Pers.

The 2nd

of Tenses which

Sing,

Sing. Put. Perf. and Perf.

doubtful, as amaveris,

(6) Exceptions to us short are all the cases of 4th Decl. except Norn, and
Voc. Sing. Nouns of 3rd Decl. in -us i?icreasing long, as servitus Greek
Nouns in -ovs, Lat. -us, as Panthus.
;

PARSING FORMS.
Substantive.
from
{state
Gender,
Number,

is

187.

a Substantive,

^hat

here

it

makes

in

Case.
Account
for the Case, by reference to the explanations given in the Syntax
for example, if the word be in the Genitive Case, state what kind
of Genitive it is, and on what word it is dependent.
the Geniti'ue),

188. Adjective.

an Adjective of
Terminations, from
,
Number,
Case, agreeing with
Gender,
If it be a Comparative or Superlative Adjective, state
Note,
the fact, and give the Positive; thus, Migniori is an Adjective
of two Terminations, from dignior, the Comparative of dignus,
etc' If it be a Numeral or Quasi-numeral, state the fact.
is

189. Personal or Keflexive Pronoun.

Pronoun, from
Account for the Case,

is

Gender,

Case.

ber,

Num-

as with Substantives.

190. Adjectival Pronoun.

Gender,
be a Relative
Pronoun, or a Demonstrative used as a Personal Pronoun, account
for the Case, as with Substantives.
is

Pronoun, from

Number,

Case, agreeing with

191.
is

If

it

Verb.
{here gi've the chief parts

Verb, from

Number,
Tense,
Mood,^
its Nominative
If an Infinitive, omit Number, Person, and Agreement.
For an Impersonal Verb, omit Person and Agreement, and after
the word 'Number' add the words 'used Impersonally.'

Voice,
of the Verb),
Person,^ agreeing with

Account

for the

Or

Person,

Mood,

if a

Subjunctive.

Number,

Tense,

Mood,

Voice.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

152

192.

[ 192-9.]

Participle.

is from
, the
{here state the 7ense and Foice) Par{here gi've the chief parts of the Ferb)^
ticiple of the Verb
Number,
Case, agreeing with
Gender,
Note. If a Gerundive, omit Tense and Voice. In parsing the
forms amandum est, monendum est, etc., there is no agreement
with any Substantive; therefore, after the word 'Case' add the
words Neuter Gerundive Construction, implying necessity.'

'

193.

Gerund or Supine.

a Gerund {or Supine) in

Case.
{gi've chiefparts of the Verb),
is

194.

from the Verb

Account for the Case.
,

Particles.

(If Comparative or Superlative

an Adverb.
Degree, name the Positive). State what word it modifies.
is a Preposition governing the
Case.
{b)
Conjunction, connecting
is a
and
(f)
is an Interjection.
{d)
{a)

is

195. Example. Tum senex recitavit judicibus eam fabulam

quam proxime scripserat, then the old 7nan read out to the judges

the play <ivhich he

had

last written.

This example is parsed

tions which may be used,
Note.

Tum,
senex,

in a

shortened form to show the abbrevia-

Adv. of Time, modifying recitavit.

Subst. f. senex, senis, Masc. Sing. Nom. being Subj. to
recitavit.

Trans. Vb.

f. recit-o, -are, -avi, -atum, Act. Ind. Aor.

3rd Sing., agreeing with Nom. senex.
judicibus, Subst. f. judex, judicis, Masc. PI. Dat. being Ind. Obj.
of recitavit.
eam,
Demonst. Pron. f. is, ea, id, Fem. Sing. Acc. agr. w.
fabulam.
fabulam, Subst. f. fabula, -ae, Fem. Sing. Act. being Direct
Object of recitavit.
Rel. Pron. f. qui, quae, quod, Fem. Sing. 3rd Pers.
quam,
agr. w. antecedent fabulam
Acc. Case, being
Direct Object of scripserat.
proxime, Adv. modifying scripserat, Superl. degree from prope,
Comp. propius.
scripserat, Trans. Vb. f. scribo, scribere, scripsi, scriptum. Act.
Ind. Plpf. 3rd Sing., agreeing with Pronoun of 3rd
Pers. implied in its ending.

recitavit.

SUPPLEMENTARY RULES
AND

EXAMPLES.
Note on the Subjunctive.

196.

The

Subjunctive denotes actions

which are thought of as happening, whereas the Indicative denotes those

which actually do happen. Hence,

The

Rule.

Indicative expresses a fact, the Subjunctive a conception.

197. The uses of the Subjunctive may conveniently be classified according as they occur in Principal Clauses of Oratio Recta, in Subordinate
Clauses of Oratio Recta, in Principal Clauses of Oratio Obliqua, and in

Subordinate Clauses of Oratio Obliqua. The use of the Mood in continuous

Speeches reported in Oratio Obliqua will also have to be noticed.
198.

In Principal Clauses of Oratio Recta.

() Potential Use,

Note.
is

translated

by

as, dicat aliquis.

Some

07ie

may

say.

the instances where the Subjunctive in Principal Clauses

the signs, may, might, can, could, would, should, are to be

Nearly

all

The Hypothetical and Dubitative uses, to be

explained as Potential.
noticed below in (b) and (c) are mere varieties of the Potential.
(b) Hypothetical Use, where a Subjunctive forms the apodosis ( 181)
of a Conditional Sentence, as, fecissem si jussisses, / shoidd have done it,
if you had ordered me.
{c) Dubitative Us*e, found chiefly in questions, as, quid faciam, what

am I to

do

(often introduced by utinam), as, moriar, may I die

utinam mortuus essem, woidd that I had died I
(e) Jussive, Hortative, or Imperative Use, as, abeat, let him
begone ; ne dixeris, do7i*t say so.

(d)

Optative Use

199.

In Subordinate Clauses of Oratio Recta.

Subordinate Clauses are introduced either by the Relative, qui, quae, quod,
or by Conjunctions.
The Mood in such Clauses is not always Subjunctive,
but when it is, it is usually explained grammatically as being governed by
the Relative or Conjunction, though the expression is not strictly correct,
the real reason for the Mood being that it refers to a supposed case rather

LATIN GRAMMAR.

154

[ 199-

than an actual fact, e. g. Paetus omnes libros, quos frater siiiis reliqiiisset,
mihi donavit, Paetiis has give?i me all the books which his brother left him,
(For a more complete
i.e. which his brother, as he believed, had left.
account of the Relative in its simple sense of who or which followed by
Of Subordinate Clauses introduced
a Subjunctive see Madvig 368, 369.)

by Conjunctions, the chief kinds

Final

are,

by that or in order
Latin by ut, that, ne, lest, quo (before Comparatives), that,
riot.
qui
ut, and quominus, qain, in order that
(b) Consecutive (indicating a residt), expressed in English by that,
also
after a preceding so or siich, and in Latin by ut after talis, tarn, etc.
?iot, and qui = talis ut.
by quin, so that
(c) Temporal (indicating titne), expressed in English by when, etc.,
and in Latin by quum, ut, ubi, and other Temporal Conjunctions already
(a)

that^ lest,

and

(indicating a purpose), expressed in English

in

mentioned in 84.
(d) Causal, expressed in English by since, as, or because, and in Latin
by quum, quia, quod, and other Causal Conjunctions mentioned in 84.
{e) Conditional, expressed in English by if or unless, and in Latin by
si, nisi, and other Conditional Conjunctions mentioned in
84.
(/) Concessive, expressed in English by although, and in Latin by
etsi, quanquam, etc.
See 84.
yg) Comparative, expressed in English by as if or as though, and in
Latin by tanquam, quasi, etc.
See 84.

200.

In Principal Clauses of

Oratio Obliqua.

Oblique Statement. A simple Statement, as voluit, he wished^

becomes Oblique when it forms the Object of a Verb, as dicit se voluisse,
he says that he luished, or the Subject of a Verb, as constat eum voluisse,
it is well kuoiun that he wished, i.e. that he wished (Subject) is well known
(Verb).
Here the Infinitive is used. But sometimes we find ut with
{a)

Subjunctive, as accidit ut vellet,

//

The Principal Clauses

Rule.

happe?ied that he wished.

Hence

in Oblique Statejnent are the Subjects of

Impersonal Verbs or the Objects of Verbs of declaring, knoicing, perceiving,

thi?iki?ig,

sio7ially

or believing, and are usually expressed by the Injifiitive, but occaut with Subju7ictive after certain hiipersonals, e.g.

by

Restat, abest, accidit,

Evenit, contingit,

fit.

Licet, sequitur, a7id est,

Placet,

refcrt,

interest.

(b) Oblique Question.

Questions, as, ridesno are you laughing"?
quid rides, luhat are you laughing af? bccoFiie Oblique when they form the
Object of a Verb, as, rideasnc scire vokimus, lue want to hioiu luhether you
are laughing, or the Subject of a Verb, as, quid rideas dictu difficile est, it is
difficult to

Rule.

say what you are laughi?ig

at.

All Clauses i?itroduced by an Interrogative Pronoun or Particle

75) ?nust have their Verb in the Subjunctive if they form the Sub-

( 60, p.
or Object of a Verb.

ject

Nate.

This Rule will require some modification when we come to the

whole Speeches reported in Oratio Obliqua (see 202).

rule respecting

'

'

APPENDIX,

-202.]

155

Properly speaking the only instances of

(c) Oblique Command.
Oblique Command are those which occur in a whole Speech reported in
Oratio Obliqua, where they are always put hi the Subjimctive, as will be seen
It is convenient however to include under this head Clauses
below, 202.
introduced by ut or ne which follow Verbs expressing such ideas as

To

ask or wish,

command,

contrive,

Allow, forbid, advise, and strive;

as, imperavi tibi ut hoc fa ceres, I commanded you to do this; suasi
hoc faceres, / advised you not to do this. [See 301.]
201.

tibi

ne

In Subordinate Clauses of Oratio Obliqua.

Subordinate Clause in Oratio Obliqua, whether belonging to

a?i Oblique Statement, Question, or Command, must under all circumstances
be put in the Subjunctive.
Such sentences as, nuntiant Belgas, qui cIs Rhenum mcolunt, in
Note.
The clause qui cis Rhenum
armis esse, are no exception to this rule.
incolunt' formed no part of the speaker's original words, and does not
Oblique
Sentence,
the
but
is added by the author for
to
therefore belong
the information of his readers.

Rule.

'

202.

Speeches reported in Oratio Obliqua.

whole Speech containing Statements, Questions, and Commands intermingled is sometimes reported Obliquely, being dependent on the words
dixit, dicit, or their equivalents expressed or understood.

Rule for Speeches in Oratio Obliqua.

the Lifinitive

the Ififinitive,

The

; the Cominands are put in the Subjunctive

dinate Clauses must be Subjunctive.

junctive

Example

put

in

and,

Subor-

lastly, all

Direct.

Deinde dux,

hostium,*

exclamavit,

Arcem

*
'

statim

expugnare mihi in animo est.

Quis mecum erit, comites ?
donee hostes
Expectatisne
ultro arma tradant? Utrum
dux an servus vester sum ?
Expergiscimini,festinate, arma
parate, ne occasionem, quam
nunc fors obtulit, belli conficiendi

Statemefits are

the Qiiestions, if of the First or Third Person, are also in

but if of the Secojid Persoji they are usually in the Sjib-

amittamus

Thereupon the general exclaimed,

'

p7irpose

stormitig

citadel immediately.

the

Who

enemy's
will

go

Are you tvaitwith me, comrades f

ing until the etiemy voluntarily give
I your general
up their arms?

Am

Wake up!
or your slave?
haste ! Get ready your arms,

Make
lest tve

the opportufiity which chance

has 710W presented of finishing the

lose

war

Deinde dux exclamavit,

Sibi esse in animo arcem hos-

Thereupon the gerieral exclaimed

that he purposed storming the ene-

tium statim expugnare. Quem

comitum secum fore ? Expectarentne donee hostes ultro

Which
my's citadel immediately.
of his comrades luould go luith him 7
Were they waiting until the enemy
vohmtarily gave up their arms ?

Oblique.

arma traderent ? Utrum ducem

eorum an servum sese esse ?

Was

he their ge?ieral or their slave ?


LATIN GRAMMAR.

156

obtulisset,

fors

202-

They must wake up, make haste, and

get ready their arms, lest they shoidd
lose the opportunity which chance

Expergiscerentur, festinarent,
arma pararent, ne occasionem

quam nunc

had

belli conficiendi amitterent.

?iow presented of finishing the

war.

The Subjunctive Mood is sometimes distinguished as Conjunctive

occurs in Principal Clauses of Oratio Recta, .Sz/tjunctive when it

Note.

when

it

occurs in Subordinate or Oblique Sentences.

203. The Subjunctive is also used in Causal and Relative Sentences to
denote an alleged reason or act, as, Laudat Panaetius Africanum, quod
fuerit abstinens,
Panaetius praises Africanus because he says that he was
self-restraining.*
Fuit for fuerit would mean 'because he actually was selfrestraining,' without implying that Panaetius said so.
So, injuria quae tibi
facta est, 'the injury which has been done you,' but injuria quae tibi facta
the injury which you say has been done you,' Cic. in Caecil. 58.
sitf
'

'

Additional Notes on
204.
general rule for Sequence of Tenses,

the Sequence of Tenses.

as stated

Tenses are followed by Primary, and Historic by

The Rule

in

148,

The

that Primary

is

Historic.

equally to both Subjunctive and

the Present Infinitive,
is called
as amare, is both Present and Imperfect, and that what is called the Perfect
Note the following
Infinitive, as amavisse, is both Perfect aJid Pluperfect,
examples of Infinitive
ait se verum dicere, He says that he is speaking the truth.
ait se verum dixisse, He says that he spoke, or has spoken, the truth.
aiebat se verum dicere. He said that he spoke, or was speaking, the truth.
Note.

Infinitive

Moods.

here given applies

Remember

that

what

aiebat se

verum

205.

The

dixisse.

difl[iculty

He

said that he

had spoken

the truth.

which most troubles beginners

the rule for

in

Sequence of Tenses is the translation of an English Aorist when requiring

The following
to be put into the Subjunctive or Infinitive Mood in Latin.
rule may be followed in most cases
After a Primary Tense the Aorist is translated by a Perfect Subjunctive
or Infiiiitive, as,
nescio an verum dixerit, / hiow not whether he spoke the truth.
:

ait se

verum

dixisse,

He

says that he spoke the truth.

After a Historic Tense the Aorist

or Infinitive,

is

translated by an Imperfect Subjunctive

as,

nesciebam an verum diceret, I knew not whether he spoke the truth.

aiebat se

verum

dicere.

He

said that he spoke the truth.

Often however the rule given in 205 will not apply; e.g.
{a) By a laxity in P^nglish usage the Aorist is often used where a PluThus, we find such sentences as A said that B
perfect ought to stand.
In all such
told him so and so,' where told of course means had told.
cases, where the action takes place before that of the governing verb, a Pluperfect must be used after a Historic I'cnse.
206.

{b) The Latins often preferred to represent Aorist Time by a Perfect

this usage,
Subjunctive rather than an Imperfect after Historic Tenses
where it occurs, is intended perhaps to mark the occurrence of an actual
:

APPENDIX.
fact rather than a supposed case.
It is especially frequent after ut Consecutive
thus, he was so prudent that he avoided these thitigs * might be
translated tarn prudens erat ut haec vitaret, or tarn prudens erat ut haec
vitaverit
the former would mean he was so prudent as to avoid,' &c., the
latter *he was so prudent that he did actually avoid.'
(c) A Pluperfect is often used in Subordinate Clauses of Oratio Obliqua,
where an Imperfect would stand if it were Oratio Recta thus, si flumen
transiret, hostem vinceret, if he crossed the river he would conquer the
enemy becomes, in the Oblique form, putavit se, si flumen transiisset, hostem
esse victurum.
*

'

Cicero constantly uses an Imperfect Subjunctive after a Perfect

Thus in i Verr. i. 3 he says, huic ego causae actor accessi non
ut auger em invidiam ordinis, sed ut infamiae communi succurrerem, I have
207.

Indicative.

come forward as prosecutor

of your order hut

in this case, not to

to retrieve the ill-repute

we

increase the unpoptdarity

suffer from in

common.

208.
After a Historic Present, i.e. a Present used for an Aorist,
like our says he * for said he,* the Tenses in Subordinate or Dependent
Sentences sometimes follow the mle, sometimes the se?tse, as, though so
great a defeat had been sustained, the general nevertheless exhorts the

'

'

'

soldiers not to

lose heart,'

milites hortatur ne

animo

quum

tanta

clades esset accepta,

dux tamen

deficiant or deficerent.

*jf* The following Examples, as far as 290, follow the order of the
Rules of Syntax, pp. 84-104, which they are intended both to illustrate
and supplement.
The numbering of the paragraphs is made with a view
to facilitating reference, and has nothing to do with the Syntax Rules.
Phrases and words requiring special notice in the Examples are printed in
italics without any reference being necessarily intended to the particular
rule of Syntax which the example illustrates.

The Three Concords.

(See 95, a and 6.)

209.

The

Gauls are attacking

Galli

urbem oppugnant.

the city.

They announce

urbem oppugnare nun-

that the Gauls

are attacking the city.
I know not why the Gauls are
attacking the city.

Gallos

210. What sort of man is

Milo?
I knociv not what sort of man
Milo /V.

Qualis est Milo

tiant.

Cur

Galli
nescio.

urbem oppugnent

Nescio qualis

sit

Milo.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

158
I

kno^

what

not

sort of

man

Milo ^as.
I

what sort of man

Milo ^as.
is

says that he is happy.

She says that she is happy.
He says that he is not happy.
They say that he qvas happy.
They said that he (was not

happy.
I

Caesar

will

come.

almost think [orperhaps] Caesar

will

come.

It is well

will

(See
(See

est.

Ait se beatum esse.

Ait se beatam esse.

Negat

se

beatum

esse.

Aiunt eum beatum fuisse,

Negarunt eum beatum esse (or
fuisse by 206 ^2).
Caesar veniet.
scio an Caesar venturus

Haud
sit.

known

that Caesar

come.

They

Nescivi qualis esset Milo.

Beat us

happy.

He

2 12.

Nescio qualis fuerit Milo.

205.)

He

211.

^lo-

205.)

not

k7jeqju

Caesarem venturum

esse con-

stat.

said that Caesar

would

come.

Caesarem venturum

esse dice-

bant.

Caesar hopes to come.

Caesar promised to come.

Caesar se venturum esse sperat.

Caesar se venturum esse pollicitus est.

he wise or foolish?
wish to know whether he

213.

We
is

Is

wise or foolish.

We (ivish to

know whether he
^as wise or foolish.
We avished to know whether
he

qjuas

214.

wise or foolish.

Marcus has returned.

Marcus has
is

been persuaded [or,

persuaded, 376] to return.

Marcus ^as persuaded

to re-

turn.

Marcus was persuaded

not to

return.

215. The

sapiens an stultus est ?

Scire volumus utrum sapiens
an stultus sit.
Scire volumus utrum sapiens
an stultus fuerit ( 205).
Scire voluimus utrum sapiens
an stultus esset ( 205).

Marcus

rediit.

Marco persuasum

est ut redeat

and 205).
Marco persuasum est ut rediret ( 200, c, and 205).
Marco persuasum est ?ie re( 200,

r,

diret.

soldiers

had taken

the town.
asked whether the soldiers
had taken the town.

We

Utrum

Milites

oppidum ceperant.

Militesne oppidum
quaesivimus.

cepisscnt

Pars epulis onerant mensas.

load the tables
with food.
Part seek the seeds of flame.
Ciuaerit pars semina flammac.
Rule. A Nona of Muhitude in the Singular Number may have either a
Singular or (by cofistructio ad sensum, 183) a Plural Verb.

216. Part


APPENDIX.

-22,0.]

Caesar and Crassus will

soon be at the gates.
They informed me that Caesar
and Crassus would soon be at
217.

mox ad portas
erunt.
Me certiorem fecerunt Caesareni
et Crassum niox ad portas futuros esse.
Caesar etCrassus

the gates.

Kule. When the Subject is Composite, that is, formed of two

Nouns united by Conjunctions, the Verb is usually Plural, as above.
Note

If the

1.

Singular Verb,

as,

Composite Subject denote a Si?igular idea,

senatus populusque Romanus hoc decrevit.

or

it

more

But,

takes a

Note 2. If the Conjunctions be Disjunctive, as, ?iec 7iec, utru7n an, sive
sive, velvel, autaut, etc., the Verb usually follows the Number and
Person of the nearest Noun, as, nec Caesar nec legati \\oc fecerunt; nec
legati nec vos hoc fecistis.

Both you and I were

happy.
They say that both you and I
were happy.
Youand Marcus will be accused.

Tu

Webelieve that you and Marcus

Te

218.

will

be accused.

Et

t-^o

beati fuimus.

Et

me et te

beatos fuisse ferunt.

et

et

Marcus accusabimini.

Marcum accusatum

iri

credimus.

Rule. If the Persons in a Composite Subject are different, the Verb follows the prior Person ; the First Person being considered prior to the Second,
and the Second to the Third.
Note.
There is often a tendency, however, to make the' Verb agree with
the Noun jiearest to it, as, ego et Cicero mens flagitabit. In such cases the
Verb is said to be attracted to the Person of the nearest Noun.

The king and queen are

dead.
Fire, water, and iron are very

Rex

219.

et regina

Ignis, aqua,

mortui sunt,

ferrum sunt

utilis-

sima.

useful.

Rule. If the Genders in a Composite Subject are different, the rules for
Adjective in Agreement are as follows
living things, the Adjective is put in the
(1) If the Nouns are names
Plural and follows the worthier Ge?ider; the Masculine being considered
luorthier than the Feminine, and the Feminine worthier than the Neuter.
(2) If the Nouns are names of thi?igs not living, the Adjective is put in
:

the Neuter Plural.

Note.
Here again, however, is to be noticed the tendency to attract the
Adjective into agreement with the nearest Noun, as, animus et consilium et
sententia civitatis posita est in legibus, the spirit and purpose and feeling of a
station

is

220.

expressed in

The

spiracy

its

laws.

chiefs of the con-

were whipped and be-

Capita conjurationis virgiscacsi

ac securi percussi sunt,

headed.
Note.

ad sensutn ( 183), caesi and percussi agreeing witii

implied in capita.

constructio

the notion of

men

LATIN GRAMMAR.

i6o
22 1. The

quarrels of lovers
are the renewal of love.
Est

Note.
*

Words

is

here attracted to the

Amantium
Number of

to the heat of deeds too cold breath

(See 95,

They cut down

irae amoris integra-

tio est.
the nearest

Arborem, quae

The

ExercTtus,

army which Hannibal

brought with him was small.

ii.

Cf.
sc. I.

c.)

the tree
which grew in our garden.
The tree which I loved so much
has been cut dow^n.

2 22.

Noun.

Macbeth, act

gives.''

in

horto nostro

crescebat, succTderunt.

Arbor,

quam

bam, succisa

cum

tantopere diligeest.

quem Hannibal

se-

duxit, exiguus erat.

Rule. The Preposition cum, when used with the Personal Pronouns,
and sometimes when used with the Relative, is enclitic ( 179), as, mecum,
tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quocum, quibuscum.
It is said

that Scipio

command-

ed the army which overcame

Hannibal.

We, who

are in the country,

send these presents to you,
who are in the city.
Tou and /, who have so long
been enemies, have at length
laid aside our enmity.

223.

does

will

punish him

who

this.

Exercitui, qui Hannibalem superavit, Scipio praefuisse dicitur ( 231).

Nos, qui ruri sumus, haec munera ad vos, qui in urbe estis,

mittimus.

Ego

et tUy qui tamdiu inimici

fuimus, inimicitias tandem de-

posuimus.

Qui hoc fecerit, in eum animadvertam ( 298).

Avoid ille qui. When is is antecedent to qui, it is often either

omitted altogether, or placed in the following clause, as above.

Rule.

224. Here am I who did

Here am I whom ye seek.

it.

Adsum qui feci.

Adsum quem quaeritis.

In these examples the antecedent ego

This constantly happens.

All men praised my good

fortune in having such a son.

225.

is

contained in the Verb adsum.

Omnes

laudare fortunas meas

qui talem natum haberem.

Here the Antecedent is contained in the Possessive Pronoun meas, which

For the Historic Infinitive laudare see 275.

mei, of me.

I came in time, which is

the most important of all things.

226.

Here the Antecedent

227.

with

omnium

est

primum.

the sentence 'in tempore veni.'

Thebes, which

capital of Boeotia.

The

is

In tempore veni, quod rerum

is

the

Thebae, quod Boeotiae caput

est.

Relative here is attracted into agreement in Number and Gender

the Appositional Noun in its clause.
Sometimes, though rarely,

A PPENDIX,

-231.]

i6i

the Relative

is attracted into the Case of its

Antecedent, in imitation of the
populo, and, rebus, qi/ibus quisque poterat, elatis.
Attraction,
Inverse
confined chiefly to poetry, is where the Antecedent is
attracted into the Case of the Relative, as, urbem, quam statuo, vestra est,

Greek,

as, judice, qtio nosti,

the city

which I ani founding

boy whose
228.
Servius Tullius.
Here Servio

Tullio,

is

yours.

name was

Puer

cui Servio Tullio

nomen

fuit.

which should be Nominative

in

Apposition to nomen,

attracted into the Case of cui.

is

229.

made

Osiris

was the

first

who

Osiris primus aratra fecit.

ploughs.

uncertain whether Osiris

or Triptolemus was the first

It is

Osirisne an Triptolemus primus

aratra fecerit incertum est.

who made

ploughs.
the most beautiful
flowers he had.
Lucullus was the richest person

He

gave

me

who was then

Note.

living at

Rome.

Flores, quos habuit pulcherri-

mos, mihi dedit.

Eorum

qui

tum Romae

habita-

bant Lucullus ditissimus erat.

Neither Ordinal Numerals nor Superlatives contain the Antecedent

Osiris primus
to the Relative in Latin, as they appear to do in English.
erat qui aratra fecit would mean, Osiris, who made ploughs, was the first
*

'

man, without denoting in what respect he was first,' and by no means imAfter Superlatives, some
of ploughs.
it was in the making
rendering similar to that given in the last two of the above examples
must be adopted. 'Flores pulcherrimos, quos habuit' would simply mean,
very beautiful fiowers, which he had; and 'Lucullus ditissimus erat qui tum
Romae habitabat would mean, Lncullns, who was then livirig at Rome, was
(For he sent back all the books he had say libros,
a very rich person.
quos habuit, remisit omnes,' rather than 'omnes libros, quos habuit, remisit.')
'

plying that

'

'

'

'

Copulative Verbs and Apposition.

(See 96-roo.)

230. Hectorwas son of Priam,

the Trojan king.
The poets say that Hector
was son of Priam, the Trojan

filius fuit.

Priami, regis Trojani, Hectorem filium fuisse tradunt

poetae.

king.
231. It
learned.

Priami, regis Trojani, Hector

is

said that

Galba was

Galba doctus

fuisse dicitui

Galbam doctum fuisse traditum

has been related that Galba
est.
was learned.
Do not say Galbam doct?/m fuisse dicitur. The Copulative Verbs
Note.

It

Impersonal construcion, except in the Tenses

( 96) prefer a Personal to an
compounded with the Perfect Participle. See Madvig, 400.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

l62
232. The

town was

Oppidum

called

232-

vocatum

Corioli

est

{or vocati sunt, by attraction).

Corioli.

They

called the

town

Oppidum Coriolos vocarunt.

Ad Capuam flexit iter, quae
urbs (not urbem quae) nuper

Corioli.

He marched

towards Capua, a
city which had lately revolted.

defecerat.

An

Appositive Noun having a Relative Clause immediately dependent on it, as in the last of the above examples, is sometimes attracted mto
So, the phrase a thing which is always quae
the Case of the Relative.
res, quam rem, etc.

Rule.

'

233. I
sul.

wish to be

It is a glorious

made con-

thing to be

'

Consul

made

fieri

cupio.

magnif icum

est.

mere complement of

fieri,

Consul^-;?? fieri

consul.
Note.

In the last

example consulem, being

follows the Case of the unexpressed Subject of that Verb, viz. the Accusative ( Sg, footnote 2).
I am not permitted to
be neglectful.

Mihi non

234.

licet esse negligent!,

Mihi non licet esse negligent^m is also correct Latin, negligentem

Note.
agreeing with me' understood. If no Dative after licet is expressed, the Accu*

sative

is

generally used, as, medios esse non licebit.

Madvig. 393,

c.

Obs.

3.

Time, Place, and Measure.

(See TOT-107.)

235.Priamreignedmanyyears.
Jl report was spread that Priam
had now reigned many years.

Priamus multos annos regnavit.

Pervulgatum est Priamum multos jam annos regnasse.

Per multos annos

He

twenty years old.

236. Caesar was killed on the
Ides of March in the year 44
is

before Christ.

We

have heard that Caesar was

on the Ides of March.

killed

is

also

good Latin.

Viginti annos natus est.

Caesar Tdibus Martiis, anno

ante Christum natum quadragesimo quarto, interfectus est.

Caesarem Idibus Martiis

inter-

fectum esse accepimus.

Note.
This Ablative is used to express (i) at what time, as above, (2)
within what time, as, paucis diebus proficiscar, I shall set out in a few days,
(3) how long ago, as tribus abhinc annis mortuus est, he died three years ago.

237. Having sailed thence

to Greece I returned to Rome
and Italy in twenty days.
Note.

Ad with

in the direction

of

Inde ad Graeciam advectus

ginti diebus

Romam

liam redii.

the Accusative of towns and small islands

as,

ad Brundisium

vi~

et in Ita-

flexit iter.

means towards^

APPENDIX.

'243-]
238. Dionysius

(lub^rn

expelled

from Syracuse taught boys

163

Dionysius Syracusis expulsus

pueros Corinthi docuit.

at

Corinth.
It

is

on record that Dionysius

Memoriae traditum

est Dionysium Syracusis expulsum pue'r-

when

expelled from Syracuse

taught boys at Corinth.

ros Corinthi docuisse.

Legati Carthagine et ex Africa

The ambassadors returned from

Carthage and Africa.

Ab

Note.

interior of or

from

When

239.

at

or small islands

the ?ieighbo7irhood of, as, ex

Gergovia discessit. Ab
passuum a Roma abesse.

redierunt.

or ex with towns
is

denotes either

Cypro

discessit

used with expressions of measure,

Rome

Romae

love

Tibur, qjuhen at Tibur Rome.

Horatius said that when at Rome
he loved Tibur, when at Tibur

from

as, tria

Tibur, Tibure

the

Caesar a
niillia

Romam

amo.
Horatius dixit se

Tibure

Romam

Romae

Tibur,

amare.

Rome.
Accusative Case.
no,

(See

240.
Note.

To play an insolent game.

a, h. )

Ludum

insolentem ludere.

Pure Cognate Accusatives as ludere ludum, ridere risum, etc., are

rare.
It is more conmion to find an Accusative added to Intransitive Verbs
to denote some special part of the whole action of the Verb, as, ludere aleam,
to play hazard, i.e. ludere ludum aleae.
So, pluere sanguinem, to rain blood;
lampadem olere, to smell of the lamp ; mella sapere, to have the taste of
ho?zey, etc.

The Suevi do not subsist

much upon corn, but chiefly

Suevi non multum friimento

sed maximam partem lactc

241.

upon milk and cattle.

Note.
The Accusative of
example,

is

allied to

atque pecore vivunt.

as,

the Cognate usage.

multum here an Accusative

maximam partem

in the above
immaterial whether we call
of Limitation or a Neuter Adjective used

Limitation,

It is

Adverbially.

(See

no,

Like unto a God in

countenance and shoulders.

c.)

Os humerosque dco

242.

similis.

Redimltus tempora lauro.

Having his temples

243.
crowned with bay.

Note.
The Accusatives here and in similar instances, many of
occur in Virgil, as, perque pedes trajectus lora tumentes, having
passed through his swelling feet, inutile ferrum cingitur. he girds
useless sword, etc., are not Accusatives of Respect, but are the Direct
i

which
thongs
on his
Object

LATIN GRAMMAR.

164

243-

of the Verb or Participle, which is to be regarded either as retaining

Transitive force in the Passive Voice, or as being Reflexive.
(See 114.)

Ask favour of the gods.

244.

its

Posce deos veniam.

The Verbs

of ashing that take a double Accusative are posco,

Peto, precor, postulo, quaero, sciscitor, prefer
fiagito, oro, rogo, interrogo.
an Ablative of the perso?i with ab or ex.
Note.

My

245.

my

mother taught

remember

The

No^e.

is

my

that

me my

taught
tive

me

Mater mea me

literas docuit.

letters.

mother

Matrem meam me

do-

literas

cere memini.

letters.

construction of

memini with Present instead of Perfect

Infini-

to be noticed.

246. Do not conceal these

things from your father.

tuum

Or, haec patrem

ne

celes, or

celare noli.

Haec ne patrem tuum

cela-

veris.

But do not,

in writing Prose, put

no

See 378.

cela.

Dative Case.
(See 116 and 117, a.)

He owed

247.

his life to

me.

Do riot ask^ my countrymen,

why he was indebted for his
to me.
appoint a day for the trial
of Titus Menenius.

Vitam mihi acceptam

retulit.

NolTte sciscitari,cives, cur vitam

mihi acceptam retulerit.

life

They

To
If

be angry <with anyone.

you

your

consult

me

Irasci [or succensere) alicui.

will consult

have I to do with you

shout ascends to heaven.

Note, Caelo

is

Dative of motioti

to^ for

248. This is common to me

and you.
This is common to all living
creatures.
That was peculiar to Tiberius.
This is a vice peculiar to old
age.
He is like his father.
Do you think you are like me?

Rule.
Genitive.

Communis,
So also

Si

me

ad caelum

Hoc

and par.

nium hoc

a poetical usage.

mihi tecum

Commune

commune

animantium

est.

om-

est.

Id Tiberio proprium fuit.

Hoc proprium senectutis vitium
est.

Patri suo similis est.

An tu mei similem esse putas?

proprius, and similis

affinis

consulueris, ego tibi con-

sulam ( 298).
C^iiid mihi tecum
It clamor caelo.

interests.

What

T. Menenio diem dicunt.

may

take either a Dative or a

APPENDIX.

-^55-]

He took the young man

from confinement and set him

249.

Extractum custodiae juvenem

diicem populo imposuit

as leader over the people.

[See

315, ^.].

No^e on custodiae. Many Verbs compounded with

ab, ad de ex and
signifynig removal from or taking from, are
followed by a Dative of the
Indirect Object (translated by from), where
we should have expected an

Ablative of Separation, or Ablative with Preposition.

So, adimam cantare
sevens; paullum sepultae distat inertiae celata virtus, etc.
The poets extend
the usage to other Verbs, as, huic atro liquuntur
sanguine ^uttae from it
there flow drops of black blood,

250. He threw himself at

Caesar's feet.

Gaesari ad pedes se proiecit.

(See 117, e,f.)

251. To be able to pay one's
debts.
To be able to bear the burden.
To sound a retreat.

Solvendo

esse,

Oneri ferendo esse.

Receptui canere.

These things are a subject of anxiety to us.

He is sent to the assistance of

Haec curae

252.

sunt nobis,

Exercitui auxilio mittitur.

the army.

The

Note.
after

253.

Predicative Dative

as nobis

and exercitui

Whom

did

it,

it

may

in the

take a Dative of the Indirect Object

above examples.

Gui bono

benefit?

fuit?

Note.
Only Adjectives of quantity, as magnus, quantus, tantus, etc., are
Hence cui in the above example is an
used with the Predicative Dative.
Indirect Object, not an Adjective in agreement with bono.
254.

Gassandra the prophetess

was never believed.

Gassandrae

vati

nunquani crc-

ditum

known that Gassandra

the prophetess was never be-

It is well

est ( 119).
Gassandrae vati nunquam cre-

ditum esse constat,

lieved.

Ablative Case.
(See 120, 121).

He

joined battle with

the enemy in a favourable

255.

Proelium cum hostibus

opportuno commisit.

loco

position.
Note. Except in the case of towns and small islands, almost the only
Ablatives of Place where used in Prose are loco, locis, dextra, laeva, medio,
terra marique, and Nouns in the Ablative having totus or medius in agreeHence the English in when used of
ment (Roby's Lat. Gr. 11 70).
place should usually be expressed in Latin by the Preposition in with
Ablative.

In Poetry this Ablative

is

very frequent with

all

sorts of

Nouns.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

i66

Sulla resigned the die tatorship.

256.

256-

said that Sulla had

resigned the dictatorship.
Perhaps you may ask why Sulla
resigned the dictatorship.

dictatura se abdicavit.
(See 121, a.)
Dixit nescio quis Sullam dietatura se abdicasse.
Fortasse roges cur Sulla dietatura se abdicaverit.

257. Caesar was more

Caesar

Somebody

for-

tunate than Crassus.

There

are

some who

believe

Caesar ^as more fortunate than Crassus.

that

There ^ere some who doubted

whether Caesar <wa3 more

Sulla

felicior
Crasso erat.
(See 121, c.)
Sunt qui credant Caesarem
feliciorem Crasso fuisse,

Erant qui dubitarent an Caesar

felicior

Crasso

esset,

fortunate than Crassus.

I think death easier than disgrace.

Puto

They

Frumento magis quam carne

live

more on corn than

on meat.

mortem dedecore

levi-

orem.
vivunt ( 121,

The

Ablative of Comparison is used (i) for quam with Nominative, as felicior Crasso for felicior quam Crassus, (2) for quam with
Accusative, as feliciorem Crasso for feliciorem quam Crassum, hut not for
quam with aiiy other Case. Thus we could not say frumento magis carne
vivunt for they live more on corn than on meat.

Rule.

'

'

You will be of as much

value to others as you are to

258.

Tanti

eris

aliis

quanti

tibi

fueris ( 298).

yourself.

The

forms usually called Genitives of Value are tanti, quanti, magni,

Comparative Degrees and Compounds, as maximi, quanticumque, &c.), nihili, flocci, nauci, pili, terunci, assis, hujus, pluris, minoris.
Mr. Roby (Lat. Gr. 1186, 1187) calls them Locatives, and thinks the
forms assis, pluris, &c., are due to false analogy.
The phrase boni consulere,
to make the best of, belongs probably to this usage.
Note.

parvi, {with their

259. Why should I not exchange toil for rest?

Rule. Mutare and

Cur non laborem

tem? ( 121, d).

otio

permu-

compounds signify (i) to give in exchange, (2) to

thing given or taken is in the Accusative, and the
exchanged is in the Ablative. Hence the above
it is
example might mean, 'Why should I not take toil in exchange for rest?'
i.e. change rest for toil.
The meaning to be assigned in any particular
passage can only be determined by the context.

take in exchange.
thing for which

260.

T:he

its

The

richer he

is,

the

more covetous he becomes.

The more he studies the more
he learns.

Quo

divitior eo cupidior fit.

(Sec 121,^, and also 373.)
(^uo magis Uteris studet, eo

plus discit.

APPENDIX.

-^63.]

He says that the more he studies

more he learns.
They say that the more
studied the more he learnt.

Ait

se, quo magis Uteris studeat

eo plus discere.
Ferunt eum, quo magis Uteris
studeret, eo plus didicisse.
'

the

Note

he

The quo

Clause is subordinate to the eo Clause, and its Verb

time from the Aorist didicisse.
Studuisset for studeret
would not be inadmissible ( 206, c). For se and eum see
291.
Note 2. Magis, more in degree; plus, more in quantity.
I.

therefore takes

The

261.

its

sun

many

is

times

Sol multis partibus major est

quam terra ( 121,
Eo facilius capta est urbs, quod,

greater than the earth

The

was

city

the

more

easily

taken because, &c.

Half as big again.

&c.

Dimidio major.
(See 123.)

Halving taken the city

Caesar departed from Gaul.
Christ was born qjuhen Augustus

Urbe

262.

qjuas

Imperante Augusto natus

Emperor.

est

Christus.

because my father
and mother ordered me.
If you appease the gods, you will

did this

Caesar ex Gallia

capta,

discessit.

Haec, patre

et

matre jubent-

ibus, feci.

Dis

placatis,

periculum

vitabis.

escape the danger.

He

home and

left

set out

Domo

for

In

relicta in

Italiam pro-

fectus est.

Italy.

the

consulship

of Gnaeus

Gn. Pompeio M. Crasso con-

Pompeius, and Marcus Crassus.

sulibus.

Notice the above varieties in the translation of the Ablative Absolute.

(See

Now
courage, O

263.

there

is

there need of

Aeneas;

demand

now

demand
is

Why

is

Nunc

animis opus, Aenea, nunc

viribus usus.

for strength.

Nunc

animis opus esse nunc

usum sensit Aeneas.

viribus

for strength.

need of haste.
there need of haste?'

said he.

He

126.)

is

Aeneasperceivedthat now there

was need of courage, now a

There

asked

why

there was need

of haste.

Properato opus
'

Cur,' inquit,
est?'

Cur properato

'

est.

properato opus

esset opus (^uac-

sivit.

Rule. Opus, need, is used (i) with Ablative of a Substantive, as animis.

(2) with a Perf. Pass. Part, used Substantively, as properato, (3) in Apposition
to a Noun in the Nominative, as dux nobis opus est, we have need of a
leader, (4) with an Infinitive Clause, as, non opus est id scire or id sciri, // is
not needfid to
similarly, but

know
is

less

that, or that that

often found.

should be hiown.

Usus

is

consuuctcd

LATIN GRAMMAR,

i68

Genitive Case.
(See 127-131).

My

264.

Your care
Rule.

Mea

care for you.

for

Tua

me.

Meus,

tuus, suus, noster, vester,

(Gen. PI.) are used Subjectively; mei,

(Gen. PI.) Objectively.

He was eager for praise.

He said he <ivas eager for praise.
He said he (was not eager for

265.

cura tui.
cura mei.

nostrum (Gen. PL), and vestrum

(Gen. PI.), and vestri

tui, sui, nostri

Avidus erat laudis.

Se laudis avidum esse dixit.
Negavit se laudis avidum esse,

praise.

They

he

say

eager

<ivas

for

Avidum pecuniae eum

money.

fuisse

ferunt.

Incertum est utrum laudis an

uncertain whether he ^as
pecuniae avidus fuerit.
eager for praise or money.
Incertum fuit utrum laudis an
It n,vas uncertain whether he
pecuniae avidus esset.
^as eager for praise or money.
Note.
The Adjectives that take an Objective Genitive, are (i) those
denoting some active state of the feelings or mind, as avWus, cupidus, memor,
It is

&c., (2) Verbals in -ax, as Tempus edax rerum, (3) Adjectives

The last two
denoting fuhiess or watit, as dives, plenus, expers, pauper.
usages belong chiefly to poetry.

peritus,

266. The kingly government

was designed for the preservation of liberty.
This rare form may perhaps be
ohs. 4) calls

267.

He

it

libertatis fuit.

Madvig (417

Genitive of Definition.

a Genitive of Purpose.

Where

in

the world?

arrived at such a pitch of

folly that,

Regiumimperiumconservandae

Ubi gentium?

Eo

stultitiae venit, ut

&c.

&c.

Note.
Genitives dependent on Adverbs of Place, as quo, eo, ubi, &c.
or of time, as, nunc, tunc, &c., are best referred to the head of Partition.

268.

Abstineto irarum.

Desist from wrath.

and laborum decipitur, occurring

are mere Graecisms, and must not be imitated in Prose.
So, desine querelarum,

in

Horace.

Thes

The Impersonal Verbs.

(See 132, 133).

ought to set out.

I ought to have set out.
/ almost tjymk I ought to set

269.

Me
Me

general,

done

think/
'

that

this?'

replied

the

ought to have

proficisci oportuit.

Hand

out.

*Do you

proficisci oportet.

scio

an

me

proficisci

oporteat.
Putasne,'
*

me

imperator
inquit
hoc facere oportuisse ?
*

APPENDIX.

-277-]
270.

your

pity

Me

folly.

You

He

repent of your faults.

was ashamed of his poverty.

contented with

his lot

paenitet.

Paupertatis eum pudebat.

Nos hoc facere pudet.

ashamed to do this.
Theyrepent of havingdone this.
How happens it that no one
lives

tuae miseret.

stiiltitiae

Te culparum

We are

Eos hoc fecisse paenitet.

Qui fit ut nemo contentus sorte
vivat

your interest that

there should be peace; it is
his that there should be war.

271.

169

Tua

It is

pacem,

interest

lum

illius

esse, (or ut pax, ut

bel-

bellum

sit).

Note.
Mea, tuii, &c., are explained (1) as remains of an Acc. Fern. Sing.,
the original expression being inter meam rem est, tuam rem fert, &c.,
(2) as
Abl. Fem. Sing, with ellipse of re.
See also Roby's Lat. Gr.
1285.

This is of little consequence to Caesar.

This is of great consequence
to me.
Note. The Genitive (or Locative) of

272.

note 2),

is

Caesaris parvi refert.

Hoc mea magni

refert.

Value, as magni, parvi, &c., ( 120,

often found with interest and refert.

Infinitive
273.

Hoc

wish to go away.
The Infinitive added

b,

Mood.
Abire cupio.

Note.
to complete the sense after such Verbs as
wishy begin, be able, &c. (Madvig, 389), may be called the Complementary
It
is
also
known
as
Prolative
Infinitive.
(Pub. Sch. Lat. Gr. 180).
274.
well.

am

Gaudeo te valere,
quod vales.

glad that you are

or

gaudco

Note.
Quod with Indicative is used instead of Accusative and Infinitive
(1) with Verbs expressing some emotion of the mind, as gaudeo, doleo, &c.,
See Madvig, 398, b.
(2) with certain Impersonals.

275.

Then

Circumspectare tum patricio-

the plebeians be-

rum

gan to look round about on

the faces of the patricians.
Note.
The Historic Infinitive is

vultus plebeii.

used (i) of sudden events,

simultaneous events, (3) of events following in rapid succession.
276.

from
Note.

What! am

my

Me-ne incepto

to shrink

settled purpose

The Exclamatory

(2)

of

desisterc!

Infinitive

is

used both in Prose and Poetry, with

Compare the use of the

or without -no, to denote surprise or indignation.

English Infinitive in such phases as

$277. Bold to endure

Note.

Perpeti

is

all

things.

to think

of your doing

Audax omnia

poetical for ad perpetiendum.

For

this,'

&c.

perpeti.

Infinitive used instead

of Gerund with or without a Preposition see Madvig, 419.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

278-

Gerund and Gerundive.

(See 138-142.)
I am desirous of satis 278.
f)ing the people.

The Gerund of

Rule.
takes

its

case after

Gupidus sum satisfaciendi populo.

Verb governing the Genitive, Dative, or Ablative

it.

For the sake of seeing

279.

something.
For the sake

of

seeing

Aliquid videndi causa {net alicujus videndi causa).

Urbem videndi causa, or urbis
videndae causa.

the

city.

With

Ad urbem tuendam

a view to protecting the

(tie'ver

ad

urbem tuendww).

city.

Rule. With Transitive Verbs {a) the Genitive Gerund often takes an
Object in the Accusative, especially when ambiguity, (as noticed in 138,
footnote), or awkwardness of sound, as magnarww statuan/7 videndar?/m, is
to be avoided, {h) the Dative and Ablative less frequently have an Object,
and (c) the Accusative with Preposition 7iever has one.
In these latter cases
the Gerundive construction, as explained in 138, is used.

We must speak.
We had to speak.
We must speak these things.

Dicendum est nobis.

Dicendum erat nobis.
Haec nobis dicenda sunt,

280.

haec nobis dicendw;?^

Lucretius has Aeternas quoniam poenas in morte timendiim

Note.
but among the classical writers such a phrase is not found ( I41).
'

He

Eumenem

gave up Eumenes
281.
to his relatives to be buried.

He

caused a bridge to be
ever the Arar.

Qui,

endum
Pontem

made

(jiot

est).

propinquis

est,'

sepeli-

tradidit.
in

Arare

faciendum

curavit.

Quum, and

Ut.

(See 143).

For instances of the simple use of Qui see 222-229.

282.

made

pity

this

you for having

The

Relative thus used is known as

by the use of utpote or quippe.

He

283.

will

send ambas-

sadors to beg for peace.

He sent ambassadors to beg
for peace.

The
that,

Relative thus used

and

is

Miseret tui me, qui hunc homi-

man your enemy.

known

as

'

is

Qui

nem inimlcum
*

Qui Causal.*

Legatos,

It is

qui

feceris.
often strengthened

pacem

petant,

mittet.

Legatos qui pacem

peterent,

misit.

equivalent to a clause introduced by ut, in order

Final.'

APPENDIX.
284. You are not such a man
as not to know what you are.

Non

171
tu

es

is

quid

qui,

sis,

nescias.

The

Relative thus used is equivalent to a Clause introduced by ut after

Qui Consecutive.' It is found (i) after talis,
&c., and is known as
tantus, and all other words implying swcA,(2) after dignus, indignus, idoneus,
aptus, &c., as, dignus est qui imperet, he is worthy to rule, (3) after Com-

talis,

'

quam, as, aetate provectior est quam qui diu vivat, he is too
old to live long, (4) after Interrogative, Indefinite and other Pronouns and

paratives with

quidam, nemo, multi. Sec, either expressed,

Adjectives, as, quis,

qui

est

timeat,

te

who

who fears you

there

is

as,

quis

or understood, as,

sunt

Almost
qui credant, there are some who believe.
Subordinate clauses are to be referred to this head.

There

285.

can do

Who

is

is

no one but

there that does

7iot

Quis

est quin videat

Nihil

tam

is

prevents

our

doing

this.

Note

I.

Quin

facere

difficile est

quin per-

f ici possit.

so.

Nothing

hoc

no doubt that the

is

is

quin

est

it

see

not immortal.

case

the uses of quin in

possit.

this.

Nothing is so difficult that

cdiXinot be accomplished.
It cannot be that the soul

There

Nemo

all

non potest quin animus

immortalis sit.
Non dubium est quin res ita se
Fieri

habeat.
Nihil obstat quin {or
hoc faciamus.

quominus)

stands (l) for the Nominative, qui non, quae non, quod non,
above examples, (2) for the Ablative qui non, how

as in the first three of the

01 in such a matiner as not, as in the last three examples.

expergis2. Quin in Principal clauses means 'why not?* as, quin
'
cimini, why doiit you wake up ? and sometimes but,' in truth,' (kc.

tiot

Note

'

(See 144.)

Such being the case, I

wish to consult you.
Such being the case, I wished
to consult your interests.

286.

287.
will

When summer

returns

go home.
288. Caesar seeing the enemy
off their guard suddenly attacked them.

we

Quae quum
Quae quum

Caesar ha-ving returned

from Gaul entered the

without delay.

city

consu-

ita essent, tibi

sulere volui.
Qiium redierit aestas

ibimus
Caesar,

con-

domum

298).

quum

videret,

eos

hostcs incautos
subito adorlus

est.

Quum meaning at the time when

Note.
See Madvig 358.
Imperfect Indicative.
2

ita sint, te

lere volo.

is

occasionally found with an

Caesar, quum ex Gallia rcdiisset, urbein sine mora intravit.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

290-

feceris, ita

metes

(See 145.)

290. As
you reap.

you sow, so

shall

Ut sementem
(298).

We asked them how they were.

Ut

valerent interrogavimus.

Se and Suus.
291.

Fabius said that

if

Bru-

Fabius

dixit, si suas res Brutus

redderet, se invicem ei

tus would restore to him his

property, he in turn would
restore his to Brutus.
Cato is here with his son.

Cato cum

They have

Nee Catonem

sibi

res ejus

seen neither Cato

nor his son.

Rule. Se and

redditurum
filio

( 298).

suo hie est.

nec filium ejus

aspexerunt.

Suus refer to the Subject of the Principal Verb of the

Sentence, if it be of the Third Person.
Note.
Sui may however be used as Objective Genitive, e. g. conservalio
sui, self-preservation, without necessarily referring to the Subject of the
sentence. Suus may also be used without such reference, when the translation
his owHy her own, &c., is implied, as, Hannibalem sui cives e civitate ejecerunt,
his own countrymen expelled Ha?mihal from the state.
See Madvig, 490.

Utrum, Num, -Ne, An.

i Utrum meum
Is this

292.

yours or mine

wish to know whether this

yours or mine.

Num

followed by an
omitted in these double questions,
Notes.

-No

Meumne

Num meum

Scire
volo

is

is

<

rare.

as,

an tuum est
hoc ?

meum

utrum
,

^
>

meumne
num meum

Utrum,

-ne,

num,

an

tuum

hoc
are

sit.

sometimes

eloquar an sileam, shall I speak or be

fueris ignorans, not

sometimes used for an, as, albus aterno

blowing whether yon were luhite or black.

silent?

is

Can he do this or not

wished to know whether he
could do this or not.

293.
I

Rule.

For or not use an non

in

294. It is uncertain whether

he will do this without com-

Utrum hoc facere potest annon?

Scire volui utrum hoc facere
necne posset.
Oratio Recta, necne in Oratio Obliqua.

Incertum
facturus

est

an sine

vi

hoc

sit.

pulsion.

Rule.

(U)u})t or uncertainty, the first clause of a double

In the above
omitted, and an is translated whether.
example supply utrum vi coactus after incertum est to complete the sense.
See article on an in Andrews' Dictionary.

question

After Verbs of

is

often

APPENDIX,

-297-]
*

1/3

Would,' the sign of the Future Tense in Oblique

Sentences.
295.

{a)

He would

He

said that

With Verbs

Active Voice.
Amaret.

love.

he would

Dixit se amaturiim esse.

love.

no Supine and consequently no Future Infinitive [which is formed from the Supine] the phrase, fore ut or futurnm
esse ut,' with Imperf. Subjunctive is used, as,
I hoped the boys would learn,'
Speravi fore [or futurum esse] ut pueri discerent.'
that have

'

'

'

'

'

was uncertain whether he

would love.
{b) He would have loved.
He said that he would have

It

Amaturusne

incertum

esset

erat.

Amavisset.
Dixit se amaturum

fuisse.

loved.

With Verbs having no

Supine,

'

futurum

fuisse

ut,'

with Imperfect Sub-

junctive would be used.

It

is

doubtful whether he would

An amaturus

have loved.
296.
{a)

He

fuerit

in

dubio

est.

Passive Voice.

He

would be loved.
said that he would be loved.

With Verbs having no

Supine,

'

Amaretur.

amatum

Dixit se

fore ut

'

or

'

iri.

futurum esse

ut,*

with Sub-

would be used.

junctive,

Incertum erat an amaretur.

was uncertain whether he
would be loved.
The Passive has no Special form for the Future Subjunctive. 'Incertum
erat an amaretur
therefore may mean, It was uncertain whether he would
It

be loved,' or,
*

futurum

esset

'

was uncertain whether he was loved.' Such a form as

But a Latin writer would probut amaretur' is not found.

'It

ably resort to some contrivance for avoiding this ambiguity, such as changing
the construction from a Passive to an Active form, &c.
(b)

He

He

would have been loved.

that he would have

said

been loved.

Amatus

esset.

Dixit futurum fuisse ut amaretur.

Quod.
297. They accused Socrates,
on the ground of his corrupting the youth, but in reality
because he had become suspected by those in power.

They condemned Marcus

death on the charge of
his father.

to

killing

quod
accusarunt,
juventuteni corrumperet, re
tamen ipsa quia in suspicionem magistratibus venerat.

Socratem

Marcum

capitis

quod patrem

damnarunt

occidissct.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

174

The

general refused to fight,

not because he feared, but because he wished to delay.

Quod,

Rule.

297-

Dux pugnam

detrectavit, non
quod timeret, sed quia cunc-

tari voluit.

when

because, takes an Indicative, except

it

expresses (i)

an alleged reason, as in the first two of the above examples, (2) after the
Negative Adverb, a supposed or possible reason, a reason which might be
The true
the true one, but is not necessarily so, as in the last example.
reason in such cases is usually expressed by quia or quod with Indicative.

Future Time.
298.

He

said

were

do it if I am
he would do it

will

able.
if

he

Faciam,
Dixit

si

potero.

se, si posset,

facturum.

able.

When

I return I will speak of

these things.
He said that when he returned
he would speak of those things.

Quum

rediero, de his rebus

dicam.
Dixit se, quum rediisset, de iis
rebus dicturum.

Rule. When the Principal Verb of an Oratio Recta is in the Future,

Subordinate Verbs, especially when introduced by Temporal or Conditional
in the Future Simple
Conjunctions, must, as a rule, be in the Future also
Tense, if the action be contemporaneous with that of the Principal Verb,
anterior.
But
Perfect
if
in
Oratio
Obliqua such Suborit be
in the Future
dinate Verbs are put in the Present, Perfect, Imperfect, or Pluperfect SubSee Madvig, 339, Obs. I., 340, and 378 (4).
In the English
junctive.
idiom the futurity of the Subordinate Clause is lost sight of.
;

Construction of summus, medius, &c.

He

was standing on the

top of a tower.
He said he was standing on the
top of a tower.
They said he <ivas not standing
on the top of a tower.
The captives will be led through
the midst of the city.
It is announced that the captives will be led through the
midst of the city.
299.

In

summa

turre stabat.

Se in

summa

Eum

in

turre stare dixit.

summa

turre stare ne-

gcirunt,

CaptTvi per
centur.

mediam urbem

Captivos per

ductum

iri

dii-

mediam urbem

nuntiatur.

Rule. Summus, the Superlative of superus, high, is not to be translated

when used of place. Summus mons does not mean the highest moun-

highest

where it is highest, i. e. the top of the

mountain. So, medius mons does not mean the fuiddle mou?itain (of several),
In
but the moujitaifi where it is midmost, i. e. the middle of the mountain.
the same way extremus and imus in agreement with a Noun must often be
translated end of and bottoin of.
tain (of several), but the mountai?i

APPENDIX.

^75

To.
Kule. To with Nouns is nearly always the sign of the Dative,
except when it implies motion to
with Verbs it is usually the sign of the
Infinitive, except when it means in order to.
300.

This

He
He

be useful to me.
send presents to me.
wished to kill Marcus.

Hoc

will

mihi utile

Munera ad me

will

Marcum

erit.

mittet.

occTdere voluit.

homines ut
occTderent.
2. Misit homines qui

^i. Misit

Marcum
Marcum

occiderent ( 283).
3. Misit homines Marcum oc-

He

sent

men

to kill

cTsuros (yery rare),

Misit homines ad

4.

Marcus.

Marcum

occidendum ( 279).
5. Misit homines Marcum occidendi causa ( 279).
Misit homines Marci occidendi causa ( 138).
7. Misit homines Marcum oc6.

cTsum

An

English

( 136).

may

be (i) a Verb-Noun
meaning the act of hilling, or (2) an Adverbial phrase meaning iti order to
hill.
But in Latin the Infinitive is only a Verb-Noun, and is never used
Adverbially except by the poets.
Such a sentence, therefore, as misit
homines Marcum occidere^ could only mean he sent men the act of hilling
Marcus,' which is absurd.
Remember then that the Infinitive should
Note.

Infinitive,

e.

g.

to

hill,

'

'

never he used to express a purpose

301.

command you

to

ifi

Latin.'

do

Impero

tibi ut

hoc

facias,

this.
I

advise

you

not to

do

Suadeo tibi ne hoc facias.

Permiserunt ei ut iret.
Permissum {or concessum)

this.

They

He

allowed him to go.

was allowed to go.

est ut iret.

We

asked him to go
with us to the Forum.
Rule.

down

Oravimus

Forum

By ut translate Infinitive
With ash and wish, command,

ut
nobiscum
descenderet.

contriue,

Allow, forbid, advise and strive:

But never be this rule forgot.
Put ne for ut when there's a 'o/.'
Exceptions.
Infinitive

Volo,

jubeo,

rather than an ut

veto,

almost always take an

of forbidding (except
to order not to do something.'

Clause.

veto) always use ne, as the sense

is

conor,

sino,

After Verbs

LATIN GRAMMAR.

l^6

Having.
The

Perfect Participle Active, having loved, having advised, etc.,

is wanting in all Latin Verbs, except the Deponents and Semi-deponents.
In translating into Latin an English Perfect Participle Active we must,

302.

remember the following

therefore,

Rules,
be used,

(a)

Deponent can be found

If a

to suit the

sense,

should

it

as,

Dux

Having thus spoken the general

sat down.

ita

locutus consedit.

quum with

{h) If an Active Verb is employed, we must use

Subjunctive if the Principal Verb is a Historic Tense,

Dux, quum

Having thus spoken the general

sat down.
But with Perfect Subjunctive

Having

if

Pluperfect

as,

con-

dixisset,

ita

sedit.

the Principal Verb

Quum

honourably so
many years he is worthy of
the utmost praise.
lived

is

Primary Tense,

as,

tot annos honeste vix-

summa laude dignus est.

[Quum here = j/r^', 144].

erit,

(c) If the Verb is Transitive and has an Object, an elegant rendering can
be made by means of the Ablative Absolute, as,

Fabius having conquered the

enemy returned (will return)
to

Fabius, hostibus victis,

Romam

rediit (redibit).

Rome.

Note
person

Hostibus

I.

victis

who conquered

Note

Ceno,

2.

does not necessarily imply that Fabius was the

quum vicisset (or vicerit) would.

the enemy, which

juro, nubo, poto, prandeo,

have Perfect Participles Active,

cenatus, having slipped, juratus, having sworn, nupta (of a

woman),

havirig

wedded, potus, having drufik, pransus, having dined.

Caesar having ex303.

horted his men sat down.
Caesar having exhorted his
men, a shout arose.

Caesar suos hortatus consedit.

Note.

Beware of regarding

Caesare suos hortato, clamor

exortus est.

as absolute a Substantive,

ap;reement, which forms the Subject of a Verb.

examples the words

'

Caesar having exhorted his

ifidependefit of the rest of the sentence), but

In the

men'

with Participle in
of the above

first

are not absolute

form an integral part of

(i. e.

it.

Of.

304.

He

Ad

will sail to the island

of Cyprus.
/ almost think he will
island of Cyprus.

sail

Hand

to the

Here are

Cyprum

to

navigabit.

scio an ad insulam

prum navigaturus

In these and similar expressions,

a sign of Apposition.

insulam

Cy-

sit.

as,
the city of Rome,' &c., of is merely
be noticed the English expressions all 0/,'
'

'

APPENDIX.

--309.]

177

whole 0// where 0/ cannot be expressed by a Partitive Genitive

( 129, 6),
words all, whole, are from their meaning not partitive.
For 'all
say qui omnes (Nom.), quos omnes (Ace); 'all
0/ you,' vos
-omnes.
Also 'three hundred of us were present,' trecenti adfuimus, if o/is
not used partitively but trecenti nostrum, or ex numero nostro, adfuerunt, if
*

since the

o/whom'

it is

used partitively.

305. The barbarians

swords o/wood.
Of here

He talks

306.

makes
0/in

Barbari ligneis ensibus utuntiir.

denotes quality or material,

/"battles,

De

and

light 0/ danger.

the

307.

use

first cslsq

To

pugnis loquitur, et pericu-

culum parvi

= concerning

in the

second

Templum

rob a temple of its

facit.

forms part of the Verb.

it

auro spoliare.

gold.

Of
Is

after ro6, defraud, deprive,

but a sign of Ablative.

The.
Qui

Tbe soldiers on the wall

perceived me.

308.

(or

milites

quot) in moenibus erant

me aspexerunt.

There

Definite Article in Latin, and care is required in

is no
order to bring out the English meaning where necessary.
Milites in moenibus me aspexerunt might mean Soldiers o?i the wall perceived
me or even soldiers perceived me on the wall. For 'the' with Comparatives see 260, 261.
See also Dr. Abbott's Latin Frose, 20, 21.

Note.

translation

in

He is not the man to do this.

The noble and eloquent Cicero.

Non

est is qui hoc faciat.

Cicero, vir nobilissimus atque
facundissimus or, Cicero ille
nobilis ac facundus.
;

Proelium ad Cannas commissum or, Proelium Canncnse.

The fight at Cannae.

remember

the

Quantam

bravery he

shewed.

He

Servum

sent the trustiest slave he

had.
reputation
remarkable
The
which he enjoyed.

quam) virtutem

{or

praestiterit

memini.

misit,

fidelissimum.
Existimatio,
habuit.

quern

quam

habuit

insigncm

Without.
309.

He

is qjuithout

wisdom.

Sapientia caret.

before a Substantive is usually expressed by sitie with

'To be
Ablative, except when it means 'outside of which is extra.
without' is carore or egcre 'without the knowledge of is clam, sec 353.
The chief difficulty in the translation of ' without is when it precedes the

Note.

'

Without

'

'

Gerund

in -ing, as in the following examples.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

178
310.

never saw him

^-without

310-

Nunquam eum

vidi quin ride-

rem.

laughing.

The town was taken ^without a

single man being killed.
They set out ^without delaying
any longer.

He made

a long speech without

persuading any one.
He was condemned without

Ne uno quidem

interfecto, urbs
capta est.
Non amplius morati proficiscuntur.

Orationem longam habuit, nec

tamen ulli persuasit.
Damnatus quidem sed non sup-

being punished,

plicio alfectus est.

Yoj cannot learn

without study-

ing.

You cannot study without learn-

Discere non potes

studueris.
Literis studere

ing.

nisi Uteris

non potes quin

discas.

Note.

Nisi here implies

'

without previously studying

quin

'
;

'

without

subsequently learning.'

Instead
311.

Hannibal, instead of retiring to

Capua, ought to have attacked

te eo.

Hannibal non Capuam recedere sed Romam oppugnare

Rome.

debuit.

Hannibal retired to Capua

stead

of.

Pro

go instead of you.

in-

quum

Rome.

attacking

Instead of desiring the honour,

he refuses it when offered

Capuam

Hannibal

recessit,

Romam

oppugnare
neque Romam

debuisset {or
oppugnavit).
Tantum abest ut

honorem cu-

pTat (or, adeo non honorem

cupit), ut oblatum rejiciat.

him.

Too.
312.

The

The way

shoe

is

is

too

narrow.

too large for

the

foot.

Marcus was much

have the

command

Nothing was

too

old to
of armies.

too

arduous for

him to undertake.

Via nimis angusta

est

or,

Via

angustior est.
Calceus major est quam pro
pede.
Marcus multo provectior aetate
fuit quam ut [or, quam qui]
exercitibus praeesset.
Nihil tam arduum fuit quin is
suscTperet.

So, Such, As.

As many men,

many

Quot homines,

tot sententiae.

opinions.
He is such as he has ever been.

Talis est qualis

semper

313.

so

fuit.

APPENDIX.

-314.]

He is not so mad as you.

Such as remained in the city he
rewarded.
He is not such a man as to do

179

Non tam

aniens est quam tu.

Eos, qui in urbe manebant,
praemiis affecit.
Non is est qui id facTat.

that.

such was

Cato,

found out

his

sagacity,

Cato, quae erat ejus sagacitas

this.

{or

is

sagacitate),

hoc

as regards you.

or,

As

qua erat

deprehendit.
Quae tua est temperantia.
Quod ad te attinet.

your temperance.
As far as you are concerned,

Such

far as

He

raises

know.

Quod

as

Quam maxim as

great forces as

possible.

As soon

comparat

The

as.

of

or,

potest copTas
copias quam

maximas comparat.
Simul atque. Idem qui.
Ea erat milTtum virtus, ut to-

/^j.

was the valour

.Sz/f^

sciam.

the
'

tum diem

soldiers that they fought the

whole day long.

pugnarent.

Some, Any.

Some one may

Some one may say.
314.

Quaerat quispiam (or aliquis)

Dixerit (or dicat) aliquis.

ask.

Some said that Croesus, others

that Cyrus would conquer.
Some fly in one direction some

Croesum, alii Cyrum vic^turum dicebant.

Alii aliam in partem (or alias in
Alii

in another.

Let no one say

If

have any

partes) fugiunt.
quis hoc dicat.

Ne

this.

quid ingenii in me
Sunt qui patent.
Erant qui putarcnt.
Ecquis ita putat ?

ability.

Si

There are some who think.

There were some who thought.
Does anyone think so ?

est.

Some, meaning 'someone or other,* whom we do not know,

meaning a certain person,' whom we know but
do not think it necessary to name, it is quidam.
meaning
(b) Some, meaning *a few* or 'several' is nonnulli or aliquot

Rules,

is

(a).

aliquis or nescio quis

'

little

it is

nonnihil, and,

when used of

quantity, aliquantum.

Any

is quispiam and sometimes aliquis; any in a question is ecquis or

any you please is quivis, quilibet any at all quiscjuani (Subst.),
ullus (Adj.) ; after if or lest,' any is usually quis.
but
(d) Nobody^ no one, [i. e. not a7iy body, not a7iy one] is nemo

(c)

num

quis

'

instead of 'that nobody,* in Final Clauses, the Latins said 'lest anybody,' no
quis.
But in Co?isecntive Clauses ' that nobody is ut nemo. In Connnands,
'

for 'let nobody* they said 'let not anybody,' ne quis.

they said nor any one,' nec quisquam, iiec ullus, and
quis, neve quis.
'

For
in

and no one'

Cununands ncu

LATIN GRAMMAR.

i8o

315-

English use of the Demonstrative.

In Co-ordinate Sentences ( 84, ?iote) we often employ Demonstra 315.
tive (or Personal) Pronouns in English to avoid the repetition of a Substantive,
as

'

we found some mushrooms and

The Demonstrative

ate them.''

is

seldom

cupiuiil^j alii

sper-

so used in Latin, the repetition of the Substantive being avoided

making

(a) by

Some covet

it

the Object of both Verbs,

riches, others de-

alii

nunt.

spise them.

This cannot be done

Note,

as,

Divitias

if

the Verbs take different Cases, as,

Some blamed the general, others

congratulated him on his vie-

Alii

ducem

toriam

culpare,

vic-

alii

ei gratiilari ( 275).

tory.
{h)

by making

do duty for one of the co-ordinate sen-

Participle

tences, as,

He summoned the soldiers,

and

thus addressed them.

of,

est.

In particular be careful ?iever to translate literally the expressions

316.

that

Milites convocatos ita allocutus

Either

those of.

{a) repeat the Substantive, as.

The

fleet

of the

Romans joined

Sociorum

classi classis

norum conjuncta

thal of the allies.

Roma-

est.

or (h) introduce an Adjective with which the second Substantive can be

understood in agreement, as.

The fleet

Romans

of the

joined

that o/the allies.

Sociorum
juncta

classi

Romana

Here classi coming immediately before Romana shews that

be understood with the latter word.
or {c) omit the second Substantive altogether, as,

The

keels

are

than those of our

much

flatter

ships.

Carinae

quam

con-

est.

aliquanto

classis

is

to

planiores

nostrarum

navium

sunt.

Ways

of translating by a Latin Participle.

317. Yie attacked and Youied.

the enemy.
He hurfit and destroyed the

Hostes adortus

profligavit.

Pontem incensum

delevit.

bridge.

This accident impedes his right

hand as he is endeaiwuring to
draw his sword.
Leonidas, though overpowered,
would not yield.

Hie

edficere
casus gladium
conanti dextrani moratur ma-

num.
Leonidas superatus cedere

men

noliiit.

ta-


APPENDIX.

-322.]

Xerxes, qx^ben conquered by the

Greeks, fled back to Asia.
1/ expelled from Rome, he will
go to Athens.
I
did this because Caesar ad-

i8i

Xerxes
Asiam

Roma

Graecis

victus

in

rcfugit.

cxpulsus Athenas

Haec Caesare monente

ibit.

feci.

vised me.

Much

like one

^ho fears.

Multum

similis

metuenti.

Uses of the Prepositions.

These Prepositions are arranged

in the order given in iii, 122.

Only the commoner uses are here given. For a further account consult any
good Dictionary, Roby's Lat. Gr. 1800-2 192, or the Publ. Sch. Lat. Or.
70-72.
(See III.)

Ante, before, as, ante muros, before the walls, ante lucem, before
318.
dawn. Often used as an Adverb, previously.

Apud,

319.

at,

near, and

when used of an author

To

sup at a friend's house.

They waited near the town.

in.

Apud amicum cenare.

Apud oppTdum morati

sunt.

Apud

Note.

denotes rest at or near, ad denotes direction, motion, etc.

Originally also apud was used only of nearness of persons, ad only of nearness of places.

We
He

Apud Platonem hoc

find this in Plato.

is

320.

wrote a

From

Non apud

not in his senses.

Ad,

to,

towards,

at,

invenimus.

(Poet.)

about or almost (of number).

eum dedi (scripsi).

Septentriones regio

Litteras ad

letter to him.

the country
stretches toqjuards the North.
The defeat at Cannae.
About (almost) 40 years old.
this

se est.

point

Inde

ad

vergit.

Glades ad Gannas accepta.

Annos ad quadraginta natus.

Other phrases are, ad txixtxnvim, finally ; ad hoc, in addition to

Note.
ad verbum, w/orfl? for word; servi ad remum = remiges, rowers; nihil
ad me (sc. attinet), this is no concern of mine.
this;

Adversum, Adversus, toward or

321.
against (in a hostile sense).

How

shall I conduct myself

towards Gaesar.
To these things he replied.
I

will strive against

you.

322. Circa, Circiter,

Around the

city walls.

About the eighth hour.

to

(in

friendly sense),

Quonam modo adversus Caesarem me geram

}

Adversus ea respondit.
Adversus te contendam.

Circum, around,

about.

Gircum (circa) muros urbis.

Octavam circiter horam.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

iSa

Cis, Citra, on this

323.

Belgae dwell

o?i this

side the

side^ as

Belgae

[3^3"

cis

Rheniim

incolunt, the

Rhenus.

Contra, opposite, against. Often used as Adverb,

324.
on the other ha?id, on the contrary.

o?i

the opposite

side,

One

side of this island

site

To

Hujus

oppo-

is

Erga, towards (almost always in a friendly

amicorum erga nos,

325.

Classical writers), as, benevolentia

our friends towards

Extra,

326.

modum, beyond

unum

insulae

latus est

contra Galliam.
Contra regem conjurare.

Gaul.
conspire against a king.

sense,

amongst the

the kind feeling of

its.

outside, beyond, as, extra

muros, outside the walls, extra

measure.

Infra, below, befieath, as, terra infra caelum est, earth is below
327.
the heave?!, id infra grammatici officium est, That is beneath the business of
a grammarian.

Inter, between, among, durifig.

328.

Mount Jura

is
between
Sequani and Helvetii.

Mons

Jura inter Sequanos et

Helvetios est.
Inter saucios est.
Omnia quae inter decern annos

the

He is amojigst the wounded.

All the iniquitous and disgraceful deeds that have been committed during ten years.
Note.

nefarie
sunt.

Inter sicarios damnari, to be

flagitioseque

condemned on a charge of

tion, inter falcarios venire, to visit the scythe-juahers* street.

Pronoun one another

converse with one afiother
is

assassiiia-

Reciprocal

rendered by

inter, as, colloquimur inter nos, we

pueri inter se amant, the boys love o?ie another.

Intra, within,

329.

The

facta

Juxta, 7iear,
330.
in like manner.

as, intra

next

urbem, within the

city.

Often used as Adverb, near, equally, or

to.

Near the temple of Castor.

Next to the worship of the
Gods let faith between man

Juxta aedem Castoris.

Juxta divinas religiones

humana

fides

colatur.

and man be cultivated.

Ob,

331.

(rarely) before,

Death often passed

(much more commonly) on account

before his

Mors ob

eyes.

On

of.

oculos sacpe versata

est.

account of\he mindful wrath

Memorem

Junonis ob iram.

of Juno.

332.

Penes,

in the

guardianship of the world

333.

temple.

Pone, behind
Used

power
is

in

of,

as,

me

penes est custodia mundi, the

my power.

(rare), as,

pone aedcm Castoris, behind

rarely as Adverb, behind, after.

Castor''s

APPENDIX,

-341 ]
334.

You were

Post, behind,

Often used

after.

Tu

hiding behind the bed

of sedge.
Six years after the capture of

as

183
Adverb, behind, afterwards.

post carecta latebas.

Sexennio post Veios captos.

Veii.

Praeter, beside or past, beyond^

335.
Also used as Adverb, besides.
except.

Next day he
past the

led out his forces

camp of

contrary

to,

addition

in

to,

Postridie ejus diei(j<?^'^/jo 372,

note) praeter castra Caesaris
suas copias produxit.
Multa praeter spem mihi evenerunt.

Caesar.

things happened to me
beyond my hopes.
He arrived contrary to everyone's expectation.
They brought ten men each
besides themselves to the conference.
They have no clothing except

Many

omnium

opinionem

Praeter
pervenit.

Denos praeter

se ad colloquium

adduxerunt.
praeter

Vestitus,

non

pelles,

habent.

skins.

Caesaris hortos, near the gardens of Caesar.

336. Prope, near, as prope
Often used as Adverb, near, nearly, the Comparative and Superlative of
which, propius, proxime, are often used as Prepositions with an Accusative.

337.

We

Propter,

down

beside or near (rare), on account

Propter statuam Platonis con-

account oft\iQ cold the corn

Propter frigus frumenta ma-

near

sedimus.

statue,

On

of

Plato's

sat

was not
338.

tura non erant.

ripe.

Per, through, during, by = hy means

During many years.

He who acts
himself.
339-

bv another acts by

Secundum,

live according to

340.
more.

Supra,

along, next

me

Versus, towards,

as,

to,

according

to.

Secundum flumen.
Secundum te nihil

Used
at

est

mihi

amicius solitudine.

Secundum naturam

nature.

above, beyond.

Atticus was sitting abo^ve

table, Verrius below.
Beyond one's powers.
341.

per

facit

se.

'

Along the river.

Next to you I have no greater
friend than solitude.

To

of.

Per undas.
Per multos annos.
Qui facit per alium

Through the waves.

also as

vivcre.

Adverb, above, previously,

Supra me Atticus, infra Vcrrius

accumbebat.
Supra (also ultra) vires.

Brundisium versus, towards Brundisium.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

184

342.

Ultra, beyond,

343.

Trans,

344.

In

as, ultra

cum locum, beyond

that place.

across, as, trans mare, across the sea.

with Accusative,

for (of time), according

/;//o, to,

They make an

In fines

incursion i?ito
the territories of the Remi.
He puts the enemy to flight.

Hostes

Peace was made for two years.

Pax

J/ter the

342-

manner of

Turn your swords

Remorum

to,

against.

incursionem

faciunt.
in fugam
biennium

in

dat.
facta.

Servilem in modum.
In me convertite ferrum.

slaves.

against me.

Other phrases are, in multam noctem, deep into the night ; in horas,
fro7n hour to hour; in ^oiitiwm, for the future ; treceni numnii in capita,
300 sesterces for each person.
Note.

345' Sub with Accusative, (motion) under,

before or just after (of time).

To

up

to,

about (of time),_;W

Exercitum sub jugum mittere.

send an army under the

yoke.

They come
About

up

Sub murum succedunt.

Sub noctem.
Sub galli cantum.

the wall.

to

nightfall.

Just after cockcrow.

Super with Accusative, above, as, Nomentanus erat super ipsum,

346.
Porcius infra, Nojuentanus was above the host at table, Porcius below him.
Subter with

347.

Accusative, beneath,

subter fastigia tecti, beneath

as,

the roof of the house.

(See 122.)

A, Ab, Abs, /rom,

348.

by

= hy

agency

How

changed from the mighty

Hector!
He was slain by his own men.
Gaul touches the Rhine on the
side ofiho.

Note.

of,

on the side

of.

(Quantum mutatus ab

illo

Hcc-

tore!

suis intcrfectus est.

Gallia ab Sequanis

Sequani.

Rhcnum

at-

tingit.

So, ab aliquo stare, facere, sentire, or esse, to be

on one's side

hoc

me

or a me facit, this is in my favour.

Other phrases are, a summo
bibere, to drink in succession beginni?ig from the head of the table; (servus)
a mami, a secretary; a fronte, in the van; a latere, in the flank; a tergo,
est

in the rear.

like

349.

Absque,

absque

without, rare except

te foret, if

it

Coram, in the presence

350.
presence of the people.

351.

They

De, from, down from,

set forth

ritories.

from

among

the comic writers in phrases

were not for you.

of, as,

of,

their ter-

coram populo

loqui,

to

concernuig.

Dc

finibus suis cxierunt.

speak in

APPENDIX.

-358.]

He

threw himself do^n from

the wall.
The other

instances

of this

185

De muro

se projecit.

Cetera de hoc genere.

kind.

temple built of snow-white

marble.

They

treat concerning peace.

Templum

niveo de
factum.
De pace agunt.

marmore

Note.
Other phrases are, de nocte, by night; de tertia vigih'a, at the third
watch; de more, according to custom; de integro, afresh; de improviso,
unexpectedly ; de industria, on purpose.

Palam, in the presence of, as, palam Caesare,

More commonly used as Adverb, openly.

352.
Caesar.

in the presence

of

Clam, without the knowledge of as, clam patre {also clam

353patrem), without my father's knowledge.
Often used as Adverb, secretly.

Cum, with, (l) in the sense of together with, as, vagamur egentes
354.
conjugibus et liberis, we are wandering in poverty with our wives and
children; Romani cum GaUis contendunt, the Romans coiitend with the
Gauls ; (2) denoting manner, as, cum celeritate venit, he came with speed.

cum

Ex, E,

355.

out of from, after,

He
He

runs out of the house.

returned from Asia.
After his consulship Gotta set
out for Gaul.

of,

on accoimt of in accordance with.

Ex
Ex

aedibus currit.
Asia rediit.
Gotta ex consulatu
fectus in Galliam.

est

pro-

Note
to

So aliud ex alio, one thi?ig after another ; diem ex die expectare,

I.
wait one day after ajiother from day to day.

statue

When

made

the

alarmed

on

0/*

bronze.

had grown

state

of the

account

debt.
In accordance ivith a decree of
the Senate.

Note

Other phrases

2.

are, e re,

injury of; e regione, opposite; e

pectedly; ex aequo, ex commodo,
asse, heir to the

356.

357*

Abl., as,

whole

commota

Ex

senatusconsulto.

/or the advantage of; ex injuria, /or the

vestigio, instantly; ex improviso, unexetc., for aeque, commode, etc.; heres ex

as, sine

uHa dubitatione, without any doubt.

placed after its Case, and takes Gen. or

urbium Corcyrae tenus, as far as the cities of Corcyra ; Arimino

Tenus,

as

far

as, is

Ariminum.

358. Pro, before, in the front part of,for =

in proportion to or according to.

The camp
walls.

alieno

civitas.

estate.

Sine, without,

tenus, as far as

as,

Statua ex acre facta.

esset ex acre

Quum

is

pitched before the

u\

behalf

of,

instead

of

Gastra pro mocnibus locantur.

LATIN GRAMMAR,

l86

Hac

Having announced this matter

on {i.e. standing on the front

[35^-

re pro suggestu pronun-

tiata.

part of) the platform.

To
I
I

and hearths.
go instead of you.
have brought him up as my
fight for altars

will

own

aris et focis

Ego

ibo pro te.

Hunc

pro

meo

pugnare.

filio

359.

to

Pro

one's ability.

Prae,

compared

before,

with,

He

Notice also the phrase prae

360.
is

in

In

with Ablative,

shew, exhibit.

during, in the case

In urbe

the city.

has a crown on his head.

During my youth.
This happens most fortunately
in the case o/'Crassus.

Other phrases
fiumine, a bridge over a
Note.

parte.

to.

Solem prae jaculorum multitudine non videbimus.

se ferre, to
in, on,

virili

owing

Prae se pugionem tulit.

Prae illo parvi habentur.

carried a dagger before him.

are thought little of in
comparison ivitb him.
O^ing to the multitude of darts
we shall not see the sun.

They

of.

est.

Goronam in capite habet.

In adolescentia mea.
Hoc in Crasso percommode
accidit.

are,

in

aere

alieno esse, to be

i?i

Sub

362.

Priamo

debt;

pons

in

river.

with Abl., under, (of time) at, as, sub divo,

361.
shy, sub adventu Caesaris, at the arrival of Caesar.

eduxi.

son.

According

He
He

Pro

Super with Abl., upon (rare), concerning,

many things about Priam.

mider the open

as,

multa

super

rogitans, ashing

Subter with Abl., under, as, subter densa

363.
thick testudo.

testudine,

u?ider a

Miscellaneous.
364.

Whilst humouring the

young men

forgot that

was

Dum

obsequor adolescentibus
esse oblitus sum.

me senem

old.

Rule. Dum, in the sense of whilst, is usually found with the Present
rather than the Imperfect Indicative in describing past events.
Madv. 336,
Obs. 2.

He causes engines to be Machinas exstruendas curat

constructed in order that he
quo facilius urbem expugmay more easily storm the city.
net.
Kule. Quo is used for ut final with comparative Adjectives and Adverbs.

365.

366.

How much strength still

remains to you

Quantum
supSrest

roboris

adhuc

tibi

APPENDIX.

-372.]

T87

He

had eloquence enough but

Satis
eloquentiae,
sapientiae
too little wisdom.
parum habuit.
Bule. The Neuters of Adjectives denoting qnmitity are frequently used

as Substantives, and take a dependent Genitive of Definition, e. g. quantum,

tantum, aliquantum, quid, nonnihil or aliquid, plus, plurimum, minus.
(To
these must be added the Adverbs, parum, too little, satis, enough, nimis, too
much, and abunde, abundafice of.) The poets extend this usage to other
Adjectives besides those of quantity, as, amara curarum, the bitterness of cares.

367.

He departed from Rome

Roma

invitus discessit.

unwillingly.
Note. It is constantly necessary, particularly in poetry, to translate a Latin
The use of matutinus, vespertinus, nocAdjective by an English Adverb.
turnus, for in the morning, in the evening, at night, etc., is especially
frequent.

Not even

368.
kill

a king

may

men uncondemned.

Indemnatos occidere ne
quidem licet.

regi

Rule. The words ne quidem, not even, are never written together but
always have the word or words emphasized by quidem written between them.

He has accurately de369.

scribed not only the earth but
also the stars.
spare foreign
ow/y did
He
troops, but not e'ven his own.

Non solum
stellas

terras sed etiam

accurate descripsit.

Non modo
quidem

alTenis

sed ne suis

militibus pepercit.

Rule. Non modo, not only, when followed by ne quidem

non modo non. Madvig, 461, b (6).
It

370.

was owing

to

Cato

that I was not condemned to

death.
That victory cost the Garthaginians much blood.

Per Catonem
capitis

stetit

is

qudminus

damnarer.

Multo sanguine ea Poenis

Poenis

is

(the credit of) the Carthaginians at the price of

Dat., and sanguine Abl. of Price.

The Romans

371.

w^ere su-

perior not only in forces but

more

money.
Pompey, and Grassus.

vic-

toria stetit.

Literally, stood to

blood.

used for

Romani quum

much

copiis turn ar-

gento superiorcs erant.

especially in

Caesar,

Publius Crassus with

the 7th legion was wintering
very near the Ocean.

372.

Pompcuis, Crassus;
Caesar,
or, Caesar, et Pompeius, ct
Grassus.
Grassus cum Icgionc scptima proximus Occanuin hicmabat.

P.

An Accusative is sometimes found after the Adjectives propior,

Note.
on the
proximus also after the adverbs pridic, postridie, as postridie pugnam,
day after the battle.
;

LATIN GRAMMAR.

i88

He

373.

than wise.
The wiser a
he is.

is

more prudent

man

is

the happier

quam

Prudentior
Qiio

sapientior est.

sapientior eo beatior
quisque sapientissimus

qiiis

Ut

or

373-

ita beatissimus.

More than
Note.

six

Quam

374.

is

hundred

Plus sexcenti ceciderunt.

fell.

often omitted after plus, amplius, minus.

entrust you

q.vith

the

command.

Imperium

tibi

committo

[or

permitto].

I threaten you qvith death.

This happened to me nvhen a

Mortem tibi minor.

Hoc mihi puero accidit.

boy.

They were

375.

delighted

with your letter.

Eos

epistola tua

summo

gaudio

affecit.

Note. It is often advisable to throw an English Passive into the equivalent

Active form, in translating into Latin.

376.
No'e.

He

is

Mortuus

dead.

est.

The

English Present, especially in the Passive Voice, as, the trees

are cut down,' often implies a completed action, and in such case must always
be rendered by the Latin Perfect. So 'the trees were cut down' if were = had
been,

'

must be Pluperfect

in Latin.

begin to love.
I begin to repent of the deed.
I ceased to love.
1 ceased to be ashamed of my
poverty.

377.

Amare

coepi.

Paenitere

Amare

me

facti coepit.

desii.

Paupertatis

me

pudere

dcsiit.

Note.
Certain Verbs, as possum, coepi, debeo, desino, soleo, are used
Personally or Impersonally according to the nature of their Complementary
Verbs ( 273).
Coepi and desino sometimes take a Passive form when their

Complementary Verb

The

city

is

Passive (Madvig, 161),

began to be besieged.

378. Be sure you return.

Don't speak.
Note on the Imperative. The

Urbs

as.

obsideri coepta est.

Fac redeas.

Ne

locutus

sis.

Latins employ many circumlocutions to

avoid a direct Imperative.
Thus (a) for Afiirmative Imperatives we find
fac intelligam, fac valeas, velim abeas, etc., {h) for Negative Imperatives we
find cave credas, nolo dicps, noli contendere, ne credideris. No with 2nd Pers.
Present Subjunctive, as ne credas, is seldom used, and ne with 2nd Pers. Imperative, as ne crede, hardly ever except in Poetry.
The poets also use the
forms fuge suspicari, mitte sectari, parce timere, omitte mirari, absiste
moveri, desine sperare, and the like, for suspect not^ follow fiot, etc.

It

is

These
do {or

things are diffito be done).

difficult to tame a lion.

379.
cult to

Hacc

factu

diflicilia

Leonem domare

sunt,

difficile est.

APPENDIX,

-387-]

Note.
The Supine in -u is Passive in its signification, and does not
govern a Case. As a rule, avoid using it unless it can be rendered in English
a Present Infinitive Passive.
See also Madvig, 412.

by

Lo, Priam
380.
Lo, four altars

En Priamus
En qiiattuor

Most

Note.

aras

may

be followed by a Nominative or Vocative

Case some, as en, ecce, by an Accusative also.
Hei and vae prefer a
Dative, as, hei mihi, vae victis.
Interjections

He hopes to come.
promises to come.

Sperat se venturum esse.

Promittit se venturum esse.

381.

He

Rule.

After hope and promise use the Future Infinitive in Latin.

He

382.

promised to come.

Promisit se venturum.

The omission of esse generally, and

of est, sunt, in Principal (rarely in Subordinate) Clauses is common in all
Latin authors.
Venturum

Note.

for

venturum

esse.

It is necessary that you

should do this.
Take care you do not waste

Necesse est hoc facias [for ut

hoc facias].
Gave tempus absumas [/or ne

383.

your time.
Rule.

absumas].

When

licet,

usually omit ut.

He

384.

Ne

pities

Rule.

necesse
is

est,

and oportet take the Subjunctive, they

sometimes omitted

no one.
From nemo

after certain Verbs, as caveo.

Nullius miseretur.
let

me never

see

Nemin/s or ntmme.

Use

nullius, nullo, instead of neminis,

Many

385.

great disadvant-

nemine.

Multa

et

magna incommoda.

ages.

Rule. Two Adjectives cannot be joined to the same Noun in Latin

without a connecting particle in the same way as they are in such English
Say homo audacissimus
phrases as a hold had man,' a cold wet day,' &c.
ac sceleratissimus, &c.
'

'

386.
to his

They returned each man

own city.

He

has leisure
philosophy.

for

studying

over with the state.

I have been the
pupil of Socrates.

It is all

For four years

come.
387.
fear he will 7iot come.
feared he ^vould come.
feared he would not come.
I

fear he

q.vill

In suam quisque

urbem

redie-

runt.

Philosophiae vacat.

Actum est dc republica.

Quartum jam annum Socratcm
audio.

Vercor ne vcniat.
(or nc non) vcniat.
Vereor
Verebar ne veniret.
Verebar ut {or ne non) vcnirct.

LATIN GRAMMAR.

190
3^8.

Nihil habeo

have no reason to find

have no reason to fear you.

Whether

389.

true or false,

this

news

shall set

quod incfisem

se-

nectutem.
Non est cur te timeam.

fault with old age.

Sive vera sive falsa haec sunt,

prima luce proficiscar.

is

out at

dawn.

Utrum

Whether

this news is true or

uncertain.
I wish to ascertain w^hether we
are conquerors or conquered.
wish to act honourably,
I
whether we are conquerors or
false

vera an falsa haec sint

incertum

is

est.

Utrum

victores an victi simus

cognoscere volo.
Honeste agere volo, sive victores sive victi sumus.

conquered.
Note.
it is

Whether introducing a
'

s ippositiofi

He

390.

is

the best poet in

the world.

all

sive

when

the best citizens are

accused

Poeta est qualis

terrarum nemo.

OptTmus

of theft.

The

Interrogative

pleasantest days
shortest.

are

al-

My

orbe
furti

civis

Jucundissimus quisque dies brevissimus est.

Cambridge, October 18.

(Latin Letter.)

391.

quisque

in toto

accusatur.

ways the

is

utrum.

dear Marcus,

I am writing in great haste, as the post is just going out.

I arrived
here yesterday, and have visited most places of interest in the town
but it
would be impossible in this hurried letter to do justice to its numerous and
splendid buildings, and indeed it is not worth while attempting to do so, as
you will, I expect, be here yourself in a few days, which I am very glad of.
Give
I am quite well and hope to have an equally good account of you.
my love to all at home, and
;

Believe me,

Your

affectionate brother,
Qiiintus.

Quintus Marco

S.

D.P.

V. B. E. E. V.
Sunmia festinatione scribebam, carissime frater, quod
Hue heri perveni, et quae in oppido
in eo erat ut tabellarius proficisceretur.
digna visu sunt plcraquc inspexi, sed neque raptim scribenti tot tantaque
acdificia satis describere licet, neque enim operae pretium est id facere conari,
quod te ipsum intra paucos dies adforc arbitror, quae res me vchementer
S.

delcctat.

Te tuosque multum amamus.

Data (or dabam)

a. d. xv.

Vale.

Kal. Nov. Cantabrigiae.

APPENDIX.

-393-]

191

CONDITIONAL OR HYPOTHETICAL SENTENCES.

392. Sentences containing a Conditional clause
be divided into three classes.

Where

(a)

the condition

what the consequence

state

is

assumed

The

is.

to be

a fact, and

usual formula

199

e)

may

we wish

to

is

haec facis, peccas.

(Greek, el ravra Spaj, ayLapTaveis.)
Ifyou do this, you sin,

Si

Where

the condition is assumed, as

state what the consequences
The formulas are
respectively.

{b)

and we wish to
be,

1.

(i) likely, (2) possible,

(i) ^ill be, (2) q^jould

haec facies, peccabis.

ravra dpdcreis, djjLaprrjaeL.)
Si haec feceris, peccabis.
(idp ravra dpdarjs, dfjiaprrjaei.)
Ifyou do this, you ^ill sin. (See
Si

(ei

2.

298.)

facias, pecces.

Si

haec

(ei

ravra

dpcprjs, dfjiaprdvoLS av.)

If you ^ere

'to

do this (at any time),^0M ^ould

sin,

as (i) not taking place now,

and we wish to state what
(2) not halving taken place pre'viously,
the consequences (i) would be, (2) would ha've been, respectively.

Where

{c)

The

the condition

is

assumed

formulas are

haec faceres, peccares.

1.

Si

2.

ravra edpas, rjpLapraues av.)

sinning)
Ifyou were doing this (now), you would sin (or be
Sic haec fecisses, peccasses.
(el ravra edpaaas, fffxapres av.)
Ifyou had done this, you would ha've sinned.
(et

393.

In Oratio Obliqua these forms are

si

haec

facias, peccare.

te, si

haec

| "^^^^^-^^ }

(a) Ait te,

(b)
(c)

Ait
I.

2.

Aiebat
Aiebat

te, si
te, si

peccaturum

esse.

haec faceres, peccaturum

haec fecisses, peccaturum

esse.
fuisse.

action, and a.s n rule

with Imperfect Subjunctive denotes continuous
and then (in
it refers to past time,
sometimes
But
time.
present
refers to
must translate 'If he had done (or
default of an exact English equivalent) we
i

Si

been doing)

this,

he would have sinned.'

LATIN GRAMMAR,

[ 394.

PRONUNCIATION OF LATINS

394.
(1)

Latin was probably pronounced as follows

Vowels.

a in father ; a like the a in along,

the a
pane ; e like the e in men,
1 like the / in machine; t like the /
pity.
i preceded by a vowel was probably pronounced like
y thus
maior, eins, Troia, cuius [often written major, ejus, Troja, cujus\ are
pronounced ma-yor, e-yus^ Tro-ya, cu-yus,
0 like the oa in moat ; 0 like the 0 in ro^.
u like the u in rule, not with a y-sound prefixed as in
mule ; u like the u in put, not as in cut.
y as German ii, the sound inclining to /.
a

like the

e like

The rule is to pronounce each constituent

(2) Diphthongs.
vowel as rapidly as possible. This will give
ae as the ai in bail,
as the o^v in po^ver,
oe as the oy in boy, the 0 being

au

ui (in huic, cui) as

French

more

distinct than the

e,

oui,

(3) Consonants.

was always pronounced as

^ as ^ in get,
ng as ng + g, as in anger, not as in hafiger,
r was always trilled; thus/tr is sounded as
c

in perry,

not as in

pert.
s was almost always sharp [as the s of sin]
in a few words
where the s comes between two vowels, as rosa, musa, wiser, it
;

had a soft sound like z.

t was pronounced as it is in English, except that it never had
the sound of sh when followed by io.
ch was sounded as k followed by h,
bs, bt were sounded as ps, pt, and were often so written, as aps,
iupter.
'V

perhaps as

qu as in English.

Originally these rules were founded on the Syllabus of Latin pronunciation (Deighton and Bell, Cambridge
Parker, Oxford), drawn up in
1873 at the request of Head Masters of Schools. They have now been
altered in order to admit some of the views propounded in Roby*s I.atin
Grannnar, 29 Sj. The (]ucstion is still ojicn to so mucli doubt and
uncertainty that the reader who desires detailed information must consult
the works above mentioned, and other treatises on the subject.
'